Of schisme a defence of the Church of England against the exceptions of the Romanists / by H. Hammond ...
         Hammond, Henry, 1605-1660.
      
       
         
           1653
        
      
       Approx. 285 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 97 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2008-09 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A45426
         Wing H562A
         ESTC R40938
         19537241
         ocm 19537241
         109048
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A45426)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 109048)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 1689:5)
      
       
         
           
             Of schisme a defence of the Church of England against the exceptions of the Romanists / by H. Hammond ...
             Hammond, Henry, 1605-1660.
          
           [2], 183 , [6] p.
           
             Printed by J. Flesher for Richard Royston ...,
             London :
             M.DC.LIII [1653]
          
           
             Errata: p. 183.
             Advertisement: p. [3]-[6] at end.
             Imperfect: tightly bound.
             Reproduction of original in the Huntington Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Church of England -- Apologetic works.
           Catholic Church -- Controversial literature.
           Schism.
        
      
    
     
        2005-12 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-05 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2007-03 Robyn Anspach
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2007-03 Robyn Anspach
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2008-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           OF
           SCHISME
           .
        
         
           A
           DEFENCE
           OF
           THE
           
             Church
             of
             England
          
           ,
           Against
           the
           EXCEPTIONS
           OF
           
             the
             Romanists
          
           .
        
         
           By
           H.
           HAMMOND
           ,
           D.
           D.
           
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             J.
             Flesher
          
           for
           
             Richard
             Royston
          
           at
           the
           Angel
           in
           Ivie-lane
           .
           M.
           DC.LIII·
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           Of
           SCHISME
           .
           A
           Defence
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           against
           the
           Objections
           of
           the
           Romanist
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             An
             Introduction
             ,
             the
             danger
             ,
             and
             sin
             of
             Schisme
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1
             
             TWO
             wishes
             rather
             then
             hopes
             there
             are
             ,
             wherein
             all
             Christians
             are
             very
             much
             concerned
             ;
             First
             ,
             That
             all
             that
             have
             given
             up
             their
             names
             to
             that
             
               holy
               profession
            
             ,
             would
             sincerely
             betake
             themselves
             to
             the
             discharge
             of
             all
             those
             duties
             
             (
             as
             well
             more
             common
             ,
             one
             towards
             another
             ,
             as
             more
             particular
             ,
             of
             each
             single
             man
             toward
             God
             and
             toward
             himself
             )
             which
             Christ
             came
             on
             purpose
             to
             plant
             in
             ,
             or
             reduce
             into
             the
             world
             :
             The
             Second
             ,
             
             That
             the
             Faith
             of
             Christ
             might
             gain
             an
             
               amicable
               ,
               universal
            
             
             reception
             in
             the
             hearts
             of
             all
             men
             over
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             mankinde
             (
             by
             an
             uniform
             obedience
             to
             those
             divine
             precepts
             which
             are
             most
             agreeable
             to
             our
             rational
             ,
             i.
             e.
             humane
             nature
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             able
             to
             advance
             us
             to
             the
             highest
             pitch
             of
             
               moral
               excellency
            
             and
             dignity
             ,
             that
             any
             created
             substance
             is
             capable
             of
             )
             might
             attain
             the
             great
             end
             of
             our
             creation
             ,
             a
             paradise
             ,
             or
             blisful
             beeing
             here
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             only
             with
             the
             mixture
             of
             some
             allayes
             to
             that
             blisse
             (
             and
             those
             necessary
             both
             to
             the
             exercise
             of
             some
             most
             eminent
             virtues
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             the
             Angels
             are
             not
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             passible
             bodies
             ,
             capable
             of
             ,
             and
             also
             to
             the
             inhaunsing
             of
             our
             crown
             )
             and
             then
             a
             state
             of
             infinite
             reward
             ,
             and
             uncompounded
             felicity
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             
             §
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             later
             of
             these
             may
             in
             Gods
             good
             time
             be
             effectually
             attempted
             by
             all
             
               Christian
               Kings
            
             ,
             and
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             advance
             more
             successfully
             ,
             then
             of
             late
             it
             hath
             done
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             the
             indevour
             of
             all
             those
             ,
             whose
             eminencie
             in
             the
             world
             hath
             given
             them
             capacities
             ,
             or
             qualifications
             to
             contribute
             some
             considerable
             degree
             
             of
             assistance
             to
             so
             glorious
             a
             work
             .
             And
             for
             others
             ,
             whose
             inferiority
             of
             condition
             or
             sphere
             of
             motion
             ,
             and
             the
             improbability
             ,
             consequent
             to
             that
             ,
             of
             advancing
             so
             magnificent
             a
             designe
             is
             their
             just
             excuse
             for
             not
             entertaining
             any
             such
             hopeless
             thoughts
             ,
             it
             is
             yet
             their
             certain
             duty
             by
             constant
             ,
             fervent
             prayers
             to
             solicite
             the
             
               good
               hand
               of
               God
            
             ,
             who
             alone
             can
             accomplish
             so
             divine
             a
             work
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             diligent
             strict
             observance
             of
             all
             
               Christs
               precepts
            
             to
             exemplifie
             to
             all
             others
             the
             power
             ,
             and
             real
             energie
             of
             the
             faith
             of
             Christ
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             admitted
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             thereby
             to
             attract
             all
             others
             to
             the
             imbracing
             of
             that
             ,
             which
             hath
             such
             admirable
             virtues
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             
             As
             for
             the
             former
             ,
             That
             is
             (
             in
             proportion
             to
             his
             condition
             )
             the
             known
             duty
             of
             every
             
               single
               Christian
            
             ,
             much
             more
             of
             every
             congregation
             ,
             and
             community
             of
             such
             ;
             who
             are
             therefore
             associated
             into
             one
             body
             ,
             that
             each
             supplying
             the
             defects
             ,
             and
             infirmities
             of
             others
             ,
             they
             may
             by
             so
             advantagious
             an
             instrument
             ,
             as
             union
             of
             forces
             is
             ,
             be
             enabled
             to
             doe
             what
             without
             it
             they
             are
             justly
             supposeable
             
             to
             want
             means
             ,
             or
             strength
             to
             doe
             ,
             and
             so
             are
             deprived
             of
             all
             excuse
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             found
             culpable
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             In
             this
             kinde
             1.
             
             
             The
             duty
             of
             Charity
             ,
             and
             peace
             to
             all
             :
             2.
             
             of
             ready
             ,
             and
             filial
             obedience
             of
             those
             under
             authority
             to
             their
             lawful
             authorized
             superiours
             :
             and
             3.
             
             of
             
               charitative
               paternal
            
             exercise
             of
             their
             power
             ,
             in
             all
             those
             that
             are
             invested
             with
             it
             by
             Christ
             ,
             may
             be
             justly
             looked
             on
             as
             virtues
             of
             the
             
               first
               magnitude
            
             ,
             which
             have
             the
             most
             lively
             characters
             ,
             and
             impresses
             of
             the
             
               Law-giver
               ,
               Christ's
               image
            
             ,
             and
             superscription
             upon
             them
             ,
             &
             accordingly
             deserve
             the
             
               first
               fruits
            
             of
             our
             care
             and
             diligence
             that
             they
             be
             most
             diligently
             conserved
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             ,
             and
             industriously
             reduced
             ,
             where
             by
             the
             malignity
             ,
             or
             infelicity
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             they
             are
             torn
             ,
             or
             escaped
             from
             us
             .
          
           
             
             §
             .
             5.
             
             For
             that
             malices
             ,
             and
             rancors
             ,
             and
             animosities
             among
             
               single
               Christians
            
             ,
             but
             especially
             
               seditious
               ,
               mutinous
            
             spirits
             ,
             that
             divisions
             ,
             and
             schismes
             ,
             and
             ruptures
             ,
             and
             preparative
             thereto
             ,
             
               causless
               anathematizing
            
             ,
             and
             tyrannizing
             over
             the
             Faith
             of
             
               Christ's
               flock
            
             ,
             are
             most
             scandalously
             
             contrary
             to
             Christ's
             platform
             ,
             to
             the
             prophecie
             of
             the
             plough-shares
             ,
             and
             the
             pruning-hooks
             ,
             the
             happy
             exchange
             for
             the
             
               sanguinary
               ,
               hostile
            
             instruments
             ,
             is
             a
             truth
             so
             eminently
             ,
             and
             signally
             visible
             in
             the
             practise
             ,
             and
             doctrine
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             doubted
             ,
             or
             questioned
             on
             either
             side
             .
             And
             agreeably
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             one
             vice
             ,
             which
             hath
             fallen
             under
             so
             much
             of
             the
             displeasure
             ,
             and
             correption
             ,
             and
             severest
             discipline
             of
             the
             
               holy
               Fathers
            
             of
             the
             
               Antient
               Church
            
             ,
             as
             this
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             and
             the
             ingredients
             ,
             and
             preparatives
             to
             it
             have
             done
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             
             It
             is
             but
             a
             small
             part
             of
             the
             character
             thereof
             ,
             that
             from
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             and
             S.
             Jude
             they
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             special
             piece
             of
             (a)
             carnality
             ;
             an
             (b)
             excommunicating
             and
             condemning
             ,
             i.
             e.
             voluntary
             inflicting
             of
             that
             punishment
             on
             ones
             self
             ,
             which
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             Church
             use
             to
             inflict
             
             on
             the
             most
             scandalous
             sinners
             ;
             that
             (a)
             they
             that
             so
             divide
             on
             their
             
               own
               presumption
            
             ,
             may
             not
             at
             their
             
               own
               will
               return
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
            
             and
             communicate
             again
             with
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             his
             Christian
             people
             ;
             that
             (b)
             it
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             Faith
             ,
             (c)
             even
             when
             it
             hath
             not
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             doctrinal
             points
             ,
             any
             heresie
             joyned
             with
             it
             ;
             (d)
             Contrary
             to
             charity
             ,
             yea
             to
             all
             the
             (e)
             advantages
             that
             belong
             to
             
             a
             member
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             (f)
             benefits
             of
             prayers
             and
             sacraments
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             (g)
             as
             bad
             as
             heresie
             ;
             that
             (h)
             there
             was
             never
             any
             heresie
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             founded
             in
             it
             ;
             and
             (i)
             that
             it
             is
             constantly
             forced
             ,
             in
             its
             own
             defence
             ,
             to
             conclude
             in
             some
             heresie
             or
             other
             (
             all
             of
             which
             being
             put
             together
             will
             be
             sufficient
             to
             keep
             men
             from
             being
             in
             love
             with
             the
             guilt
             ,
             or
             company
             of
             schismaticks
             )
             but
             it
             is
             farther
             branded
             with
             these
             superadditions
             of
             terror
             ,
             that
             (k)
             there
             
             is
             scarce
             any
             crime
             so
             grear
             as
             schism
             ,
             not
             (l)
             idolatry
             ,
             (m)
             
               sacrilege
               ,
               parricide
            
             ;
             that
             it
             hath
             been
             under
             peculiar
             marks
             of
             
               Gods
               indignation
            
             ,
             in
             the
             story
             of
             the
             
               Jewish
               Church
            
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             (n)
             case
             of
             the
             
               ten
               Tribes
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             (o)
             Samaritanes
             ,
             who
             are
             ranked
             with
             the
             
               Gentiles
               ,
               Mat.
            
             10.5
             .
             (p)
             and
             so
             in
             the
             story
             of
             Core
             ,
             &c.
             that
             it
             is
             the
             (q)
             Antichristianisme
             mentioned
             by
             
             Saint
             John
             ,
             the
             (r)
             worshipping
             or
             
               serving
               the
               Devil
            
             ,
             and
             ,
             in
             a
             word
             ,
             so
             great
             a
             crime
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             (ſ)
             expiable
             by
             Martyrdome
             to
             him
             that
             continues
             in
             ,
             and
             hath
             not
             repented
             ,
             and
             returned
             from
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             Much
             more
             of
             this
             subject
             is
             every
             where
             to
             be
             met
             with
             in
             the
             Antient
             monuments
             ,
             and
             nothing
             of
             alleviation
             to
             be
             had
             for
             any
             ,
             who
             have
             not
             the
             (t)
             excuse
             of
             
               involuntary
               seduction
            
             ,
             of
             error
             ,
             or
             simplicity
             to
             plead
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             surest
             way
             to
             doe
             that
             effectually
             ,
             to
             qualifie
             them
             for
             that
             plea
             ,
             is
             to
             forsake
             their
             course
             ,
             to
             
               get
               out
            
             of
             so
             dangerous
             a
             snare
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             Nay
             't
             is
             farther
             observable
             ,
             how
             unsafe
             it
             hath
             been
             deemed
             by
             these
             ,
             for
             (u)
             light
             ,
             and
             inconsiderable
             causes
             to
             break
             this
             unity
             ,
             it
             being
             in
             their
             opinion
             very
             (x)
             hard
             ,
             if
             not
             
             impossible
             to
             receive
             such
             an
             injury
             ,
             or
             provocation
             from
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             may
             make
             a
             rupture
             ,
             or
             separation
             excusable
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Vniversal
             ,
             or
             truly
             
               Catholick
               Church
            
             of
             Christ
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             ,
             in
             (y)
             S.
             
             Augustine's
             opinion
             ,
             possible
             that
             there
             should
             be
             any
             just
             cause
             for
             any
             to
             separate
             from
             it
             ,
             nor
             consequently
             Apologie
             to
             be
             made
             for
             those
             ,
             that
             on
             any
             ,
             whether
             true
             ,
             or
             pretended
             cause
             whatsoever
             ,
             have
             really
             incurred
             this
             guilt
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             From
             these
             premises
             thus
             acknowledged
             and
             undeniable
             ,
             the
             conclusion
             follows
             irrefragably
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             the
             examination
             of
             the
             occasion
             ,
             or
             cause
             ,
             or
             motive
             of
             any
             mans
             schisme
             ,
             that
             is
             worth
             the
             producing
             or
             heeding
             in
             this
             matter
             ;
             The
             one
             thing
             that
             is
             of
             force
             ,
             and
             moment
             ,
             and
             ,
             by
             consequence
             ,
             pertinent
             to
             be
             inquired
             into
             ,
             is
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             fact
             ,
             whether
             this
             charge
             be
             sufficiently
             proved
             or
             confessed
             ,
             i.
             e.
             whether
             he
             that
             is
             thus
             accused
             ,
             stands
             really
             guilty
             of
             separation
             from
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ
             ;
             And
             this
             will
             be
             a
             means
             of
             shortening
             our
             method
             ,
             and
             giving
             very
             moderate
             
             bounds
             to
             our
             ensuing
             discourse
             ,
             which
             will
             now
             be
             regularly
             finished
             by
             making
             these
             
               two
               inquiries
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             1.
             
             What
             Schisme
             is
             ,
             and
             how
             it
             may
             be
             most
             fitly
             branched
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             2.
             
             What
             Evidences
             are
             producible
             against
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             whereby
             it
             may
             be
             thought
             liable
             to
             this
             guilt
             ,
             and
             withall
             how
             it
             may
             be
             cleared
             from
             all
             force
             of
             those
             evidences
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             Which
             when
             we
             have
             done
             ,
             we
             shall
             not
             from
             the
             office
             of
             Advocates
             proceed
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Accuser
             ,
             or
             Judge
             ,
             but
             leave
             all
             others
             ,
             that
             are
             under
             the
             same
             charge
             ,
             to
             their
             
               proper
               tribunal
            
             ,
             to
             stand
             or
             fall
             ,
             as
             they
             shall
             appear
             able
             ,
             or
             not
             able
             ,
             upon
             firm
             grounds
             ,
             to
             maintain
             ,
             and
             vindicate
             their
             innocence
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             What
             Schisme
             is
             ,
             together
             with
             some
             general
             considerations
             thereon
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             OUR
             
               first
               enquirie
            
             must
             be
             
               what
               Schism
            
             is
             ,
             in
             the
             strict
             &
             proper
             notion
             (
             as
             (a)
             distinguished
             from
             Heresie
             ,
             the
             (b)
             introducing
             of
             some
             
               false
               doctrine
            
             into
             the
             Church
             .
             )
             And
             herein
             there
             will
             be
             no
             difficulty
             the
             Origination
             ,
             and
             
               universal
               use
            
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             according
             and
             consenting
             exactly
             ,
             to
             give
             us
             the
             importance
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             
             §
             .
             2.
             
             In
             the
             origination
             of
             it
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             scindi
             ,
             it
             signifies
             literally
             scissure
             ,
             or
             division
             ,
             which
             being
             a
             figurative
             ,
             and
             withall
             a
             relative
             word
             ,
             referring
             to
             some
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             thus
             cut
             or
             divided
             ,
             but
             that
             no
             natural
             ,
             but
             
               political
               body
            
             ,
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             Congregation
             of
             Christians
             ,
             the
             literal
             notation
             of
             the
             word
             in
             the
             Ecclesiastical
             use
             ,
             will
             be
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               a
               division
            
             in
             or
             
               from
               the
               Vnity
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ
               .
            
             Only
             the
             form
             &
             termination
             of
             the
             word
             must
             be
             farther
             noted
             ,
             which
             being
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             from
             the
             active
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
             but
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             from
             the
             passive
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             use
             of
             such
             passives
             is
             observable
             ,
             being
             of
             the
             nature
             (
             and
             for
             want
             of
             conjugations
             ,
             designed
             to
             supply
             the
             place
             )
             of
             the
             
               Hebrew
               Hithpa●l
            
             ,
             and
             so
             noting
             
               reciprocal
               action
            
             or
             passion
             ,
             where
             the
             passion
             is
             from
             ,
             and
             
               on
               himself
            
             ,
             and
             is
             most
             fully
             expressed
             by
             the
             
               Latine
               Neutrals
            
             ,
             which
             partake
             both
             of
             active
             and
             passive
             ,
             but
             are
             strictly
             neither
             of
             them
             .
             This
             might
             be
             largely
             exemplified
             in
             the
             use
             of
             other
             words
             ,
             but
             the
             advantage
             of
             the
             observation
             will
             not
             be
             proportionable
             to
             the
             length
             of
             such
             a
             diversion
             ,
             being
             no
             more
             then
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             distinct
             notion
             of
             the
             word
             [
             Schisme
             ]
             is
             a
             voluntary
             dividing
             ,
             
             or
             ,
             in
             the
             neutral
             expression
             ,
             which
             the
             Fathers
             familiarly
             use
             ,
             a
             separating
             ,
             or
             receding
             of
             any
             member
             from
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             i.
             e.
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             so
             that
             the
             scismatick
             is
             he
             that
             *
             
               divides
               himself
            
             from
             the
             
               Church
               of
               God
            
             ,
             not
             that
             is
             
               cut
               off
            
             ,
             or
             
             separated
             ,
             he
             that
             (a)
             
               goes
               out
            
             ,
             or
             (b)
             withdraws
             ,
             or
             recedes
             of
             his
             own
             accord
             ,
             not
             he
             that
             
               is
               cast
               out
            
             by
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             
             For
             whatever
             blame
             ,
             and
             vengeance
             may
             justly
             light
             on
             such
             ,
             who
             are
             by
             the
             righteous
             ,
             and
             
               charitative
               Censures
            
             of
             the
             
               Church
               ,
               cut
               off
            
             from
             communion
             ,
             in
             case
             they
             doe
             not
             by
             
               humiliation
               ,
               confession
            
             ,
             and
             reformation
             ,
             and
             
               meet
               fruits
            
             of
             repentance
             ,
             prepare
             and
             qualifie
             themselves
             for
             readmission
             to
             that
             Communion
             ,
             yet
             certainly
             this
             punishment
             of
             Excommunication
             is
             very
             disparate
             and
             distant
             from
             the
             crime
             of
             schisme
             ,
             the
             Judge
             ,
             i.
             e.
             Bishop
             or
             Governour
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             being
             the
             only
             actor
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             (
             and
             that
             
               ex
               officio
            
             ,
             an
             act
             of
             duty
             in
             him
             ,
             when
             duly
             executed
             )
             but
             in
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             offender
             ,
             or
             guilty
             person
             ,
             who
             is
             therefore
             said
             to
             (c)
             accuse
             ,
             to
             cast
             ,
             to
             (d)
             
               condemn
               himself
            
             ,
             throwing
             himselfe
             ,
             by
             his
             
               voluntary
               recession
            
             
             from
             the
             Church
             ,
             into
             that
             very
             condition
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             adulterer
             ,
             and
             obstinate
             offender
             is
             cast
             by
             the
             Censures
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             This
             is
             so
             evident
             a
             truth
             ,
             that
             this
             punishment
             ,
             and
             so
             judicial
             act
             ,
             of
             the
             Governour
             ,
             cannot
             be
             the
             guilt
             of
             him
             that
             is
             punished
             ,
             and
             though
             it
             be
             supposed
             to
             be
             founded
             in
             some
             offence
             ,
             is
             not
             yet
             in
             any
             propriety
             of
             speech
             the
             offence
             it self
             ,
             much
             lesse
             the
             sin
             of
             schisme
             ,
             especially
             when
             he
             is
             punished
             for
             heresie
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             crime
             ,
             and
             not
             for
             schisme
             ,
             that
             I
             need
             not
             farther
             insist
             on
             it
             .
             
             Only
             ,
             as
             beside
             the
             formal
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             there
             is
             also
             an
             
               interpretative
               excōmunication
            
             ,
             when
             he
             that
             is
             not
             under
             the
             Censures
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             is
             yet
             refused
             admission
             ,
             or
             reception
             unto
             it
             ,
             unlesse
             he
             will
             submit
             to
             such
             &
             such
             conditions
             ,
             indispensably
             proposed
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             because
             both
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             in
             the
             formal
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             
               interpretative
               excommunication
            
             ,
             the
             Governours
             ,
             being
             men
             ,
             may
             possibly
             erre
             ,
             and
             consequently
             censure
             ,
             and
             excommunicate
             the
             innocent
             ,
             and
             in
             like
             manner
             propose
             those
             conditions
             of
             communion
             which
             are
             
             not
             lawful
             for
             that
             man
             to
             submit
             unto
             ,
             
             so
             it
             is
             possible
             in
             both
             cases
             ,
             that
             the
             person
             excluded
             may
             be
             absolutely
             innocent
             ,
             free
             not
             only
             from
             that
             of
             schisme
             ,
             but
             from
             all
             other
             guilt
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             which
             is
             excommunicated
             may
             not
             be
             obliged
             to
             regain
             the
             peace
             ,
             nor
             he
             that
             is
             barred
             out
             ,
             to
             force
             his
             passage
             into
             the
             communion
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             so
             both
             sorts
             of
             these
             ,
             continuing
             out
             of
             the
             
               actual
               communion
            
             ,
             neither
             the
             one
             nor
             the
             other
             be
             guilty
             of
             schisme
             in
             the
             least
             degree
             by
             so
             continuing
             .
          
           
             
             §
             .
             4.
             
             He
             that
             is
             
               excommunicated
               unjustly
            
             ,
             cannot
             be
             rendred
             criminous
             by
             that
             misfortune
             ,
             nor
             concluded
             culpable
             by
             that
             argument
             ,
             upon
             which
             he
             is
             supposed
             innocent
             .
             Our
             Saviour
             hath
             pronounced
             of
             the
             anathemaes
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             of
             their
             bitterest
             execrations
             ,
             their
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               their
               sharpest
               censures
            
             ,
             nay
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               casting
               men
               out
               of
               the
               Synagogue
               ,
               falsly
            
             or
             unjustly
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             to
             be
             looked
             on
             as
             a
             most
             auspicious
             token
             ,
             a
             matter
             of
             the
             greatest
             rejoicing
             to
             them
             which
             fell
             under
             it
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             principal
             ingredients
             in
             ,
             and
             forerunners
             of
             their
             blisse
             (
             and
             
             accordingly
             the
             Apostles
             when
             they
             were
             thus
             
               cast
               out
            
             ,
             and
             contumeliously
             used
             ,
             
               went
               out
               of
               the
               Temple
               rejoicing
               that
               they
               were
               thought
               worthy
               to
               suffer
               shame
               for
               Christ's
               name
            
             )
             To
             which
             purpose
             is
             that
             of
             
               Photius
               Patriarch
            
             of
             Constantinople
             to
             
               Michael
               Metropolitan
            
             of
             
               Mitylene
               ,
               Ep
            
             :
             116.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             
               The
               excommunication
               of
               the
               Jewish
               Sanhedrim
               sent
               out
               against
               Christ's
               disciples
               brought
               them
               so
               much
               neerer
               to
               their
               Lord
               and
               Master
               ,
               and
               alien'd
               the
               Jews
               themselves
               ,
               removed
               them
               so
               much
               farther
               from
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               so
               doth
               all
               unjust
               excommunication
               now
               unite
               us
               to
               the
               Apostles
               by
               this
               conformity
               with
               and
               participation
               of
               their
               sufferings
               .
            
             And
             I
             suppose
             the
             arguments
             ,
             and
             testimonies
             produced
             by
             the
             Chancellour
             of
             Paris
             are
             (
             and
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             first
             published
             ,
             were
             so
             deemed
             by
             those
             of
             the
             Romish
             communion
             )
             unanswerable
             to
             this
             matter
             ;
             And
             accordingly
             that
             of
             
             
               Thomas
               de
               Curselis
            
             in
             the
             Councel
             of
             Basil
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             *
             
               said
               by
               Christ
               to
               the
               Pope
               ,
               Whatsoever
               thou
               shalt
               binde
               on
               earth
               shall
               be
               bound
               ,
               not
               whatsoever
               thou
               shalt
               affirm
               to
               be
               bound
               ,
            
             ]
             hath
             with
             it
             the
             evidence
             of
             undeniable
             truth
             ,
             equally
             applicable
             to
             him
             and
             all
             Bishops
             in
             that
             and
             in
             all
             future
             ages
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             And
             then
             certainly
             what
             hath
             thus
             been
             said
             of
             the
             Formal
             ,
             will
             with
             the
             same
             evidence
             be
             extended
             also
             to
             the
             
               Interpretative
               excommunication
            
             ,
             whensoever
             the
             conditions
             of
             the
             communion
             contain
             in
             them
             any
             sinne
             ,
             and
             so
             become
             as
             the
             former
             censures
             were
             supposed
             to
             be
             ;
             For
             in
             that
             case
             certainly
             it
             is
             no
             act
             of
             Schisme
             from
             any
             Church
             ,
             for
             any
             member
             to
             be
             ,
             or
             to
             continue
             thus
             excluded
             from
             it
             .
             For
             how
             desireable
             ,
             and
             valuable
             soever
             an
             
               intire
               ,
               inviolate
               peace
            
             with
             
               all
               Christians
            
             ,
             with
             
               all
               men
            
             ,
             (
             together
             with
             the
             approbation
             of
             our
             willing
             ,
             cheerful
             obedience
             ,
             and
             submission
             of
             our
             judgments
             and
             practises
             ,
             to
             our
             superiors
             )
             must
             forever
             be
             deemed
             by
             all
             true
             disciples
             of
             Christ
             ,
             Yet
             must
             not
             the
             purchase
             of
             this
             treasure
             be
             attempted
             by
             the
             
             admission
             of
             any
             sin
             ,
             any
             more
             then
             the
             
               glory
               of
               God
            
             might
             be
             projected
             by
             the
             
               Apostle's
               lie
            
             .
             The
             least
             transgression
             of
             
               God's
               Law
            
             must
             not
             be
             adventured
             on
             upon
             any
             the
             most
             
               Christian
               designe
            
             ,
             or
             consideration
             ;
             The
             peaceable
             living
             with
             
               all
               men
            
             ,
             which
             is
             so
             often
             exhorted
             to
             ▪
             and
             inculcated
             ,
             is
             yet
             no
             farther
             recommended
             ,
             then
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               if
               it
               be
               possible
            
             ,
             and
             
               as
               much
               as
               in
               us
               lies
               ,
            
             and
             that
             ,
             we
             know
             ,
             must
             be
             interpreted
             of
             a
             moral
             and
             
               leg●●
               possibility
            
             ,
             by
             which
             we
             are
             pronounced
             able
             to
             doe
             that
             (
             and
             no
             more
             )
             which
             we
             can
             doe
             lawfully
             ,
             and
             so
             when
             the
             Apostle
             1
             Thess
             4.11
             .
             exhorts
             to
             the
             most
             
               earnest
               pursuit
            
             of
             this
             blisful
             state
             (
             this
             ease
             ,
             and
             rest
             ,
             and
             quiet
             from
             the
             labours
             ,
             and
             toils
             and
             hell
             of
             the
             factious
             ,
             turbulent
             spirit
             )
             it
             is
             in
             a
             style
             ,
             which
             supposes
             this
             reserve
             ,
             we
             must
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               have
               an
               ambition
            
             ,
             and
             emulation
             ,
             and
             
               contention
               to
               live
               peaceably
               ,
               and
               quietly
               ,
            
             obliging
             us
             to
             use
             all
             means
             that
             would
             be
             allowed
             to
             the
             ambitious
             person
             in
             his
             warmest
             pursuit
             ,
             i.
             e.
             the
             
               utmost
               lawful
            
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             
               lowest
               unlawful
            
             means
             .
          
           
           
             
             §
             .
             6.
             
             In
             which
             matter
             it
             is
             remarkable
             what
             course
             hath
             been
             taken
             by
             the
             
               late
               author
               of
               Infidelity
               unmasked
               ,
               in
               his
               discourse
               of
               the
               Schisme
               of
               Protestants
               ,
            
             where
             having
             acknowledged
             how
             perfectly
             unlawful
             it
             is
             to
             
               dissemble
               ,
               equivocate
            
             ,
             or
             lie
             in
             the
             matters
             of
             faith
             —
             and
             withall
             urgeing
             from
             all
             antiquity
             ,
             that
             to
             forsake
             the
             
               external
               communion
            
             of
             
               God's
               visible
               Church
            
             is
             the
             sin
             of
             schisme
             ,
             he
             makes
             a
             shift
             to
             conclude
             (
             as
             a
             natural
             consequence
             )
             from
             hence
             ,
             that
             therefore
             the
             Church
             (
             I
             suppose
             he
             means
             ,
             of
             Rome
             )
             is
             infallible
             ,
             and
             not
             
               subject
               to
               errour
            
             ,
             because
             otherwise
             men
             might
             
               forsake
               her
               communion
            
             —
             Where
             though
             the
             consequence
             be
             very
             strange
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             forsake
             the
             
               Churches
               communion
            
             ,
             in
             case
             she
             be
             fallible
             or
             subject
             to
             errour
             (
             for
             this
             supposes
             it
             lawful
             1.
             to
             forsake
             the
             communion
             of
             any
             
               erroneous
               Church
            
             ,
             which
             is
             much
             more
             then
             we
             would
             desire
             to
             be
             granted
             us
             ,
             and
             2.
             to
             forsake
             all
             that
             are
             fallible
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             not
             actually
             in
             errour
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             effect
             to
             forsake
             the
             communion
             of
             all
             but
             Saints
             ,
             and
             Angels
             ,
             and
             God
             in
             heaven
             ,
             for
             they
             only
             have
             the
             
             privilege
             of
             impeccable
             and
             infallible
             )
             yet
             it
             absolutely
             acknowledges
             that
             it
             would
             be
             lawful
             to
             separate
             from
             ,
             and
             forsake
             the
             (
             even
             
               Vniversal
               )
               Church
               of
               Christ
            
             ,
             in
             case
             ,
             or
             on
             supposition
             that
             we
             could
             not
             be
             permitted
             to
             communicate
             with
             it
             ,
             without
             lying
             ,
             and
             dissembling
             ,
             and
             equivocating
             in
             matters
             of
             faith
             ,
             which
             he
             there
             acknowledgeth
             to
             be
             the
             
               denying
               God
               on
               earth
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             Now
             (
             to
             return
             to
             our
             present
             consideration
             )
             
             Of
             this
             there
             is
             no
             question
             ,
             but
             that
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             said
             to
             be
             customary
             among
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Hunnes
             (
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             have
             any
             children
             ,
             and
             so
             no
             need
             of
             their
             brethrens
             assistance
             )
             to
             banish
             all
             their
             brethren
             out
             of
             their
             dominions
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             admit
             them
             again
             without
             
               putting
               out
               their
               eyes
            
             ,
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             saith
             
               Cinnamus
               ,
               Hist
               :
               l.
            
             1.
             )
             so
             it
             is
             possible
             (
             I
             wish
             it
             were
             not
             justly
             supposable
             )
             for
             a
             
               particular
               Church
            
             so
             to
             fence
             ,
             and
             limit
             ,
             to
             guard
             ,
             and
             restrain
             their
             communion
             ,
             to
             require
             such
             severe
             conditions
             of
             all
             whom
             they
             will
             admit
             ,
             or
             tolerate
             within
             their
             Church
             ,
             that
             
             some
             men
             cannot
             without
             
               putting
               out
            
             their
             eyes
             ,
             or
             wilful
             acknowledgment
             of
             untruths
             ,
             others
             without
             
               committing
               sin
            
             against
             conscience
             ,
             undergoe
             the
             conditions
             thus
             required
             ,
             nor
             consequently
             be
             admitted
             to
             communion
             with
             it
             .
             
             As
             in
             case
             any
             unsound
             or
             untrue
             position
             be
             entred
             into
             the
             Confession
             ,
             or
             Catechisme
             of
             any
             Church
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             members
             of
             that
             Communion
             be
             explicitly
             required
             to
             believe
             ,
             
             and
             acknowledge
             the
             truth
             of
             every
             branch
             of
             that
             Confession
             ,
             and
             so
             that
             confession
             be
             really
             the
             condition
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             in
             the
             reputation
             of
             men
             esteemed
             the
             tessera
             ,
             or
             symbol
             of
             that
             communion
             ,
             then
             he
             that
             shall
             enter
             this
             communion
             thus
             conditionated
             ,
             must
             certainly
             either
             
               actually
               subscribe
            
             ,
             or
             (
             which
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             scandal
             of
             the
             action
             ,
             is
             equivalent
             )
             be
             reasonably
             supposed
             to
             acknowledge
             that
             untruth
             ;
             and
             if
             in
             some
             persons
             
               blameless
               ignorance
            
             may
             be
             supposed
             sufficient
             for
             the
             excusing
             ,
             or
             alleviating
             that
             fault
             ,
             yet
             1.
             he
             that
             hath
             means
             of
             discovering
             that
             untruth
             ,
             and
             criminously
             neglects
             to
             make
             use
             of
             those
             means
             ,
             and
             2.
             he
             that
             hath
             discovered
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             
             yet
             thus
             professeth
             himself
             to
             believe
             the
             contrary
             ,
             will
             not
             be
             thus
             excusable
             ;
             And
             it
             is
             not
             here
             sufficient
             to
             object
             the
             supposable
             levity
             of
             the
             error
             ,
             or
             intellectual
             falsity
             ,
             For
             how
             light
             ,
             and
             inconsiderable
             (
             and
             extrinsecal
             to
             the
             foundation
             )
             soever
             the
             error
             be
             supposed
             to
             be
             ,
             yet
             if
             there
             be
             obstinacy
             in
             continuing
             in
             it
             against
             light
             and
             conviction
             ,
             or
             if
             there
             be
             falsness
             in
             professing
             ,
             or
             subscribing
             ,
             contrary
             to
             present
             perswasions
             ,
             or
             scandal
             and
             ill
             example
             ,
             temptation
             and
             snare
             to
             others
             ,
             in
             seeming
             to
             doe
             so
             ;
             these
             certainly
             are
             sins
             ,
             and
             neither
             light
             nor
             inconsiderable
             ,
             nor
             reconcileable
             with
             that
             fabrick
             of
             Christian
             practise
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             superstructed
             on
             that
             foundation
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             
             Nay
             if
             the
             errors
             be
             really
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             if
             the
             doctrines
             so
             proposed
             ,
             as
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             communion
             of
             any
             Church
             ,
             be
             indeed
             agreeable
             to
             truth
             ,
             but
             yet
             be
             really
             apprehended
             by
             him
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             are
             thus
             proposed
             ,
             to
             be
             false
             ,
             and
             disagreeable
             ,
             it
             will
             even
             in
             that
             case
             be
             hard
             to
             affirm
             that
             that
             man
             may
             lawfully
             thus
             subscribe
             ,
             contrary
             to
             
             his
             present
             perswasions
             ;
             For
             though
             it
             be
             certain
             ,
             that
             he
             that
             thus
             erres
             ,
             be
             obliged
             to
             use
             all
             probable
             means
             to
             reform
             ,
             and
             deposite
             his
             error
             ,
             and
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             he
             remains
             in
             it
             ,
             is
             so
             farre
             guilty
             of
             sin
             ,
             as
             he
             wants
             the
             excuse
             of
             
               invincible
               ignorance
            
             ,
             and
             being
             obliged
             to
             charity
             and
             peace
             ,
             as
             farre
             
               as
               it
               is
               possible
               ,
               and
               in
               him
               lies
               ,
            
             he
             cannot
             be
             freed
             from
             offending
             against
             that
             obligation
             ,
             if
             he
             doe
             not
             communicate
             with
             those
             ,
             the
             condition
             of
             whose
             communion
             contains
             nothing
             really
             erroneous
             ,
             or
             sinful
             ;
             and
             so
             though
             such
             a
             man
             ,
             on
             that
             side
             ,
             be
             ,
             or
             may
             be
             in
             several
             respects
             criminous
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             as
             evident
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             that
             he
             that
             professes
             to
             believe
             ,
             what
             he
             really
             doth
             not
             believe
             ,
             that
             subscribes
             with
             his
             hand
             ,
             what
             he
             rejects
             in
             his
             heart
             ,
             or
             that
             doth
             that
             which
             is
             under
             the
             scandal
             of
             doing
             so
             ,
             is
             farre
             from
             being
             guiltless
             ,
             he
             certainly
             offends
             against
             the
             precept
             of
             sincerity
             and
             veracity
             (
             yea
             and
             of
             charity
             to
             his
             brethren
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             scandal
             )
             hath
             added
             hypocrisie
             to
             his
             error
             ,
             and
             so
             which
             way
             soever
             he
             turns
             ,
             he
             is
             sure
             to
             sin
             (
             the
             worst
             and
             most
             unhappy
             kinde
             of
             straight
             )
             he
             
             remains
             in
             error
             ,
             and
             schisme
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             by
             flying
             from
             that
             ,
             he
             advances
             to
             lying
             and
             hypocrisie
             on
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             the
             desire
             of
             avoiding
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             cannot
             justifie
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             This
             I
             say
             ,
             in
             case
             the
             error
             be
             really
             on
             the
             mans
             ,
             not
             on
             the
             Churches
             side
             ;
             But
             if
             (
             as
             in
             the
             case
             proposed
             )
             the
             errors
             be
             supposed
             to
             be
             wholly
             on
             the
             Churches
             side
             ,
             and
             withall
             indispensably
             required
             to
             be
             subscribed
             by
             all
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             conditions
             of
             that
             communion
             being
             exacted
             of
             him
             ,
             who
             cannot
             without
             sin
             undertake
             them
             ,
             be
             to
             him
             really
             ,
             and
             
               unexcusably
               unlawful
            
             ,
             then
             certainly
             to
             that
             man
             in
             that
             case
             it
             is
             no
             crime
             not
             to
             communicate
             (
             when
             he
             is
             thus
             excluded
             from
             communicating
             )
             with
             that
             Church
             ,
             but
             a
             crime
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             one
             ,
             thus
             (
             by
             testifying
             against
             the
             truth
             and
             his
             own
             conscience
             )
             to
             qualifie
             himself
             for
             that
             communion
             .
             The
             admission
             of
             such
             guilts
             as
             these
             ,
             hypocrisie
             ,
             and
             lying
             against
             conscience
             ,
             and
             due
             grounds
             of
             conviction
             ,
             is
             too
             high
             a
             price
             to
             be
             paid
             even
             for
             peace
             ,
             or
             communion
             it self
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             A
             meek
             son
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ
             will
             certainly
             be
             content
             to
             sacrifice
             a
             great
             deal
             for
             the
             making
             of
             this
             purchase
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             fundamentals
             of
             the
             Faith
             ,
             and
             superstructures
             of
             
               Christian
               practise
            
             are
             not
             concerned
             in
             the
             concessions
             ,
             he
             will
             cheerfully
             expresse
             his
             readiness
             to
             submit
             ,
             or
             deposit
             his
             own
             judgment
             in
             reverence
             and
             deference
             to
             his
             superiours
             in
             the
             Church
             where
             his
             lot
             is
             fallen
             .
             But
             when
             this
             proves
             unsufficient
             ,
             when
             peace
             with
             the
             brethren
             on
             earth
             will
             not
             be
             had
             at
             a
             cheaper
             rate
             then
             this
             of
             a
             voluntary
             offending
             against
             
               our
               father
            
             which
             is
             
               in
               heaven
            
             ;
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             the
             Christian
             must
             be
             content
             to
             live
             without
             it
             ,
             and
             though
             he
             would
             rejoice
             to
             
               sell
               all
               that
               he
               hath
            
             to
             purchase
             that
             jewel
             ,
             yet
             his
             conscience
             ,
             the
             health
             and
             peace
             of
             that
             (
             which
             is
             interrupted
             by
             every
             
               wilful
               sin
            
             )
             is
             a
             commodity
             ,
             that
             must
             not
             be
             parted
             with
             ,
             whatsoever
             the
             acquisition
             be
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             his
             view
             and
             thus
             offers
             it self
             in
             exchange
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             
             The
             evidence
             of
             which
             is
             ,
             I
             conceive
             ,
             so
             demonstrative
             and
             irresistible
             ,
             that
             it
             will
             be
             justly
             extended
             
             much
             farther
             then
             the
             present
             case
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             gives
             me
             any
             temptation
             to
             extend
             it
             ;
             For
             in
             case
             our
             Ancestors
             had
             unjustly
             and
             criminously
             made
             a
             separation
             from
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             (
             which
             it
             shall
             anon
             appear
             that
             they
             have
             not
             )
             and
             we
             their
             successors
             in
             that
             schisme
             should
             unfeignedly
             confess
             ,
             and
             repent
             ,
             and
             desire
             to
             reform
             that
             sin
             ,
             and
             uprightly
             discharge
             our
             conscience
             in
             neglecting
             no
             means
             ,
             that
             
               patience
               ,
               humility
               ,
               charity
            
             could
             suggest
             to
             us
             ,
             in
             order
             to
             obtaining
             our
             reconciliation
             ,
             yet
             if
             that
             cannot
             be
             obtained
             by
             all
             these
             submissions
             ,
             without
             that
             harder
             condition
             of
             renouncing
             ,
             or
             professing
             ,
             or
             seeming
             (
             in
             
               common
               reputation
            
             of
             men
             )
             to
             renounce
             any
             part
             of
             
               Divine
               truth
            
             ,
             or
             
               Christian
               practise
            
             ,
             which
             we
             verily
             believe
             to
             be
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             our
             duty
             ,
             it
             would
             not
             be
             our
             guilt
             ,
             but
             only
             our
             unhappiness
             ,
             that
             we
             were
             thus
             forced
             to
             continue
             in
             that
             separation
             .
             The
             reason
             is
             evident
             from
             the
             former
             grounds
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             sin
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             
               give
               glory
               to
               God
            
             (
             such
             is
             confession
             ,
             &
             fruits
             of
             
               repentance
               ,
               Jos
            
             .
             7.19
             .
             )
             a
             
               penitent
               thief
            
             must
             not
             lie
             ,
             to
             enable
             
             himself
             to
             make
             restitution
             ,
             nor
             the
             
               contrite
               schismatick
            
             commit
             any
             
               new
               sin
            
             (
             such
             certainly
             is
             
               hypocrisie
               ,
               lying
               ,
               professing
            
             contrary
             to
             present
             perswasion
             )
             to
             complete
             his
             repentance
             for
             the
             old
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             12.
             
             If
             this
             last
             be
             conceived
             (
             as
             it
             is
             not
             the
             present
             case
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             so
             )
             to
             be
             an
             
               impossible
               ,
               unsupposeable
            
             case
             ,
             not
             only
             upon
             the
             Romanists
             grounds
             ,
             who
             I
             presume
             will
             not
             acknowledge
             any
             such
             
               hard
               condition
            
             (
             as
             is
             the
             profession
             of
             an
             untruth
             )
             to
             be
             required
             to
             any
             mans
             reconciliation
             ,
             and
             readmission
             to
             their
             communion
             ,
             but
             upon
             this
             other
             score
             ,
             because
             if
             any
             
               false
               profession
            
             be
             now
             required
             to
             our
             re-admission
             ,
             the
             same
             was
             formerly
             required
             to
             our
             continuance
             in
             their
             communion
             ,
             and
             consequently
             our
             Ancestors
             departure
             then
             could
             not
             be
             supposed
             (
             as
             in
             this
             last
             fiction
             of
             case
             it
             is
             )
             a
             schismatical
             departure
             .
             I
             shall
             not
             need
             to
             give
             any
             more
             distinct
             answer
             to
             this
             ,
             then
             1.
             
             That
             we
             that
             acknowledge
             not
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             to
             be
             infallible
             ,
             may
             be
             allowed
             to
             make
             a
             supposition
             ,
             which
             is
             founded
             in
             the
             possibility
             of
             her
             inserting
             
             some
             error
             in
             her
             Confessions
             ,
             and
             making
             the
             explicite
             acknowledgment
             of
             that
             the
             peremptory
             indispensable
             condition
             of
             her
             communion
             ;
             2.
             
             That
             it
             is
             possible
             also
             (
             though
             not
             by
             us
             pretended
             )
             that
             she
             should
             since
             that
             supposed
             departure
             of
             our
             Ancestors
             ,
             introduce
             some
             
               new
               doctrines
            
             ,
             and
             consequently
             some
             
               new
               errors
            
             ,
             and
             those
             now
             be
             supposeable
             to
             lie
             in
             the
             way
             to
             our
             return
             ,
             though
             they
             had
             no
             part
             (
             before
             their
             birth
             )
             in
             driving
             us
             from
             them
             ;
             3.
             
             That
             that
             may
             be
             by
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             permitted
             ,
             and
             allowed
             to
             those
             that
             have
             alwaies
             remained
             in
             their
             communion
             ,
             which
             to
             them
             that
             have
             departed
             ,
             and
             either
             in
             their
             persons
             ,
             or
             posterity
             ,
             desire
             to
             return
             to
             it
             ,
             will
             not
             be
             permitted
             by
             them
             ;
             It
             being
             more
             ordinary
             to
             indulge
             liberties
             to
             sons
             ,
             that
             have
             alwaies
             continued
             in
             the
             family
             ,
             then
             to
             grant
             them
             to
             offenders
             ,
             and
             suppliants
             ,
             that
             expect
             favours
             ,
             and
             graces
             ,
             and
             restauration
             to
             privileges
             ;
             4.
             
             That
             those
             which
             have
             had
             their
             education
             out
             of
             the
             Communion
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             may
             very
             possibly
             &
             probably
             come
             to
             discern
             that
             ,
             which
             in
             that
             communion
             
             would
             never
             have
             been
             (
             for
             want
             of
             representation
             )
             discerned
             by
             them
             ,
             and
             consequently
             may
             observe
             some
             errors
             in
             her
             doctrine
             or
             practise
             ,
             which
             their
             Ancestors
             at
             their
             very
             departure
             from
             them
             had
             not
             discerned
             ,
             and
             then
             though
             those
             
               errors
               subscribed
            
             to
             by
             them
             ,
             had
             the
             Lenitive
             ,
             or
             Antidote
             of
             
               blameless
               ignorance
            
             ,
             yet
             because
             those
             that
             now
             really
             discern
             that
             truth
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancestors
             discerned
             not
             ,
             cannot
             lawfully
             professe
             not
             to
             discern
             it
             ,
             or
             professe
             against
             conscience
             to
             believe
             what
             they
             doe
             not
             believe
             ,
             it
             is
             therefore
             necessarily
             consequent
             ,
             that
             the
             return
             of
             such
             to
             the
             peace
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               Church
            
             may
             by
             this
             means
             be
             rendred
             impossible
             though
             
               their
               Ancestors
            
             continuance
             there
             ,
             lying
             under
             no
             such
             prejudice
             ,
             their
             separation
             were
             acknowledged
             unlawful
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             The
             several
             sorts
             of
             Schisme
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             THus
             much
             hath
             been
             necessarily
             premised
             for
             the
             true
             notion
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             taken
             from
             the
             origination
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             as
             that
             includes
             ,
             in
             the
             neuter
             sense
             ,
             a
             recession
             ,
             or
             departure
             ,
             in
             the
             reciprocal
             ,
             a
             separating
             ,
             or
             dividing
             himself
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             It
             is
             now
             time
             to
             proceed
             and
             inquire
             how
             many
             sorts
             there
             are
             of
             this
             schisme
             in
             the
             Ecclesiastical
             sense
             ,
             or
             by
             how
             many
             waies
             the
             guilt
             of
             this
             sin
             of
             the
             flesh
             may
             be
             contracted
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             In
             which
             inquiry
             it
             will
             be
             first
             necessary
             to
             consider
             ,
             wherein
             
               Ecclesiastical
               unity
            
             consists
             ,
             viz
             :
             
             in
             the
             preserving
             all
             those
             relations
             ,
             wherein
             each
             member
             of
             the
             
               whole
               Church
            
             of
             Christ
             is
             concerned
             one
             towards
             another
             :
             These
             relations
             are
             either
             of
             
               subordination
               (
               paternal
            
             on
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             filial
             on
             the
             other
             ,
             )
             or
             of
             
               equality
               (
               fraternal
            
             .
             
             )
             The
             unity
             of
             those
             members
             that
             are
             subordinate
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             consists
             in
             the
             constant
             due
             subjection
             ,
             and
             obedience
             
             of
             all
             inferiors
             to
             all
             their
             
               lawful
               superiors
            
             ,
             and
             in
             due
             exercise
             of
             authority
             in
             the
             superiors
             toward
             all
             committed
             to
             their
             charge
             :
             
             And
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             
               fellow
               brethren
            
             in
             the
             performance
             of
             all
             mutual
             duties
             of
             justice
             and
             charity
             toward
             one
             another
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             Of
             the
             former
             sort
             is
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               obedience
               to
               the
               Rulers
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               Heb.
            
             13.17
             .
             and
             back
             again
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             due
             feeding
             ,
             i.
             e.
             
               governing
               the
               flock
               of
               God
            
             among
             them
             ,
             1
             Pet.
             5.2
             .
             And
             because
             there
             be
             (
             under
             the
             King
             or
             Emperor
             ,
             or
             
               supreme
               power
            
             ,
             to
             whom
             all
             are
             subject
             in
             any
             his
             dominions
             )
             many
             possible
             links
             in
             that
             
               subordination
               ,
               Patriarchs
               ,
               Metropolitans
               ,
               Bishops
               ,
               Presbyters
               ,
               Deacons
               ,
            
             and
             the
             brethren
             ,
             or
             congregation
             ,
             the
             unity
             must
             be
             made
             up
             of
             the
             due
             subordination
             ,
             and
             Christian
             i.
             e.
             charitative
             exercise
             of
             power
             in
             all
             these
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             
             Of
             the
             later
             sort
             there
             are
             as
             many
             branches
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             varieties
             of
             equalities
             .
             The
             brethren
             or
             believers
             in
             every
             congregation
             ,
             i.
             e.
             all
             beside
             the
             Governors
             of
             the
             Church
             (
             however
             unequal
             in
             other
             respects
             )
             
             are
             in
             this
             respect
             equalized
             ,
             and
             comprehended
             all
             under
             the
             one
             title
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             the
             younger
             ,
             1
             Pet.
             5.5
             .
             And
             this
             whether
             we
             respect
             all
             other
             fellow-members
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             or
             whether
             of
             any
             other
             congregation
             ,
             whether
             Parish
             ,
             or
             City
             ,
             or
             Diocese
             ,
             or
             Province
             ,
             or
             Nation
             ,
             of
             the
             West
             ,
             of
             the
             East
             ,
             of
             the
             
               whole
               Christian
            
             world
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             each
             member
             is
             qualified
             to
             exercise
             any
             fraternal
             duty
             toward
             them
             .
             So
             again
             the
             several
             Deacons
             ,
             or
             Presbyters
             of
             any
             Diocese
             ,
             the
             several
             Bishops
             of
             any
             Province
             ,
             the
             several
             Metropolitans
             of
             any
             Nation
             ,
             the
             several
             Primates
             or
             Patriarchs
             one
             with
             another
             (
             as
             the
             several
             Apostles
             )
             over
             the
             
               whole
               world
            
             ,
             are
             each
             of
             them
             to
             be
             looked
             on
             as
             equals
             to
             all
             others
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             ;
             And
             proportionably
             (
             and
             together
             with
             the
             Pastors
             )
             the
             flocks
             ,
             the
             several
             communities
             ,
             or
             congregations
             of
             Christian
             men
             considered
             
               in
               complexo
            
             ,
             the
             
               Parishes
               ,
               Dioceses
               ,
               Provinces
               ,
               Nations
               ,
               Climes
            
             of
             the
             whole
             Christian
             world
             .
             And
             according
             to
             these
             so
             many
             equalities
             ,
             there
             are
             ,
             or
             ought
             to
             be
             so
             many
             sorts
             of
             unities
             ,
             so
             many
             Relations
             of
             that
             
               mutual
               
               fraternal
               charity
            
             ,
             which
             Christ
             came
             to
             plant
             in
             his
             Church
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             
             Having
             seen
             what
             the
             unity
             is
             (
             to
             which
             Communion
             superadds
             no
             more
             but
             the
             relation
             of
             
               external
               association
            
             ,
             whether
             by
             assembling
             for
             the
             worship
             of
             God
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             matter
             is
             capable
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             whether
             by
             
               letters
               communicatory
            
             ,
             by
             which
             we
             may
             maintain
             
               external
               Communion
            
             with
             those
             which
             are
             most
             distant
             from
             us
             )
             It
             will
             be
             easie
             to
             discern
             what
             Schisme
             is
             ,
             viz
             :
             the
             breach
             of
             that
             Vnity
             (
             and
             Communion
             )
             and
             what
             be
             the
             sorts
             or
             species
             of
             it
             ▪
             either
             those
             that
             offend
             against
             the
             subordination
             which
             Christ
             hath
             by
             himself
             ,
             and
             his
             Apostles
             setled
             in
             his
             Church
             ,
             or
             those
             that
             offend
             against
             the
             
               mutual
               charity
            
             ,
             which
             he
             left
             among
             his
             disciples
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             For
             the
             first
             of
             these
             ,
             those
             that
             offend
             against
             the
             due
             subordination
             ,
             they
             are
             possibly
             of
             as
             many
             sorts
             as
             there
             be
             
               distinct
               links
            
             in
             the
             subordination
             .
             As
             first
             those
             brethren
             or
             people
             ,
             which
             reject
             the
             ministerie
             of
             the
             Deacons
             ,
             or
             Presbyters
             in
             any
             thing
             wherein
             they
             are
             ordained
             ,
             and
             appointed
             by
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             (
             and
             as
             long
             
             as
             they
             continue
             in
             obedience
             to
             him
             )
             and
             of
             their
             own
             accord
             break
             off
             ,
             and
             separate
             from
             them
             ,
             
             refuse
             to
             live
             regularly
             under
             them
             ,
             they
             are
             by
             the
             
               Antient
               Church
               of
               Christ
            
             adjudged
             and
             looked
             on
             as
             Schismaticks
             ;
             So
             Ignatius
             the
             
               holy
               Bishop
            
             ,
             (
             and
             Apostolical
             person
             )
             and
             
               Martyr
               of
               Antioch
            
             ,
             in
             
               Ep
               :
               ad
               Trall
            
             :
             admonishing
             them
             to
             
               beware
               of
               the
               poyson
               of
               seducers
               ,
            
             i.
             e.
             the
             Schismaticks
             of
             those
             times
             ,
             he
             directs
             them
             this
             one
             way
             to
             doe
             it
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               This
               ye
               shall
               doe
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               if
               ye
               be
               not
               puffed
               up
               ,
               and
               if
               ye
               be
               not
               separated
               from
               God
               ,
               from
               Christ
               ,
               from
               the
               Bishop
               —
               He
               that
               continues
               within
               the
               sept
               is
               pure
               ,
               He
               that
               doth
               ought
               without
               the
               Bishop
               and
               Presbyterie
               and
               Deacon
               ,
               is
               not
               of
               a
               pure
               conscience
               ,
            
             accounting
             all
             that
             live
             out
             of
             this
             obedience
             to
             be
             so
             far
             infected
             and
             defiled
             with
             schisme
             .
             So
             again
             in
             the
             former
             part
             of
             the
             same
             
               Epistle
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Let
               all
               revere
               the
               Deacons
               as
               the
               ministers
               of
               Jesus
               Christ
               ,
               and
               in
               like
               manner
               the
               Bishop
               as
               Jesus
               Christ
               the
               son
               of
               the
               Father
               ,
               the
               Presbyters
               as
               the
               Senate
               of
               God
               and
               College
               of
               Apostles
               ,
               without
               these
               it
               is
               not
               called
               a
               Church
               .
            
             Where
             every
             particular
             Church
             being
             administred
             by
             these
             ,
             no
             man
             is
             farther
             deemed
             a
             member
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             then
             he
             lives
             regularly
             within
             this
             obedience
             :
             And
             the
             same
             is
             the
             importance
             of
             his
             exhortation
             to
             the
             
               Philippians
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Observe
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               the
               Presbyters
               ,
               and
               the
               Deacons
               ,
            
             intimating
             this
             to
             be
             the
             only
             way
             of
             preserving
             unity
             against
             schisme
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             that
             which
             had
             gone
             before
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               There
               is
               one
               altar
               (
               or
               sept
               )
               as
               there
               is
               one
               Bishop
               together
               with
               his
               Presbyters
               and
               Deacons
               ,
               and
               the
               living
               in
               union
               with
               ,
               obedience
               to
               these
               ,
               is
               the
               only
               way
               to
               doe
               ,
               whatsoever
               ye
               doe
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               will
               
               of
               God.
            
             Where
             this
             subordination
             being
             looked
             on
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             is
             placed
             in
             the
             Church
             by
             God
             ,
             it
             is
             both
             schisme
             and
             impiety
             not
             to
             continue
             regularly
             under
             it
             ;
             And
             so
             in
             the
             inscription
             of
             that
             
               Epistle
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               He
               salutes
               them
               in
               the
               blood
               of
               Christ
               ,
               especially
               if
               they
               be
               at
               one
               with
               their
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               the
               Presbyters
               with
               him
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Deacons
               designed
               by
               the
               appointment
               of
               Jesus
               Christ
               ,
            
             looking
             upon
             all
             as
             Schismaticks
             ,
             that
             were
             not
             so
             .
             Thus
             again
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Ephesians
             ,
             he
             admonisheth
             them
             to
             
               obey
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               Presbyters
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               with
               an
               undivided
               minde
               ,
            
             making
             the
             disobedience
             an
             act
             of
             schism
             or
             division
             in
             any
             ;
             And
             so
             generally
             throughout
             all
             those
             Epistles
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             
             In
             like
             manner
             ;
             if
             we
             ascend
             to
             the
             
               next
               higher
               link
            
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             to
             whom
             both
             Presbyters
             and
             Deacons
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             brethren
             ,
             or
             people
             ,
             are
             obliged
             to
             live
             in
             obedience
             ,
             the
             withdrawing
             or
             denying
             this
             obedience
             in
             any
             of
             these
             will
             certainly
             
             fall
             under
             this
             guilt
             .
             So
             the
             same
             
               holy
               Ignatius
            
             in
             
               Ep
               :
               ad
               Smyr
               :
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Let
               no
               man
               without
               the
               Bishop
               doe
               any
               of
               those
               things
               which
               belong
               to
               the
               Church
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Wherever
               the
               Bishop
               appears
               ,
               there
               let
               the
               multitude
               be
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               he
               that
               doth
               any
               thing
               without
               the
               privity
               of
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               serves
               the
               Devil
            
             ;
             the
             title
             by
             which
             those
             foule
             
               Gnostick
               hereticks
            
             and
             schismaticks
             (
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             troublers
             and
             dividers
             of
             the
             Church
             )
             were
             signified
             .
             So
             in
             the
             processe
             of
             that
             Epistle
             ,
             having
             mentioned
             obedience
             to
             their
             Bishop
             ,
             as
             a
             necessary
             requisite
             to
             their
             sanctification
             ,
             supposing
             the
             contrary
             to
             be
             an
             act
             of
             pollution
             ,
             i.
             e.
             of
             the
             poyson
             of
             the
             schismaticks
             ,
             and
             again
             admonishing
             them
             as
             of
             their
             duty
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             to
             
               concurre
               with
               the
               sentence
               of
               their
               Bishop
               ,
            
             he
             adds
             ,
             
               that
               he
               that
               doth
               not
            
             so
             (
             expressed
             by
             not
             being
             
               within
               the
               altar
               or
               sept
               )
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               falls
               short
               of
               the
               bread
               of
               God
               ,
            
             is
             an
             
               excommunicate
               person
            
             ,
             being
             rendred
             
             such
             by
             this
             act
             of
             division
             from
             the
             Bishop
             .
             So
             in
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Magnesians
             ,
             speaking
             of
             those
             that
             act
             without
             the
             Bishop
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               these
               seem
               not
               to
               him
               to
               be
               men
               of
               a
               good
               conscience
            
             (
             the
             phrase
             by
             which
             he
             oft
             expresses
             Schismaticks
             ,
             whose
             
               minde
               and
               conscience
               was
               defiled
            
             by
             the
             poyson
             of
             the
             Gnosticks
             at
             that
             time
             )
             
               because
               they
               assembled
               not
               according
               to
               that
               order
               and
               establishment
               which
               was
               setled
               in
               the
               Church
               .
            
             And
             again
             ,
             
               as
               Christ
               did
               nothing
               without
               his
               Father
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               being
               united
               to
               him
               ,
               or
               all
               one
               with
               his
               Father
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               —
               so
               neither
               must
               ye
               doe
               any
               thing
               without
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               but
               assemble
               together
               and
               have
               but
               one
               prayer
               common
               to
               you
               all
               ,
            
             where
             the
             living
             out
             of
             this
             
               regular
               obedience
            
             to
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             is
             the
             contrary
             to
             union
             and
             communion
             ,
             and
             so
             is
             formally
             schisme
             .
             And
             to
             the
             
               Philadelphians
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               as
               many
               as
               are
               God's
               and
               Christ's
               ,
               are
               with
               the
               Bishop
               ,
            
             excluding
             them
             from
             
             the
             unity
             of
             
               Christ's
               body
            
             who
             are
             thus
             separated
             from
             the
             Bishop
             ;
             And
             in
             the
             same
             Epistle
             speaking
             of
             the
             repentance
             of
             schismaticks
             ,
             and
             hereticks
             ,
             and
             
               God's
               pardon
            
             offered
             to
             such
             ,
             the
             *
             condition
             of
             that
             pardon
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             the
             syncerity
             of
             that
             repentance
             ,
             is
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               if
               they
               return
               to
               the
               unity
               of
               God
               and
               senate
               of
               the
               Bishop
               .
            
             So
             frequently
             in
             S.
             Cyprian
             ,
             the
             schisme
             especially
             of
             the
             
               five
               Presbyters
            
             of
             Faelicissimus
             his
             
               faction
               ,
               Ep
            
             :
             40.
             appears
             to
             consist
             in
             their
             disobedience
             to
             ,
             and
             
               breaking
               off
            
             from
             their
             †
             
               proper
               Bishop
            
             ,
             and
             
               causing
               others
               to
               doe
               so
            
             ;
             and
             
               De
               Vnit
               :
               Eccl
            
             :
             the
             Schismatick
             is
             described
             to
             be
             
               filius
               impius
               qui
               contemptis
               Episcopis
               &
               Dei
               sacerdotibus
               derelictis
               constituere
               audet
               aliud
               altare
               ,
               an
               impious
               son
               ,
               which
               having
               contemned
               the
               Bishops
               ,
               and
            
             (
             which
             is
             all
             one
             )
             
               forsaken
               the
               Priests
               of
               God
               ,
               dares
               constitute
               another
               altar
            
             ;
             and
             Ep
             :
             76.
             
               qui
               schisma
               faciunt
               &
               relicto
               Episcopo
               alium
               sibi
               foris
               Pseudo-episcopum
               constituunt
               ,
               the
               schismaticks
               are
               they
               that
               having
               left
               their
               Bishop
               set
               up
               for
               themselves
               abroad
               another
               false
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               all
               their
               
               adherents
               are
               involved
               in
               the
               same
               guilt
               ,
               qui
               se
               schismaticis
               contra
               Praepositos
               &
               sacerdotes
               irreligiosâ
               temeritate
               miscuerunt
               ,
               who
               joyn
               with
               the
               schismaticks
               against
               their
               Bishops
               ,
            
             and
             Ep
             :
             65.
             
             
               Hi
               sunt
               conatus
               schismaticorum
               —
               ut
               sibi
               placeant
               ,
               ut
               Praepositum
               superbo
               tumore
               contemnant
               ,
               These
               are
               the
               endevours
               of
               schismaticks
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               please
               themselves
               ,
               and
               proudly
               contemn
               their
               Bishop
               ,
            
             and
             Ep
             :
             69.
             
             
               Vnum
               scire
               debes
               —
               si
               quis
               cum
               Episcopo
               non
               sit
               ,
               in
               Ecclesiâ
               non
               esse
               ,
               One
               thing
               you
               are
               to
               know
               that
               he
               that
               is
               not
               with
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               is
               not
               in
               the
               Church
               ,
            
             the
             Church
             being
             there
             by
             him
             defined
             
               plebs
               sacerdoti
               adunata
               &
               Pastori
               suo
               grex
               adhaerens
               ,
               the
               people
               united
               to
               the
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               the
               flock
               to
               their
               Pastor
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             
             And
             as
             this
             disobedience
             may
             be
             of
             two
             sorts
             ,
             either
             of
             a
             lower
             ,
             or
             of
             a
             higher
             kinde
             ,
             the
             denying
             obedience
             in
             any
             particular
             
               lawful
               command
            
             of
             the
             superior
             ,
             or
             the
             casting
             off
             all
             obedience
             together
             ,
             dethroning
             them
             ,
             or
             setting
             up
             our selves
             either
             in
             their
             steads
             ,
             or
             in
             opposition
             to
             them
             (
             the
             first
             parallel
             to
             the
             contumacy
             of
             the
             
               Levites
               ,
               the
               sons
               of
               Eliab
               ,
               Num.
            
             16.12
             ,
             14.
             which
             said
             ,
             
               We
               will
               not
               
               come
               up
               ,
            
             the
             second
             to
             their
             
               rebellion
               ,
               levelling
            
             and
             equalling
             themselves
             to
             
               Moses
               and
               Aaron
            
             v.
             3.
             ●
             and
             both
             together
             subjecting
             them
             first
             to
             that
             curse
             ,
             of
             Gods
             ,
             not
             
               accepting
               their
               sacrifice
            
             ,
             v.
             15.
             and
             then
             to
             that
             sudden
             
               exemplary
               destruction
            
             ,
             v.
             31.
             )
             so
             will
             the
             Schisme
             be
             also
             a
             lighter
             ,
             and
             a
             
               grosser
               separation
            
             ,
             a
             defection
             from
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             a
             rebellion
             against
             him
             ,
             the
             former
             ordinarily
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Schisme
             ,
             the
             latter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Sedition
             ,
             the
             latter
             adding
             very
             much
             to
             the
             guilt
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             uncapable
             of
             the
             alleviating
             excuses
             of
             ignorance
             or
             mistake
             (
             in
             thinking
             the
             
               commands
               unlawful
            
             ,
             and
             consequently
             the
             obedience
             )
             which
             may
             be
             pretended
             in
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             
             From
             this
             of
             Bishops
             we
             may
             further
             ascend
             to
             the
             
               higher
               dignity
            
             ,
             and
             authority
             of
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             over
             Bishops
             themselves
             ,
             which
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             will
             be
             fit
             to
             be
             examined
             a
             while
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             
             And
             the
             first
             rise
             may
             be
             taken
             from
             Scripture
             it self
             ,
             where
             the
             Commission
             which
             is
             given
             to
             Titus
             by
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             to
             ordain
             Elders
             ,
             Tit.
             1.5
             .
             (
             that
             is
             
               Bishops
               v.
            
             7.
             )
             
               in
               every
               city
            
             
             of
             Crete
             ,
             demonstrates
             him
             to
             have
             had
             
               Metropolitical
               authority
            
             bestowed
             on
             him
             ;
             so
             saith
             S.
             Chrysostome
             (
             on
             Tit.
             1.
             
             Hom.
             1.
             )
             of
             
               Titus
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               If
               he
               had
               not
               been
               an
               approved
               person
               ,
               in
               whom
               the
               Apostle
               had
               perfect
               confidence
               ,
               he
               would
               never
               have
               committed
               a
               whole
               Island
               to
               him
               ,
               never
               have
               appointed
               him
               to
               perfect
               what
               he
               had
               left
               imperfect
               ,
               never
               have
               intrusted
               to
               him
               the
               jurisdiction
               over
               so
               many
               Bishops
               :
            
             And
             
               Theodoret
               in
               Arg.
               Ep.
               ad
               Tit.
            
             That
             Titus
             was
             
               ordained
               by
            
             S.
             
               Paul
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               to
               ordain
               Bishops
               under
               him
               for
               the
               governing
               of
               that
               whole
               Province
               ,
               being
               a
               very
               great
               one
            
             ;
             and
             
             
               Eusebius
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               That
            
             Titus
             
               had
               the
               inspection
               of
               all
               the
               Churches
               in
            
             Crete
             ,
             of
             which
             that
             there
             was
             an
             hundred
             in
             number
             ,
             and
             Gortyna
             the
             Metropolis
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             appears
             by
             
               Dionysius
               bishop
               of
               Corinth
            
             about
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             175.
             who
             inscribes
             an
             
               Epistle
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               to
               the
               Church
               about
            
             Gortyna
             ,
             
               together
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Dioceses
               in
            
             Crete
             ,
             of
             all
             which
             he
             mentions
             and
             commends
             Philip
             their
             Bishop
             ,
             i.
             e.
             the
             Metropolitan
             ,
             under
             whom
             they
             all
             were
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             Eusebius
             l.
             4.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             12.
             
             
             What
             hath
             been
             thus
             said
             of
             Titus
             ,
             is
             with
             the
             same
             evidence
             of
             the
             Text
             affirmable
             of
             Timothy
             ,
             when
             being
             placed
             by
             S.
             Paul
             at
             Ephesus
             the
             
               chief
               Metropolis
            
             of
             Asia
             ;
             he
             had
             by
             that
             means
             the
             inspection
             of
             all
             the
             Bishops
             there
             ,
             and
             consequently
             is
             directed
             both
             for
             the
             ordaining
             (
             1
             Tim.
             3.2
             .
             )
             and
             
               exercising
               jurisdiction
            
             over
             them
             c.
             5.1.19
             .
             and
             so
             saith
             S.
             Chrysostome
             ,
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               T
               is
               manifest
               that
               Timothy
               was
               intrusted
               with
               more
               Churches
               then
               one
               ,
               even
               with
               a
               whole
               nation
               ,
               that
               of
               Asia
               ,
               and
               therefore
            
             S.
             
               Paul
               discourses
               to
               him
               of
               Elders
               or
               Bishops
               ,
            
             
             So
             the
             
               Anonymus
               writer
            
             of
             the
             
               Martyrdome
               of
               Timothy
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               The
               Apostle
               Timothy
               is
               ordained
               by
            
             S.
             
               Paul
               ,
               and
               enthroned
               Bishop
               of
               the
               Metropolis
               of
               Ephesus
               ,
            
             and
             accordingly
             is
             by
             Theodoret
             styled
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               Apostle
               ,
               i.
               e.
               chief
               ruler
            
             or
             
               Bishop
               of
               the
               Asiaticks
            
             ;
             
             and
             by
             
               Eusebius
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Bishop
               of
               the
               Province
               about
               Ephesus
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             13.
             
             
             The
             same
             might
             be
             shew'd
             of
             
               James
               Bishop
               of
               Jerusalem
            
             ,
             who
             by
             that
             means
             was
             evidently
             Metropolitane
             of
             all
             the
             cities
             of
             all
             Judea
             ,
             And
             even
             of
             Syria
             and
             Cilicia
             also
             ,
             if
             we
             may
             argue
             concludently
             from
             the
             sending
             of
             that
             Canon
             to
             those
             
               regions
               ,
               Act.
            
             15.23
             .
             It
             is
             likewise
             the
             affirmation
             of
             Agrippa
             (
             in
             Philo
             )
             of
             
               Jerusalem
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               that
               it
               was
               the
               Metropolis
               ,
               not
               only
               of
               one
               region
               Judea
               ,
               but
               of
               many
               more
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               Colonies
               it
               had
               sent
               out
               ,
               naming
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Syria
            
             and
             Cilicia
             among
             others
             .
             And
             thereto
             agrees
             again
             (
             as
             far
             as
             Syria
             )
             what
             we
             find
             in
             the
             letters
             of
             Commission
             ,
             which
             Saul
             had
             received
             from
             the
             Sanhedrim
             at
             Jerusalem
             ▪
             
             to
             the
             Synagogues
             of
             Damascus
             ,
             a
             city
             of
             Syria
             ,
             as
             being
             supposed
             under
             that
             Metropolis
             of
             Judea
             ,
             Act.
             9.1
             ,
             2.
             
             And
             accordingly
             after
             the
             destruction
             of
             
               Jerusalem
               ,
               Tiberias
            
             had
             this
             privilege
             ,
             as
             appears
             both
             by
             the
             
               Imperial
               Code
               ,
               tit
               .
               de
               Jud.
               &
               Caelic
               .
            
             and
             by
             Epiphanius
             ,
             in
             the
             heresie
             of
             the
             Ebionites
             ,
             who
             refers
             all
             Syria
             and
             Cilicia
             to
             that
             Metropolis
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             Synagogues
             in
             Assyria
             and
             Media
             to
             the
             Sanhedrim
             in
             Bagdat
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             Aegypt
             to
             that
             in
             Alexandria
             ;
             But
             all
             this
             doth
             rather
             belong
             to
             the
             
               Jewish
               Form
            
             among
             themselves
             and
             the
             Jurisdiction
             of
             that
             
               Great
               Sanhedrim
            
             over
             their
             colonies
             thus
             far
             diffused
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             so
             appliable
             to
             the
             
               Christian
               Church
            
             at
             Jerusalem
             ,
             it
             being
             affirmed
             by
             
               Joseph
               .
               de
               bel
               .
               Jud.
               l.
            
             3.
             c.
             ●
             .
             that
             Antioch
             was
             Metropolis
             of
             all
             Syria
             ,
             but
             this
             by
             the
             way
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             14.
             
             Thus
             Philippi
             appears
             to
             have
             been
             the
             Metropolis
             of
             
               one
               part
               of
               Macedonia
            
             (
             as
             Thessalonica
             another
             )
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               prime
               city
               of
               a
               portion
               ,
               or
               division
               ,
            
             or
             province
             of
             Macedonia
             ,
             
             Act.
             16.12
             .
             and
             is
             accordingly
             so
             styled
             by
             
             Photius
             the
             
               Patriarch
               of
               Constantinople
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               the
               city
               of
               Philippi
               being
               a
               Metropolis
               of
               a
               Province
               of
               the
               Macedonians
               ,
            
             and
             so
             Epaphroditus
             their
             Bishop
             in
             S.
             Pauls
             time
             (
             as
             *
             Theodoret
             and
             others
             resolve
             from
             his
             being
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               their
               Apostle
               ,
               Phil.
            
             2.25
             .
             )
             had
             under
             him
             
               many
               Bishops
            
             ,
             who
             are
             accordingly
             named
             in
             the
             
               plural
               Phil.
            
             1.1
             .
             and
             all
             these
             subordinate
             to
             him
             as
             their
             Metropolitane
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             15.
             
             So
             of
             the
             
               seven
               churches
            
             of
             
               Asia
               ,
               Rev.
            
             2.
             and
             3.
             it
             appears
             (
             what
             hath
             been
             elsewhere
             proved
             )
             that
             they
             were
             all
             Metropoles
             ;
             Of
             Ephesus
             it
             hath
             been
             already
             clear
             ,
             and
             S.
             Chrysostome
             is
             expresse
             ,
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Ephesus
             is
             a
             
               Metropolis
               of
               Asia
               ,
               and
               Theod.
               in
               Ep.
               ad
               Dioscor
               .
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             in
             Photius
             ,
             the
             Antient
             writer
             of
             the
             Martyrdome
             of
             
               Timothy
               (
               bib
               .
               num
            
             .
             254.
             )
             saith
             of
             S.
             John
             ▪
             that
             being
             
               returned
               from
               his
               banishment
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               he
               resided
               at
               the
               Metropolis
               of
               the
               Ephesians
               .
            
             And
             in
             Vlpian
             ,
             
             the
             Proconsul
             under
             Antoninus
             being
             to
             go
             to
             
             Asia
             ,
             was
             to
             touch
             upon
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Ephesus
               one
               and
               the
               chief
               of
               the
               Metropoles
               of
               Asia
               :
            
             and
             accordingly
             Act.
             19.38
             .
             it
             is
             said
             of
             that
             city
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               Proconsuls
               were
               there
               ,
               and
               the
               Assises
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               chief
               city
            
             of
             that
             Province
             ,
             
             and
             in
             
               Eusebius
               ,
               Antoninus
               Pius
            
             his
             Epistle
             concerning
             the
             Christians
             is
             said
             to
             have
             been
             read
             and
             proclaimed
             at
             
               Ephesus
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               the
               common
               councel
            
             or
             consessus
             of
             Asia
             ,
             
             and
             in
             Aristides
             it
             is
             styled
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               common
               Magazine
               of
               Asia
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               whither
               they
               applied
               themselves
               for
               all
               their
               wants
               .
            
             All
             which
             are
             evidences
             that
             it
             was
             a
             Metropolis
             (
             and
             the
             chief
             )
             of
             Asia
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             16.
             
             
             So
             of
             Thyatira
             ,
             saith
             Ptolomee
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             that
             it
             was
             a
             Metropolis
             .
             Of
             Philadelphia
             the
             Councel
             of
             
               Constantinople
               Sub
               Menâ
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               the
               Bishop
               of
               the
               Metropolis
               of
               the
               Philadelphians
               of
               the
               Province
               of
               the
               Lydians
               ,
            
             i.
             e.
             in
             this
             Lydian
             or
             
               Proconsular
               Asia
            
             .
             So
             
               Laodicea
               ,
               Sardis
            
             ,
             and
             Smyrna
             (
             together
             with
             Ephesus
             )
             are
             set
             down
             
             by
             Plinie
             as
             cities
             in
             which
             the
             
               Roman
               Proconsuls
            
             kept
             their
             Assises
             ,
             
             and
             dispensed
             justice
             to
             all
             the
             neighbouring
             cities
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             character
             of
             a
             Metropolis
             in
             the
             civil
             notion
             ,
             
             and
             the
             same
             he
             also
             affirms
             elsewhere
             of
             Pergamus
             :
             And
             thus
             the
             whole
             number
             of
             the
             
               seven
               Churches
            
             appear
             each
             of
             them
             ,
             to
             have
             been
             Metropoles
             ,
             
             and
             accordingly
             by
             Ignatius
             his
             Epistles
             to
             the
             Trallians
             and
             Magnesians
             ,
             (
             the
             Christians
             of
             two
             neighbour
             cities
             of
             Lydia
             on
             the
             Banks
             of
             Meander
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             this
             Asia
             )
             and
             by
             the
             mention
             of
             their
             
               Bishops
               Damas
            
             and
             Polybius
             ,
             it
             is
             evident
             that
             there
             were
             other
             
               Episcopal
               Sees
            
             in
             that
             Asia
             ,
             beside
             those
             seven
             named
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             and
             those
             afterward
             appear
             to
             have
             been
             subject
             to
             the
             Metropolis
             of
             Ephesus
             ,
             which
             alone
             of
             all
             the
             seven
             continued
             till
             
             Constantin's
             time
             ,
             the
             rest
             being
             destroyed
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             17.
             
             From
             these
             manifest
             footsteps
             of
             Metropolitical
             power
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             descend
             through
             the
             first
             times
             ,
             and
             find
             the
             like
             ;
             
             As
             when
             Ignatius
             the
             
               Archbishop
               of
               Antioch
            
             (
             the
             
               Primitive
               
               Martyr
            
             )
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Romans
             styleth
             himself
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Pastor
               of
               the
               Church
               which
               was
               in
               Syria
               ,
            
             that
             whole
             region
             belonging
             then
             to
             that
             Metropolis
             of
             Antioch
             :
             Agreeable
             to
             which
             is
             that
             of
             the
             author
             of
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Antiocheni
             (
             whosoever
             it
             was
             )
             inscribing
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             to
             the
             
               Church
               of
               God
               in
               Syria
               ,
               that
               belongs
               as
               a
               Province
               to
               that
               of
               Antioch
               :
            
             
             So
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Romans
             is
             inscribed
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               to
               the
               Church
               which
               hath
               the
               Presidencie
               in
               the
               place
               of
               the
               Region
               or
               Province
               of
               the
               Romans
               ,
            
             which
             gives
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             a
             Metropolitical
             power
             over
             all
             other
             the
             Bishops
             of
             that
             Province
             ,
             the
             
               Vrbicarian
               region
            
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             styled
             ,
             and
             *
             distinguished
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Italy
             properly
             so
             called
             ,
             confined
             to
             the
             
               seven
               Provinces
            
             of
             the
             
               civil
               jurisdiction
            
             of
             the
             
               Vicarius
               Italiae
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
             Ecclesiastical
             of
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             Milan
             the
             
               chief
               Metropolis
            
             thereof
             .
             Of
             the
             circuit
             or
             compasse
             of
             this
             Province
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             many
             learned
             men
             have
             discoursed
             excellently
             out
             of
             the
             
               Antient
               Surveys
            
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             particularly
             that
             
               very
               learned
               Frenchman
            
             so
             rarely
             skilled
             ,
             and
             judicious
             in
             
               Antiquity
               ,
               Jacobus
               Leschaserius
            
             ,
             in
             his
             
               little
               tract
               de
               Region
               .
               Suburbic
            
             ▪
             but
             none
             with
             more
             evidence
             of
             conviction
             ,
             then
             our
             Modest
             countreyman
             M
             r
             Brerewood
             ,
             who
             thus
             describes
             the
             
               antient
               jurisdiction
            
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             
               that
               it
               contained
               all
               those
               Provinces
               of
               the
               Diocese
               of
               Italy
               ,
               which
               the
               old
               Lawyers
               term
               Suburbicarias
               ,
               of
               which
               there
               were
               ten
               ,
               three
               Islands
               ,
               Sicily
               ,
               Sardinia
               ,
               and
               Corsica
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               seven
               in
               the
               firm
               land
               of
               Italy
               ,
               taking
               up
               in
               a
               manner
               all
               the
               narrow
               part
               of
               it
               ,
               viz.
               all
               Italy
               Eastward
               ,
               but
               on
               the
               West
               no
               farther
               extended
               then
               to
               the
               River
               Magra
               (
               the
               limit
               of
               Tuscanie
               )
               toward
               the
               Tyrrhene
               sea
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               River
               Esino
               (
               antiently
               Asius
               )
               toward
               the
               Adriatick
               Sea.
               
            
             For
             at
             that
             
               River
               Esino
            
             met
             both
             the
             
               Picenum
               ,
               Suburbicarium
            
             ,
             
             and
             Annonarium
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             which
             belonged
             to
             the
             Prefecture
             of
             Rome
             ,
             of
             which
             that
             city
             was
             the
             Metropolis
             ,
             And
             the
             later
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             other
             Provinces
             in
             the
             broader
             part
             of
             
               Italy
               (
               seven
            
             of
             them
             in
             all
             )
             to
             the
             
               Diocese
               of
               Italy
            
             ,
             of
             which
             Milan
             was
             the
             Metropolis
             .
             
             Thus
             Ruffinus
             in
             his
             Paraphrase
             rather
             then
             translation
             of
             the
             
               Nicene
               Canon
            
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             was
             thereby
             authorized
             
               Suburbicariarum
               Ecclesiarum
               Sollicitudinem
               gerere
            
             ,
             to
             
               take
               and
               manage
               the
               care
               of
               the
               suburbicarian
               Churches
            
             ;
             and
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             to
             doubt
             but
             that
             he
             that
             lived
             so
             neer
             after
             that
             Councel
             ,
             and
             was
             of
             Italy
             ,
             knew
             competently
             what
             he
             affirmed
             of
             that
             matter
             .
             And
             it
             being
             evident
             that
             in
             all
             other
             places
             the
             
               Ecclesiastical
               jurisdictions
            
             were
             proportioned
             to
             the
             temporal
             of
             the
             Lieutenants
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             
               Suburbicarian
               region
            
             ,
             and
             the
             so
             many
             and
             no
             more
             provinces
             in
             them
             ,
             pertain'd
             to
             the
             Praefecture
             of
             the
             city
             of
             Rome
             ,
             It
             must
             follow
             that
             these
             were
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             
               Ecclesiastical
               Jurisdiction
            
             of
             that
             Bishop
             also
             .
             But
             this
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             in
             passing
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             18.
             
             
             So
             when
             of
             S.
             Mark
             it
             is
             affirm'd
             out
             of
             the
             anc●ent
             records
             by
             Eusebius
             ,
             that
             he
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               first
               constituted
               Churches
            
             (
             in
             the
             plural
             )
             in
             Alexandria
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             title
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               Province
               of
               Alexandria
            
             ,
             put
             them
             all
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             Anianus
             in
             the
             8
             th
             of
             Nero
             ,
             
             it
             is
             evident
             that
             Alexandria
             was
             a
             Metropolitical
             ,
             or
             
               Patriarchal
               See
            
             to
             which
             all
             Aegypt
             did
             belong
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             19.
             
             
             So
             S.
             Cyprian
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Carthage
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             whole
             Province
             of
             Africk
             pertained
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             
               Councel
               of
               Constantinople
               in
               Trullo
               ,
               Can.
            
             2.
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             the
             
               Region
               of
               Africk
            
             ,
             And
             accordingly
             he
             often
             mentions
             the
             
               many
               Bishops
            
             in
             his
             
               Province
               ,
               Vniversis
               vel
               in
               nostrâ
               Provinciâ
               —
               to
               all
               the
               Bishops
               in
               our
               Province
               —
               Ep.
            
             40.
             
             And
             
               Latiùs
               fusa
               est
               nostra
               Provincia
               ,
               habet
               etiam
               Numidiam
               &
               Mauritanias
               duas
               sibi
               cohaerentes
               .
               Our
               Province
               is
               extended
               farther
               ,
               hath
               Numidia
               and
               the
               two
               Mauritania's
               annexed
               to
               it
               ,
               Ep.
            
             45.
             in
             each
             of
             which
             there
             being
             
             a
             Church
             and
             consequently
             a
             Bishop
             in
             
               every
               city
            
             (
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Act.
             14.23
             .
             is
             all
             one
             with
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               in
               every
               city
               Act.
            
             16.4
             .
             )
             they
             were
             all
             subject
             to
             this
             Metropolitane
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             20.
             
             
             By
             all
             this
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             which
             might
             be
             added
             ,
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             
               several
               Bishops
            
             had
             Praefecture
             over
             their
             
               several
               Churches
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Presbyters
               ▪
               Deacons
            
             ,
             and
             people
             under
             them
             ,
             such
             as
             could
             not
             be
             
               cast
               off
            
             by
             any
             without
             the
             guilt
             and
             brand
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             So
             the
             Bishops
             themselves
             of
             the
             
               ordinary
               ,
               inferior
               cities
            
             (
             for
             the
             preserving
             of
             unity
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             good
             uses
             )
             were
             subjected
             to
             the
             higher
             power
             of
             Archbishops
             or
             Metropolitanes
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             21.
             
             
             Nay
             we
             must
             yet
             ascend
             one
             degree
             higher
             from
             this
             of
             Arch-Bishops
             or
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             to
             that
             supreme
             of
             Primates
             or
             Patriarchs
             ,
             the
             division
             of
             which
             is
             thus
             cleared
             in
             the
             division
             and
             Notitia
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               Empire
            
             .
             
             Constantine
             the
             Great
             instituted
             
               four
               Praefecti
               Praetorio
            
             ,
             two
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             as
             many
             in
             the
             West
             ;
             Of
             the
             Western
             ,
             one
             at
             Rome
             ,
             another
             at
             Triers
             ,
             this
             last
             then
             called
             
               Praefectus
               Praetorio
               Galliarum
            
             .
             These
             
             Praefects
             had
             their
             
               several
               Vicarii
            
             ,
             who
             in
             their
             power
             ,
             and
             name
             judged
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             As
             for
             example
             ,
             The
             
               Praefectus
               Praetorio
            
             placed
             at
             Triers
             had
             
               three
               Vicarii
            
             ,
             or
             
               Lieutenants
               ,
               one
            
             placed
             at
             Triers
             ,
             a
             second
             at
             Lions
             ,
             a
             third
             at
             Vienna
             ,
             from
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             whose
             authority
             ,
             and
             the
             resort
             of
             all
             other
             cities
             and
             Provinces
             to
             them
             for
             justice
             sprang
             the
             splendor
             ,
             and
             dignity
             of
             those
             cities
             where
             they
             resided
             ,
             and
             the
             dependence
             of
             large
             Provinces
             and
             many
             other
             cities
             on
             each
             of
             them
             .
             This
             whole
             circuit
             which
             was
             thus
             subject
             to
             ,
             or
             dependent
             on
             any
             such
             Lieutenant
             ,
             was
             by
             the
             Greeks
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             the
             style
             devolving
             from
             the
             civil
             to
             the
             Ecclesiastical
             divisions
             ,
             as
             the
             former
             both
             of
             cities
             ,
             and
             of
             Territories
             ,
             and
             of
             Metropoles
             or
             
               Mother
               cities
            
             (
             the
             chief
             in
             every
             Province
             )
             had
             done
             the
             Bishop
             being
             answerable
             to
             the
             
               Defensor
               civitatis
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Archbishop
             to
             the
             Praesident
             in
             every
             Province
             ,
             from
             thence
             it
             came
             that
             every
             such
             Metropolis
             which
             was
             the
             seat
             of
             any
             Vicarius
             or
             
               Lieutenant
               General
            
             ,
             was
             (
             over
             and
             above
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Bishop
             thereof
             
               Primas
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Patriarcha
            
             ,
             a
             
               Primate
               ,
               Exarch
            
             ,
             or
             Patriarch
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             which
             is
             larger
             then
             a
             Province
             ,
             the
             
               joynt
               administration
               of
               many
               Provinces
            
             ,
             with
             the
             several
             Metropoles
             ,
             and
             Metroplitanes
             contained
             in
             it
             )
             was
             subjected
             to
             him
             .
             
             Thus
             S.
             Irenaeus
             being
             Bishop
             of
             Lyons
             ,
             is
             by
             Eusebius
             affirm'd
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               to
               have
               the
               over
               sight
            
             or
             
               Government
               of
               the
               Provinces
               of
               France
               ,
            
             either
             those
             only
             that
             were
             under
             that
             Primate
             ,
             or
             perhaps
             of
             all
             France
             ,
             
             of
             which
             Lyons
             was
             then
             in
             the
             Ecclesiastical
             account
             the
             first
             Exarchate
             ;
             for
             so
             saith
             the
             same
             Eusebius
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Lyons
             ,
             and
             Vienna
             (
             but
             
               first
               Lyons
               )
               were
               famously
               known
               to
               be
               beyond
               all
               others
               in
               those
               parts
               ,
               the
               principal
               Metropoles
               of
               France
               .
            
             And
             again
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               these
               were
               the
               most
               splendid
               illustrious
               Churches
               there
               .
            
             To
             which
             first
             times
             I
             conceive
             belongs
             that
             verse
             of
             
               Guilielmus
               Brito
               in
               Philippeide
               .
               
               Et
               Lugdunensis
               ,
               quo
               Gallia
               tota
               solebat
               ,
               Vt
               fama
               est
               ,
               Primate
               regi
            
             —
             placing
             
               all
               France
            
             under
             the
             Primate
             of
             Lyons
             ,
             or
             affirming
             it
             from
             
               tradition
               (
               ut
               fama
               est
            
             )
             that
             it
             was
             
               wont
               antiently
            
             to
             be
             so
             placed
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             well
             understood
             or
             taken
             notice
             of
             by
             the
             learned
             
               Jos
               .
               Scaliger
            
             ,
             
             when
             he
             affirms
             it
             
               nuperum
               &
               novitium
               ,
               &
               ex
               beneficio
               Romani
               Pontificis
               indultum
               ,
               a
               privilege
               lately
               granted
               to
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Lyons
               by
               the
               Pope
               ,
               quod
               Primatem
               sese
               vocari
               gaudeat
               ,
               that
               he
               calls
               himself
               Primate
               ,
            
             which
             privilege
             ,
             if
             not
             title
             ,
             did
             so
             long
             since
             belong
             to
             Irenaeus
             the
             Bishop
             of
             that
             Diocese
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             22.
             
             I
             shall
             not
             need
             inlarge
             on
             this
             subject
             ,
             or
             set
             down
             the
             several
             Primates
             and
             Dioceses
             belonging
             to
             them
             .
             It
             is
             known
             in
             the
             
               ancient
               notitiae
            
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             beside
             the
             
               three
               Patriarchs
            
             of
             
               Rome
               ,
               Alexandria
            
             ,
             and
             Antioch
             (
             to
             which
             title
             afterward
             Constantinople
             ,
             and
             Jerusalem
             were
             advanced
             )
             there
             were
             
               eleven
               Primates
            
             more
             ,
             there
             being
             
               fourteen
               Dioceses
            
             ,
             or
             
               joynt
               administrations
               of
               many
               Provinces
            
             (
             for
             so
             the
             word
             anciently
             signified
             ,
             not
             in
             the
             modern
             sense
             of
             it
             ,
             one
             city
             and
             the
             
             territory
             ,
             
             the
             jurisdiction
             of
             an
             ordinary
             Bishop
             ,
             for
             which
             they
             then
             used
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             seven
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             the
             Praefecture
             of
             the
             city
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             six
             more
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             
               whole
               Empire
            
             was
             divided
             .
             And
             though
             the
             Patriarchs
             had
             in
             Councels
             the
             praecedence
             ,
             or
             deference
             in
             respect
             of
             place
             ,
             either
             because
             these
             three
             cities
             had
             the
             honour
             to
             
               disperse
               Christianity
            
             in
             a
             most
             eminent
             manner
             to
             other
             cities
             ,
             and
             nations
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             great
             dignity
             of
             the
             cities
             themselves
             ,
             (
             *
             Rome
             being
             the
             seat
             and
             
               first
               city
            
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             thereupon
             thus
             dignified
             saith
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             :
             and
             Alexandria
             by
             †
             
               Dio
               Chrysostome
            
             ,
             and
             others
             affirmed
             to
             be
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             Antioch
             the
             third
             ,
             saith
             Josephus
             )
             yet
             it
             is
             certain
             that
             the
             power
             and
             jurisdiction
             of
             Primates
             ,
             was
             as
             great
             as
             of
             Patriarchs
             ,
             and
             the
             Office
             the
             same
             (
             see
             
               Anacle●us
               Epist
               .
               ad
               Episc
               .
               Ital.
            
             and
             
               Gratian
               Dist
            
             .
             99.
             )
             and
             many
             times
             in
             Authors
             the
             very
             titles
             confounded
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             Justinian
             ,
             who
             commonly
             gives
             Primates
             the
             names
             of
             Patriarchs
             of
             the
             Dioceses
             .
             And
             if
             it
             be
             now
             demanded
             whether
             
             there
             were
             not
             anciently
             some
             
               Summum
               Genus
            
             ,
             some
             
               one
               Supreme
            
             either
             of
             ,
             or
             over
             these
             Patriarchs
             ,
             I
             answer
             ,
             that
             if
             we
             respect
             order
             ,
             or
             priority
             of
             place
             again
             ,
             then
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             had
             it
             among
             the
             Patriarchs
             ,
             as
             the
             Patriarchs
             among
             the
             Primates
             ,
             that
             city
             of
             Rome
             being
             Lady
             of
             the
             World
             ,
             and
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Empire
             ;
             But
             if
             we
             respect
             power
             ,
             
             or
             authority
             ,
             there
             was
             none
             anciently
             in
             the
             Church
             over
             that
             of
             Primates
             ,
             and
             Patriarchs
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             of
             the
             Emperour
             in
             the
             
               whole
               Christian
            
             World
             (
             as
             of
             every
             
               Soveraign
               Prince
            
             in
             his
             Dominions
             )
             as
             may
             appear
             by
             the
             ancient
             power
             ,
             and
             practice
             of
             congregating
             ,
             or
             convoking
             of
             
               Councels
               ,
               Provincial
            
             by
             the
             
               Metropolitan
               ,
               Patriarchal
            
             by
             the
             Patriarch
             ,
             or
             
               Primate
               ,
               National
            
             by
             the
             Prince
             ,
             for
             the
             first
             1000
             years
             ,
             through
             the
             whole
             West
             ,
             and
             General
             by
             the
             *
             
             Emperor
             ,
             when
             for
             the
             conserving
             the
             unity
             ,
             or
             taking
             care
             for
             the
             necessities
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             those
             last
             remedies
             appeared
             seasonable
             .
             But
             this
             of
             
               General
               Councels
            
             being
             extraordinary
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             the
             Church
             was
             without
             them
             for
             the
             first
             
               three
               hundred
               yeers
            
             ,
             and
             are
             now
             morally
             impossible
             to
             be
             had
             ,
             we
             need
             not
             farther
             to
             ascend
             to
             these
             ,
             but
             content
             our selves
             with
             those
             standing
             powers
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             uppermost
             of
             which
             are
             
               Archbishops
               ,
               Primates
            
             ,
             and
             Patriarchs
             ,
             to
             whom
             the
             Bishops
             themselves
             are
             in
             many
             things
             appointed
             to
             be
             subject
             ,
             and
             this
             power
             ,
             and
             subjection
             ,
             defined
             ,
             and
             asserted
             ,
             by
             the
             
               Ancient
               Canons
            
             ,
             
             and
             the
             most
             ancient
             ,
             even
             immemorial
             
               Apostolical
               tradition
            
             ,
             and
             Custome
             ,
             avouched
             for
             it
             ,
             as
             may
             appear
             
               Concil
               .
               Nicen.
            
             1.
             
             Can.
             4.6
             .
             
               Concil
               .
               Antioch
            
             .
             c.
             9.20
             .
             
               Concil
               .
               Chalced.
               C.
            
             19.
             
             In
             the
             
               Sixt
               Nicene
               Canon
            
             ,
             where
             the
             jurisdiction
             of
             
               all
               Aegypt
               ,
               Lybia
               and
               Pentapolis
            
             is
             affirmed
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Alexandria
             ,
             and
             order
             is
             taken
             that
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             privileges
             of
             eminency
             which
             belong
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             and
             Metropolitanes
             
             of
             all
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             shall
             be
             conserved
             intire
             to
             them
             ,
             the
             Introduction
             is
             made
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Let
               the
               Ancient
               customes
               be
               in
               force
               ,
            
             The
             very
             form
             which
             S.
             Ignatius
             useth
             concerning
             
               Apostolical
               customes
            
             which
             were
             to
             be
             solicitously
             retained
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             seems
             there
             particularly
             to
             refer
             to
             those
             orders
             ,
             which
             S.
             Mark
             had
             left
             in
             
               Aegypt
               ,
               Lybia
            
             ,
             and
             Pentapolis
             ,
             subjecting
             all
             the
             Bishops
             there
             to
             the
             Patriarch
             by
             him
             constituted
             in
             Alexandria
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             23.
             
             So
             in
             the
             9
             th
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             where
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               Bishop
               presiding
               in
               the
               Metropolis
               ,
            
             is
             appointed
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               to
               undertake
               the
               care
               of
               the
               whole
               Province
            
             ▪
             (
             and
             all
             the
             inferior
             cities
             ,
             and
             Bishops
             in
             them
             )
             and
             the
             Bishops
             commanded
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             it
             is
             straight
             added
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               according
               to
               the
               ancient
               Canon
               of
               the
               Fathers
               ,
               which
               hath
               continued
               in
               force
            
             (
             from
             the
             first
             times
             also
             unto
             that
             Councel
             )
             Where
             if
             it
             be
             demanded
             what
             is
             the
             importance
             of
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             I
             conceive
             the
             word
             to
             be
             best
             explained
             by
             Hesychius
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             it
             should
             doubtlesse
             be
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             and
             so
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Canon
             to
             be
             ,
             agreeably
             to
             the
             expresse
             words
             of
             other
             Canons
             ,
             that
             as
             any
             
               ordinary
               Bishop
            
             hath
             full
             power
             in
             his
             
               own
               Church
            
             ,
             which
             he
             may
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             wherein
             that
             alone
             is
             concerned
             ,
             exercise
             independently
             from
             the
             commands
             or
             directions
             of
             any
             ,
             So
             in
             any
             thing
             of
             a
             more
             forein
             nature
             ,
             wherein
             any
             
               other
               Church
            
             is
             concerned
             equally
             with
             that
             ,
             and
             so
             falls
             not
             under
             the
             sole
             cognizance
             or
             judgement
             of
             either
             ,
             there
             the
             Bishop
             of
             that
             Church
             is
             to
             do
             nothing
             without
             directions
             from
             the
             Metropolitane
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             the
             meaning
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             as
             that
             is
             all
             one
             with
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             that
             no
             Bishop
             must
             do
             any
             thing
             but
             what
             belongs
             particularly
             to
             him
             
               ratione
               officii
            
             (
             any
             thing
             that
             another
             is
             concerned
             in
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             he
             )
             without
             the
             Metropolitane
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             24.
             
             
             So
             in
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             the
             direction
             is
             given
             for
             appeals
             in
             this
             order
             ,
             from
             the
             Bishop
             to
             the
             Metropolitane
             ,
             from
             the
             Metropolitane
             
             to
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             Primate
             of
             the
             Diocese
             or
             Province
             ,
             as
             where
             there
             are
             more
             Metropolitanes
             then
             one
             (
             as
             was
             shewed
             of
             Ephesus
             in
             Asia
             ,
             
             and
             elsewhere
             frequently
             )
             there
             some
             one
             is
             Primate
             or
             Patriarch
             among
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             him
             lyes
             the
             appeal
             in
             the
             last
             resort
             ,
             and
             from
             him
             to
             no
             other
             ,
             see
             
               Justinian
               Novel
            
             .
             123.
             c.
             22.
             and
             Cod.
             l.
             1.
             tit
             .
             4.
             leg
             .
             29.
             who
             speaking
             of
             this
             calls
             it
             an
             ancient
             decree
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             25.
             
             That
             which
             we
             find
             in
             the
             
               eighth
               Canon
            
             of
             the
             Great
             Councel
             of
             Ephesus
             ,
             shall
             conclude
             this
             matter
             ,
             when
             upon
             some
             claim
             of
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Antioch
             for
             an
             interest
             in
             the
             ordaining
             of
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Cyprus
             ,
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Cyprus
             deny
             his
             claim
             ,
             and
             deduce
             their
             privilege
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             independence
             from
             any
             
               forein
               Bishop
            
             ,
             from
             the
             very
             Apostles
             times
             ,
             
               A
               sanctis
               Apostolis
            
             ,
             say
             they
             ,
             
               nunquam
               possunt
               ostendere
               ,
               quòd
               adfuerit
               Antiochenus
               &
               ordinaverit
               ,
               vel
               communicaverit
               unquam
               insulae
               ordinationis
               gratiam
               ,
               neque
               alius
               quisquam
               ,
               From
               the
               very
               Apostles
               times
               they
               can
               never
               shew
               that
               the
               Patriarch
               of
               Antioch
               or
               any
               other
               was
               present
               
               and
               ordained
               ,
               or
            
             (
             being
             
               absent
               )
               sent
               the
               grace
               of
               ordination
               to
               this
               Island
               ,
               but
               that
               the
               Bishops
               of
               Constantia
               ,
            
             the
             
               Metropolis
               of
               that
               Island
            
             ,
             by
             name
             
               Troilus
               ,
               Sabinus
            
             ,
             and
             Epiphanius
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             
               orthodox
               Bishops
               from
               the
               Apostles
               times
               ,
               ab
               his
               qui
               in
               Cypro
               constituti
               sunt
               ,
               have
               been
               constituted
               and
               ordained
               by
               their
               own
               Bishops
               of
               the
               Island
               ,
            
             and
             accordingly
             they
             required
             that
             they
             might
             continue
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             
               Sicut
               initio
               à
               temporibus
               Apostolorum
               —
               permansit
               Cypriorum
               Synodus
               ,
               as
               they
               had
               done
               from
               the
               times
               of
               the
               very
               Apostles
               ,
            
             still
             appealing
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               to
               the
               ancient
               manner
            
             ,
             the
             
               ancient
               custome
            
             ,
             the
             privileges
             ,
             which
             from
             their
             
               first
               plantation
            
             they
             had
             enjoyed
             ,
             and
             that
             from
             the
             Apostles
             themselves
             :
             And
             accordingly
             that
             Councel
             condemned
             the
             pretension
             of
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             was
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               an
               innovation
               against
               the
               Ecclesiastical
               Lawes
               and
               Canons
               of
               the
               holy
               Fathers
               ,
               and
               orders
               not
            
             only
             in
             behalf
             of
             the
             Cypriots
             that
             the
             Bishops
             
             of
             their
             
               Churches
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               —
               shall
               continue
               to
               enjoy
               their
               right
               inviolate
               according
               to
               the
               ancient
               custome
               ,
            
             but
             extended
             their
             sentence
             to
             all
             other
             Dioceses
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               The
               same
               shall
               be
               observed
               in
               all
               other
               Dioceses
               and
               Provinces
               wheresoever
               ,
               that
               no
               Bishop
               shall
               lay
               hold
               of
               another
               Province
               ,
               which
               hath
               not
               been
               formerly
               and
               from
               the
               beginning
               under
               their
               or
               their
               Ancestors
               power
               .
            
             And
             again
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               This
               holy
               and
               Oecumenical
               Synod
               hath
               decreed
               ,
               that
               the
               privileges
               and
               rights
               of
               every
               Province
               shall
               be
               conserved
               pure
               and
               inviolate
               ,
               as
               they
               have
               enjoyed
               them
               from
               the
               beginning
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               custome
               that
               hath
               anciently
               been
               in
               force
               .
            
             All
             deducing
             this
             power
             of
             Primates
             over
             their
             
               own
               Bishops
            
             (
             and
             together
             excluding
             all
             forein
             pretenders
             )
             from
             
             the
             Apostles
             and
             
               first
               planters
            
             of
             the
             Churches
             ,
             and
             requiring
             all
             to
             remain
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             first
             thus
             constituted
             .
             Wherein
             as
             there
             be
             many
             things
             of
             useful
             observation
             ,
             which
             will
             be
             more
             fitly
             appliable
             in
             the
             progresse
             of
             this
             discourse
             ,
             so
             that
             which
             is
             alone
             pertinent
             to
             this
             place
             is
             only
             this
             ,
             that
             there
             may
             be
             a
             disobedience
             ,
             and
             irregularity
             ,
             and
             so
             a
             Schisme
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             Bishops
             in
             respect
             of
             their
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             authority
             which
             they
             have
             by
             Canon
             and
             
               Primitive
               custome
            
             over
             them
             ,
             which
             was
             therefore
             to
             be
             added
             to
             the
             several
             Species
             of
             Schisme
             set
             down
             in
             the
             former
             chapters
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             The
             pretended
             evidences
             of
             the
             Romanist
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             examined
             ,
             and
             first
             that
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             Supremacy
             by
             Christs
             donation
             to
             S.
             Peter
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             THE
             Scene
             being
             thus
             prepared
             ,
             and
             the
             nature
             and
             sorts
             of
             Schisme
             defined
             and
             summarily
             enumerated
             ,
             our
             method
             now
             
             leads
             us
             to
             inquire
             impartially
             ,
             what
             evidences
             are
             producible
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             whereby
             it
             may
             be
             thought
             lyable
             to
             this
             guilt
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             And
             these
             pretended
             evidences
             may
             be
             of
             several
             sorts
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             several
             Species
             of
             this
             sort
             of
             Schisme
             described
             ,
             and
             acknowledged
             by
             us
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             The
             first
             evidence
             that
             is
             offered
             against
             us
             is
             taken
             from
             a
             presumed
             Supremacy
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             as
             Successor
             to
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             over
             all
             Churches
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             being
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             
               Henry
               VIII
               .
               renounced
            
             ,
             and
             
               disclaimed
               ,
               first
            
             by
             both
             Vniversities
             ,
             and
             most
             of
             the
             greatest
             and
             famous
             Monasteries
             of
             this
             kingdome
             (
             in
             their
             negative
             answer
             and
             determination
             of
             this
             question
             ,
             
               An
               aliquid
               Authoritatis
               in
               hoc
               Regno
               Angliae
               Pontifici
               Romano
               de
               jure
               competat
               plusquam
               alii
               cuiquam
               Episcopo
               extero
               ?
               Whether
               the
               Pope
               of
               Rome
               have
               of
               right
               any
               authority
               in
               the
               Realme
               of
               England
               ,
               more
               then
               any
               other
               forein
               Bishop
               hath
            
             )
             and
             that
             determination
             of
             theirs
             testified
             under
             their
             hands
             and
             scales
             ,
             and
             after
             by
             Act
             of
             Convocation
             subscribed
             by
             
             the
             Bishops
             and
             Clergy
             ,
             and
             confirmed
             by
             their
             
               corporal
               oaths
            
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             the
             like
             imposed
             by
             Act
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             35
             
               Hen.
               VIII
            
             .
             c.
             1.
             all
             this
             is
             looked
             on
             ,
             and
             condemn'd
             ,
             as
             an
             Act
             of
             Schisme
             in
             this
             Church
             and
             Nation
             ,
             in
             renouncing
             that
             power
             of
             S.
             
               Peters
               Successors
            
             placed
             over
             all
             Christians
             by
             Christ
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             This
             objection
             against
             us
             consisting
             of
             many
             branches
             ,
             every
             of
             which
             must
             be
             manifested
             or
             granted
             to
             have
             truth
             in
             it
             ,
             or
             else
             the
             objection
             will
             be
             of
             no
             force
             ,
             1.
             the
             matter
             of
             fact
             ,
             that
             thus
             it
             was
             in
             England
             ;
             2.
             the
             consequence
             of
             that
             fact
             ,
             that
             it
             were
             Schisme
             ,
             supposing
             these
             Successors
             of
             S.
             Peter
             were
             thus
             set
             over
             all
             Christians
             by
             Christ
             .
             3.
             the
             matter
             of
             fact
             again
             ,
             that
             S.
             
               Peters
               Successors
            
             were
             thus
             constituted
             
               Vniversal
               Pastors
            
             by
             Christ
             ;
             This
             again
             of
             two
             branches
             ,
             1.
             that
             S.
             Peter
             was
             so
             constituted
             ,
             2.
             that
             the
             power
             instated
             on
             S.
             Peter
             devolved
             on
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             ;
             I
             shall
             endevour
             to
             expedite
             this
             matter
             by
             granting
             ,
             and
             not
             requiring
             the
             pretenders
             farther
             to
             prove
             the
             two
             first
             branches
             ,
             and
             leave
             the
             issue
             
             of
             the
             debate
             to
             their
             manifesting
             the
             truth
             ,
             or
             our
             manifesting
             the
             falshood
             of
             (
             the
             last
             mentioned
             ,
             but
             indeed
             )
             the
             principal
             fundamental
             part
             of
             the
             contention
             ,
             as
             it
             consists
             of
             two
             branches
             ,
             one
             as
             it
             respects
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             the
             other
             as
             it
             respects
             his
             Successor
             in
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             ;
             wherein
             if
             the
             Romanists
             pretensions
             shall
             appear
             to
             have
             truth
             in
             them
             ,
             we
             must
             be
             acknowledged
             by
             breaking
             off
             from
             our
             submission
             to
             that
             See
             ,
             to
             be
             formally
             Schismaticks
             according
             to
             the
             grounds
             allready
             laid
             ,
             and
             acknowledged
             by
             us
             ;
             But
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             if
             their
             pretensions
             herein
             shall
             appear
             to
             be
             false
             ▪
             or
             unsufficiently
             proved
             and
             manifested
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             other
             branch
             of
             the
             argument
             ,
             be
             it
             never
             so
             true
             ,
             which
             can
             give
             the
             conclusion
             any
             authority
             with
             any
             pondering
             rational
             man
             ,
             it
             being
             in
             the
             power
             of
             any
             weak
             link
             to
             destroy
             the
             usefulnesse
             of
             the
             whole
             chain
             ,
             and
             consequent
             to
             the
             falsenesse
             ,
             or
             inevidence
             of
             any
             one
             proposition
             ,
             that
             the
             conclusion
             shall
             not
             be
             inferred
             by
             that
             arguing
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             And
             first
             for
             the
             pretension
             as
             far
             as
             it
             respects
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             and
             
             must
             be
             managed
             by
             evidences
             ,
             and
             so
             concluded
             either
             on
             one
             side
             or
             the
             other
             ,
             I
             shall
             begin
             with
             offering
             my
             evidences
             for
             the
             Negative
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5
             
             And
             first
             it
             is
             evident
             by
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             this
             Apostle
             was
             the
             Apostle
             of
             the
             circumcision
             ,
             or
             
               Jewes
               exclusively
            
             to
             the
             uncircumcision
             ,
             or
             Gentiles
             ,
             which
             were
             generally
             anothers
             Province
             ;
             By
             Apostle
             here
             I
             understand
             a
             Commissioner
             of
             Christs
             ,
             endued
             with
             authority
             by
             him
             ,
             and
             this
             Commission
             given
             to
             him
             ,
             as
             to
             all
             the
             other
             
               Apostles
               ,
               indefinitely
            
             ,
             and
             unlimitedly
             ,
             not
             restrained
             by
             Christs
             words
             to
             any
             particular
             Province
             ,
             but
             extending
             equally
             to
             the
             whole
             world
             ;
             what
             therefore
             is
             done
             in
             this
             kind
             is
             by
             Subsequent
             act
             of
             the
             Apostles
             themselves
             ,
             who
             are
             testified
             to
             have
             done
             that
             ,
             which
             it
             had
             been
             very
             unskilful
             ,
             and
             improvident
             ,
             and
             consequently
             unreasonable
             not
             to
             have
             done
             ,
             
               viz.
               distributed
            
             their
             Vniversal
             great
             Province
             inro
             several
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Act.
             1.25
             .
             distributions
             ,
             or
             Lots
             ,
             or
             
               lesser
               Provinces
            
             ,
             one
             or
             more
             to
             goe
             one
             way
             ,
             the
             other
             another
             ,
             which
             is
             there
             called
             by
             S.
             
               Peter
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               to
               go
               to
               
               his
               own
               ,
            
             or
             
               proper
               place
            
             ,
             or
             assignation
             ,
             for
             the
             witnessing
             the
             Resurrection
             ,
             and
             proclaiming
             the
             faith
             or
             Doctrine
             of
             Christ
             to
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             Now
             if
             the
             circumcision
             ,
             or
             
               Jewish
               Christians
            
             were
             peculiarly
             S.
             
               Peters
               Province
            
             ,
             the
             lot
             ,
             or
             division
             assigned
             unto
             him
             ,
             (
             agreeable
             unto
             which
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             both
             his
             preaching
             in
             the
             Acts
             is
             to
             the
             Jewes
             in
             Judaea
             and
             Samaria
             ,
             and
             his
             Epistles
             are
             both
             of
             them
             addressed
             to
             the
             Jewes
             of
             the
             dispersion
             ,
             and
             none
             else
             )
             then
             it
             is
             not
             imaginable
             ,
             how
             he
             should
             be
             the
             Vniversal
             ,
             or
             
               Supreme
               Pastor
            
             ,
             or
             Bishop
             of
             the
             whole
             world
             :
             For
             the
             Christians
             of
             that
             age
             of
             the
             world
             being
             either
             Jewes
             or
             Gentiles
             ,
             the
             Jewes
             again
             either
             those
             that
             remained
             in
             their
             countrey
             ,
             or
             those
             that
             were
             dispersed
             in
             other
             regions
             ,
             there
             was
             but
             one
             portion
             of
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             which
             can
             reasonably
             be
             placed
             under
             S.
             
               Peters
               Jurisdiction
            
             .
             The
             Jewes
             that
             were
             in
             Judaea
             were
             all
             immediately
             subject
             to
             the
             
               several
               Bishops
            
             in
             each
             city
             ,
             and
             all
             they
             to
             their
             
               Metropolitane
               ,
               James
            
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Jerusalem
             ;
             Of
             this
             James
             the
             brother
             (
             or
             
               neer
               kinsman
            
             )
             of
             Christ
             ,
             many
             
             a
             of
             the
             Ancients
             affirm
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             by
             Christ
             after
             his
             resurrection
             constituted
             Bishop
             there
             ;
             b
             others
             that
             it
             was
             done
             by
             Christ
             and
             his
             Apostles
             ;
             c
             others
             the
             more
             ancient
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             constituted
             him
             in
             that
             
               See
               ,
               Peter
               ,
               James
            
             ,
             and
             John
             ,
             the
             
               three
               most
               honoured
               by
               Christ
               ,
               conferring
               this
               honour
               upon
               him
               ,
            
             whereupon
             in
             this
             his
             See
             he
             is
             named
             
               before
               Peter
            
             and
             
               John
               ,
               Gal.
            
             2.9
             .
             and
             hath
             the
             Principal
             place
             in
             the
             Councel
             at
             Jerusalem
             ,
             where
             S.
             Peter
             is
             present
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             gives
             the
             
               Sentence
               ,
               Act.
            
             15.19
             .
             upon
             which
             the
             Rescript
             
             is
             grounded
             ,
             v.
             22.
             
             From
             all
             which
             as
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             the
             Jurisdiction
             in
             that
             Metropolis
             (
             which
             had
             extended
             very
             far
             among
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             not
             only
             to
             all
             Judaea
             ,
             but
             even
             to
             Syria
             and
             Cilicia
             and
             other
             regions
             ,
             saith
             Agrippa
             in
             a
             Philo
             ,
             as
             hath
             formerly
             been
             mentioned
             )
             belonged
             to
             James
             the
             Just
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             So
             it
             is
             as
             evident
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             by
             S.
             Peter
             alone
             intrusted
             to
             him
             (
             which
             might
             conclude
             some
             peculiar
             transcendent
             power
             of
             S.
             Peter
             there
             )
             but
             by
             S.
             James
             and
             S.
             John
             together
             with
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             which
             quite
             takes
             off
             all
             pretension
             of
             his
             to
             the
             
               singular
               Supremacy
            
             there
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             So
             again
             for
             the
             uncircumcision
             or
             
               Gentile
               Christians
            
             ,
             they
             were
             not
             S.
             
               Peter's
               Province
            
             but
             peculiarly
             S.
             Paul's
             (
             by
             S.
             Peter's
             own
             confession
             and
             acknowledgment
             Gal.
             2.7
             .
             )
             who
             is
             therefore
             styled
             the
             Apostle
             of
             the
             
               Gentiles
               ,
               Rom.
            
             11.13
             .
             and
             that
             without
             any
             commission
             received
             ,
             or
             
             consequently
             dependence
             from
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             as
             he
             declares
             and
             contests
             it
             ,
             Gal.
             1.12.17
             .
             having
             his
             
               assignation
               immediately
            
             from
             
               Christ
               ,
               v.
            
             16.
             
             Accordingly
             whensoever
             those
             
               two
               great
               Apostles
            
             came
             to
             the
             same
             city
             ,
             the
             one
             constantly
             applied
             himself
             to
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             received
             disciples
             of
             such
             ,
             formed
             them
             into
             a
             Church
             ,
             left
             them
             ,
             when
             he
             departed
             that
             region
             ,
             to
             be
             governed
             by
             some
             Bishop
             of
             his
             assignation
             :
             and
             the
             other
             in
             like
             manner
             did
             the
             same
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             Thus
             we
             know
             it
             was
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             where
             S.
             Peter
             converted
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             and
             S.
             Paul
             the
             Gentiles
             (
             and
             certainly
             S.
             Paul
             no
             way
             Subordinate
             ,
             or
             dependent
             on
             him
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             his
             behaviour
             toward
             him
             avowed
             ,
             Gal.
             2.11
             .
             )
             and
             acordingly
             in
             Ignatius
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Magnesians
             we
             read
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             founded
             by
             S.
             Peter
             and
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             not
             by
             one
             ,
             or
             other
             ,
             but
             by
             both
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             ancient
             ,
             if
             not
             
               Ignatian
               Epistle
            
             to
             the
             Antiochians
             ,
             You
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               have
               been
               the
               disciples
               of
               Peter
               and
               Paul
               ,
            
             i.
             e.
             converted
             and
             ruled
             by
             them
             ,
             
             the
             Jewish
             part
             by
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             Gentile
             by
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             and
             Syria
             (
             of
             which
             Antioch
             was
             the
             
               chief
               city
            
             )
             and
             Cilicia
             ,
             is
             it
             ,
             to
             which
             peculiarly
             the
             decrees
             of
             the
             Councel
             at
             Jerusalem
             are
             sent
             ,
             Act.
             15.23
             .
             and
             inscribed
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               To
               the
               brethren
               at
               Antioch
               —
               those
               of
               the
               Gentiles
            
             ]
             and
             that
             separately
             from
             the
             
               Jewish
               Church
            
             in
             that
             city
             or
             region
             ,
             as
             is
             evident
             both
             by
             the
             contents
             of
             that
             Rescript
             ,
             or
             
               Decretal
               Epistle
            
             ,
             in
             which
             only
             the
             Gentiles
             were
             concerned
             ,
             v.
             28
             ,
             29.
             and
             also
             by
             that
             which
             we
             read
             of
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Jewish
               proselytes
               ,
               Gal.
            
             2.11
             .
             that
             they
             withdrew
             from
             all
             communion
             and
             Society
             with
             the
             
               Gentile
               Christians
            
             ,
             upon
             which
             S.
             
               Paul
               reproved
            
             him
             
               publickly
               v.
            
             12.
             
             According
             to
             this
             condition
             of
             disparate
             ,
             not
             
               subordinate
               Churches
            
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             writer
             of
             the
             
               Apostolical
               constitutions
            
             tells
             us
             ,
             that
             Euodius
             and
             Ignatius
             at
             the
             same
             time
             sate
             Bishops
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             one
             succeeding
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             the
             other
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             one
             in
             the
             Jewish
             ,
             the
             other
             in
             the
             
               Gentile
               
               congregation
            
             ,
             and
             so
             continued
             a
             while
             ,
             till
             both
             the
             Churches
             (
             the
             
               wall
               of
               Separation
            
             being
             by
             compliance
             and
             
               Christian
               Charity
            
             removed
             )
             joined
             ,
             and
             united
             together
             under
             Ignatius
             ,
             who
             therefore
             as
             by
             a
             Origen
             and
             b
             Eusebius
             he
             is
             called
             the
             Second
             ,
             so
             by
             S.
             Hierome
             is
             called
             the
             
               third
               Bishop
            
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             and
             yet
             as
             truly
             by
             c
             Athanasius
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             said
             to
             be
             
               constituted
               Bishop
               after
               the
               Apostles
            
             ,
             and
             by
             d
             S.
             Chrysostome
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             )
             
               that
               the
               blessed
               Apostles
               hands
               were
               laid
               upon
               him
               ,
            
             whil'st
             yet
             Theodoret
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             affirms
             him
             to
             have
             received
             the
             
               Archisacerdotal
               honour
               from
               the
               hands
               of
            
             S.
             Peter
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             The
             same
             is
             as
             evident
             at
             Rome
             where
             these
             two
             great
             Apostles
             met
             again
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             them
             erected
             and
             managed
             a
             Church
             ,
             S.
             
               Peter
               of
               Jewes
            
             ,
             S.
             
               Paul
               of
               Gentiles
            
             .
             So
             saith
             e
             S.
             
               Irenaeus
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               —
               the
               blessed
               Apostles
               founded
               and
               built
               the
               Church
               there
            
             ;
             and
             f
             Epiphanius
             more
             expressely
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Peter
               and
               Paul
               were
               Apostles
               and
               Bishops
               in
               Rome
               :
            
             So
             the
             Inscription
             on
             their
             Tombes
             ,
             which
             ,
             saith
             a
             Eusebius
             ,
             continued
             to
             his
             time
             ,
             mentions
             them
             both
             as
             founders
             of
             that
             Church
             .
             So
             Gaius
             an
             Ecclesiastick
             writer
             of
             great
             antiquity
             ,
             coaetaneous
             to
             
               Pope
               Zephyrynus
            
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             monuments
             of
             S.
             Peter
             and
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             calls
             them
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               monuments
               of
               them
               that
               founded
               that
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             So
             Dionysius
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Corinth
            
             ,
             who
             lived
             about
             20
             years
             after
             their
             death
             ,
             affirms
             both
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             and
             of
             Corinth
             ,
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               that
               it
               was
            
             (
             each
             of
             them
             )
             
               the
               plantation
               of
               Peter
               and
               Paul
            
             ;
             And
             d
             
               Prosper
               ,
               Petrus
               &
               Paulus
               Apostoli
               in
               urbe
               Româ
               —
               Peter
               and
               Paul
               the
               Apostles
               consecrated
               or
               constituted
               a
               Church
               in
               the
               city
               of
               Rome
               .
            
             And
             the
             very
             Seales
             of
             Popes
             are
             an
             irrefragable
             evidence
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             set
             down
             by
             
               Mathew
               Paris
            
             in
             the
             year
             of
             our
             Lord
             1237.
             
             
               In
               bullâ
               Domini
               Papae
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               stat
               imago
               Pauli
               à
               dextris
               crucis
               in
               medio
               
               bullae
               figuratae
               ,
               &
               Petri
               à
               sinistris
               ;
               In
               the
               Bull
               of
               the
               Pope
               stands
               the
               image
               of
               S.
               Paul
               on
               the
               right
               hand
               of
               the
               Crosse
               ,
               which
               is
               graven
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               Seal
               ,
               and
               the
               image
               of
               S.
               Peter
               on
               the
               left
               hand
            
             ;
             and
             this
             only
             account
             given
             for
             S.
             Pauls
             having
             the
             nobler
             place
             
               (
               Quia
               Paulus
               credidit
               in
               Christum
               quem
               non
               vidit
               ,
               à
               dextris
               figuratur
               )
               because
               he
               believed
               on
               Christ
               without
               seeing
               him
            
             (
             here
             on
             earth
             )
             And
             all
             this
             very
             agreeable
             to
             the
             story
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             as
             (
             according
             to
             the
             brevity
             of
             the
             relations
             there
             made
             )
             it
             only
             sets
             down
             S.
             Peter
             to
             be
             the
             Apostle
             of
             the
             circumcision
             (
             and
             of
             his
             being
             so
             at
             Rome
             we
             make
             no
             question
             )
             So
             it
             affirms
             of
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             that
             he
             preached
             at
             Rome
             in
             his
             
               own
               hired
               house
               ,
               receiving
               them
               which
               came
               unto
               him
               ,
               Act.
            
             28.30
             .
             which
             will
             most
             fitly
             be
             applied
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             of
             that
             city
             ,
             the
             Jewes
             having
             solemnly
             departed
             from
             him
             v.
             29.
             
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             Accordingly
             in
             
               Ignatius
               ,
               Ep.
               ad
               Trall
            
             .
             we
             read
             of
             Linus
             and
             Clemens
             ,
             that
             one
             was
             S.
             Paul's
             ,
             the
             other
             S.
             
               Peter's
               Deacon
            
             ,
             both
             which
             afterward
             succeeded
             them
             in
             the
             
               Episcopal
               
               chaire
               ,
               Linus
            
             being
             constituted
             Bishop
             of
             the
             
               Gentile
               ,
               Clemens
            
             of
             the
             
               Jewish
               Christians
            
             there
             ;
             And
             hence
             growes
             (
             unquestionably
             )
             that
             variety
             ,
             or
             difference
             observed
             among
             writers
             ,
             some
             making
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             others
             S.
             Paul
             the
             founder
             of
             that
             Church
             ,
             but
             others
             (
             as
             hath
             been
             shewed
             )
             both
             of
             them
             ;
             some
             making
             Clemens
             ,
             others
             Linus
             the
             
               first
               Bishop
            
             after
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             both
             affirmers
             speaking
             the
             truth
             ,
             with
             this
             Scholion
             to
             interpret
             them
             :
             Linus
             was
             the
             
               first
               Bishop
            
             of
             the
             
               Gentile
               Christians
            
             ,
             after
             S.
             
               Paul
               ;
               Clemens
            
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Jewish
             after
             S.
             Peter
             ;
             and
             after
             Linus
             his
             death
             ,
             Cletus
             (
             or
             Anacletus
             )
             succeeding
             him
             ,
             and
             dying
             also
             ,
             both
             congregations
             were
             at
             length
             joyned
             in
             one
             ,
             under
             Clemens
             ;
             by
             which
             one
             clew
             I
             suppose
             it
             easie
             to
             extricate
             the
             Reader
             out
             of
             the
             mazes
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             
               ancient
               writers
            
             may
             lead
             him
             ,
             in
             rehearsing
             the
             
               first
               Bishops
            
             of
             Rome
             so
             very
             diversly
             ,
             but
             this
             is
             not
             a
             place
             to
             insist
             on
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             12.
             
             By
             all
             which
             it
             appears
             that
             even
             in
             those
             Churches
             ,
             whereof
             S.
             Peter
             is
             acknowledged
             the
             founder
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             yet
             he
             
             cannot
             be
             deemed
             the
             
               sole
               founder
            
             ,
             but
             coequal
             to
             him
             S.
             Paul
             of
             the
             Gentile
             ,
             as
             he
             of
             the
             
               Jewish
               Proselytes
            
             :
             and
             if
             the
             sole
             government
             of
             that
             Church
             be
             devolved
             to
             the
             original
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             found
             to
             have
             begun
             in
             Clemens
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             union
             of
             the
             Jewish
             and
             Gentile
             congregations
             there
             was
             first
             made
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             S.
             Peter
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             13.
             
             But
             then
             for
             another
             great
             part
             of
             the
             
               Christian
               world
            
             ,
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             S.
             Peter
             had
             never
             to
             doe
             either
             mediately
             ,
             or
             immediately
             in
             the
             planting
             ,
             or
             governing
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             consequently
             that
             from
             him
             that
             power
             can
             never
             descend
             to
             any
             other
             .
             Not
             to
             mention
             the
             travailes
             and
             labours
             ,
             and
             plantations
             of
             the
             other
             Apostles
             ;
             which
             certainly
             had
             each
             their
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             consequently
             their
             Provinces
             by
             Apostolical
             joynt
             consent
             assigned
             them
             Act.
             1.
             (
             though
             that
             
               short
               History
            
             written
             by
             S.
             Luke
             ,
             S.
             Paul's
             attendant
             ,
             mention
             them
             not
             )
             I
             shall
             only
             insist
             on
             the
             
               beloved
               Disciple
            
             his
             fellow-Apostle
             of
             the
             Circumcision
             ,
             and
             that
             
               abundant
               Labourer
               S.
               Paul.
            
             
          
           
           
             §
             .
             14.
             
             
             For
             S.
             John
             ,
             who
             had
             the
             favour
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             dignity
             of
             place
             before
             all
             others
             in
             Christ's
             life
             time
             ,
             even
             before
             S.
             Peter
             himself
             (
             which
             is
             the
             plain
             meaning
             of
             his
             style
             of
             the
             
               beloved
               Disciple
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               leaning
               on
               his
               breast
               at
               supper
               Joh.
            
             21.20
             .
             
               his
               having
               the
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               the
               first
               place
               next
               to
               Christ
               ,
            
             as
             being
             
               in
               Abrahams
               bosome
            
             plainly
             signifies
             being
             in
             dignity
             of
             place
             next
             to
             the
             
               father
               of
               the
               faithful
            
             )
             't
             is
             evident
             that
             he
             is
             one
             of
             those
             that
             by
             agreement
             went
             to
             the
             Circumcision
             ,
             was
             assigned
             the
             Jewes
             
             for
             his
             Province
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             and
             consequently
             he
             had
             the
             converting
             ,
             and
             then
             governing
             of
             all
             the
             converted
             Jewes
             of
             that
             
               Lydian
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             placing
             Bishops
             over
             them
             ,
             as
             a
             
               Clemens
               Alexandrinus
            
             ,
             and
             b
             Eusebius
             ,
             and
             c
             Prosper
             ,
             and
             others
             tell
             us
             ;
             and
             the
             d
             Author
             of
             the
             Martyrdome
             of
             Timothy
             saith
             of
             him
             ,
             that
             being
             
               returned
               from
               his
               banishment
               by
               Nerva's
               decree
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               —
               he
               placed
               his
               seat
               of
               residence
               
               in
               Ephesus
               ,
               and
               having
               seven
               Bishops
               with
               him
               he
               undertook
               the
               care
               of
               that
               Metropolis
               ,
            
             that
             is
             in
             effect
             ,
             or
             by
             interpretation
             ,
             of
             
               all
               Asia
            
             ,
             which
             was
             under
             that
             
               prime
               Metropolis
            
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             extended
             to
             the
             
               Jewish
               Christians
            
             there
             .
          
           
             
             §
             .
             15.
             
             But
             then
             as
             before
             was
             said
             of
             the
             several
             Churches
             and
             Bishops
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             dispersed
             Jewes
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             Gentiles
             ;
             so
             it
             is
             evident
             that
             through
             all
             this
             Asia
             (
             the
             Lydian
             or
             Proconsular
             )
             the
             faith
             was
             by
             S.
             Paul
             planted
             among
             the
             Gentile
             part
             ,
             and
             by
             him
             S.
             Timothy
             constituted
             Bishop
             there
             :
             and
             so
             saith
             S.
             Chrysostome
             ,
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               a
               whole
               intire
               nation
               ,
               that
               of
               Asia
               was
               intrusted
               to
               him
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             16.
             
             Where
             I
             shall
             demand
             of
             any
             man
             of
             the
             Romish
             pretensions
             ,
             or
             perswasion
             ,
             what
             can
             be
             said
             ,
             in
             any
             degree
             probably
             ,
             for
             
               S.
               Peters
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             ,
             whilst
             he
             lived
             ,
             over
             this
             Asia
             ,
             whose
             
               seven
               Metropoles
            
             (
             and
             sure
             there
             were
             
               inferior
               Churches
            
             ,
             or
             Episcopal
             Sees
             under
             them
             )
             are
             so
             early
             famous
             ,
             being
             honoured
             with
             Christs-Epistle
             to
             them
             
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ;
             was
             S.
             Peter
             the
             
               supreme
               Pastor
            
             of
             these
             Churches
             ?
             had
             he
             any
             ,
             or
             did
             he
             ever
             exercise
             ,
             or
             pretend
             any
             Jurisdiction
             over
             them
             ?
             was
             not
             all
             the
             Jewish
             part
             of
             that
             Province
             ultimately
             under
             S.
             John
             ?
             and
             the
             Gentile
             part
             under
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             and
             S.
             Timothy
             constituted
             ,
             and
             commissionated
             by
             him
             ?
             Doth
             not
             S.
             Paul
             give
             him
             full
             instructions
             (
             and
             such
             as
             no
             other
             Apostle
             could
             countermand
             ,
             or
             interpose
             in
             them
             )
             leaving
             no
             other
             appeal
             or
             place
             of
             application
             for
             farther
             directions
             ,
             save
             only
             to
             himself
             ,
             when
             he
             shall
             
               come
               to
               him
            
             ,
             1
             Tim.
             3.14
             ,
             15.
             
             Did
             not
             S.
             Paul
             by
             his
             own
             single
             power
             delegate
             that
             Province
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             seat
             him
             there
             ?
             (
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               I
               exhorted
            
             or
             
               appointed
               thee
               ,
               when
               I
               went
               to
               Macedonia
               ,
            
             1
             Tim.
             1.3
             .
             )
             and
             may
             it
             not
             as
             reasonably
             be
             said
             that
             S.
             Peter
             was
             with
             him
             in
             his
             journey
             to
             Macedonia
             ,
             as
             that
             he
             joyned
             with
             him
             in
             giving
             that
             Commission
             to
             Timothy
             ?
          
           
             §
             .
             17.
             
             
             And
             so
             likewise
             of
             Titus
             in
             Crete
             ,
             was
             he
             not
             by
             S.
             Paul
             peculiarly
             left
             in
             Crete
             ,
             and
             constituted
             Primate
             there
             ?
             Is
             it
             imaginable
             
             that
             under
             Christ
             there
             could
             be
             any
             head
             of
             that
             Church
             of
             that
             whole
             Island
             ,
             save
             only
             S.
             Paul
             ?
          
           
             §
             .
             18.
             
             
             The
             same
             may
             certainly
             be
             said
             of
             all
             the
             
               Gentile
               Churches
            
             in
             all
             other
             Islands
             ,
             and
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             consequently
             in
             this
             of
             Britannie
             ,
             wherein
             our
             present
             debate
             is
             terminated
             :
             And
             therefore
             if
             that
             of
             *
             
               Simeon
               Metaphrastes
            
             should
             be
             thought
             to
             have
             truth
             in
             it
             ,
             that
             S.
             Peter
             was
             in
             Britannie
             some
             time
             and
             baptized
             many
             into
             the
             faith
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             
               constituted
               Churches
               ,
               ordaining
               Bishops
            
             and
             Presbyters
             and
             Deacons
             in
             the
             12.
             of
             Nero
             ,
             in
             all
             reason
             it
             must
             be
             extended
             no
             farther
             then
             S.
             
               Peters
               line
            
             ,
             as
             he
             was
             the
             Apostle
             of
             the
             Circumcision
             ,
             i.
             e.
             to
             the
             Jewes
             that
             might
             at
             that
             time
             be
             dispersed
             here
             ,
             and
             so
             not
             prejudge
             the
             other
             more
             authentick
             relations
             ,
             of
             Joseph
             of
             Arimathea
             or
             
               Simon
               Zelotes
            
             having
             planted
             the
             faith
             in
             this
             Island
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             19.
             
             This
             I
             suppose
             is
             one
             competent
             proof
             of
             the
             Negative
             ,
             as
             it
             respects
             the
             person
             of
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             not
             (
             could
             not
             be
             ,
             as
             things
             stood
             with
             him
             )
             
               Vniversal
               Pastor
            
             of
             the
             
               whole
               Church
            
             ,
             constituted
             by
             Christ
             .
             And
             accordingly
             we
             see
             in
             Prosper
             disputing
             against
             hereticks
             :
             which
             divide
             from
             the
             Church
             ,
             he
             expresses
             it
             by
             
               relictâ
               pace
               communionis
            
             ,
             
             
               &
               panis
               unius
               Dei
               &
               Apostolorum
               ,
               that
               they
               leave
               the
               Communion
               of
               Christ
               and
               his
               Apostles
            
             in
             the
             plural
             ,
             and
             adds
             
               cum
               in
               ipsâ
               Hierusalem
               Jacobus
               —
               Joannes
               apud
               Ephesum
               ,
               Andreas
               &
               caeteri
               per
               totam
               Asiam
               ,
               Petrus
               &
               Paulus
               Apostoli
               in
               urbe
               Româ
               ,
               Gentium
               Ecclesiam
               pacatam
               unámque
               posteris
               tradentes
               ,
               ex
               Dominicâ
               pactione
               sacrarunt
               ,
            
             that
             James
             in
             
               Jerusalem
               ,
               John
               at
               Ephesus
               ,
               Andrew
               and
               the
               rest
               through
               all
               Asia
               ,
               Peter
               and
               Paul
               at
               Rome
               consecrated
               the
               Church
               of
               the
               nations
               .
            
             Whereas
             the
             Church
             had
             the
             several
             Apostles
             for
             the
             founders
             (
             and
             those
             independent
             one
             from
             the
             other
             )
             So
             the
             unity
             from
             which
             hereticks
             ,
             and
             schismaticks
             depart
             ,
             is
             said
             to
             have
             been
             founded
             equally
             in
             each
             of
             them
             ,
             in
             John
             
             and
             James
             and
             Andrew
             and
             others
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             in
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             nay
             at
             Rome
             ,
             not
             in
             S.
             Peter
             alone
             ,
             but
             in
             him
             and
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             together
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             20.
             
             
             In
             the
             next
             place
             another
             evidence
             we
             may
             have
             of
             this
             (
             in
             reference
             again
             to
             S.
             Peters
             person
             )
             from
             that
             which
             is
             visible
             in
             the
             donation
             of
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Keyes
             set
             down
             in
             Scripture
             .
             This
             
               power
               Mat.
            
             16.19
             .
             is
             promised
             to
             S.
             
               Peter
               ,
               [
               I
               will
               give
               unto
               thee
               the
               keyes
               of
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               whatsoever
               thou
               shalt
               bind
               on
               earth
               shall
               be
               bound
               in
               heaven
            
             —
             ]
             But
             to
             him
             that
             from
             hence
             pretends
             this
             Donative
             and
             consequent
             power
             ,
             as
             a
             peculiarity
             and
             inclosure
             of
             S.
             Peters
             ,
             these
             considerations
             will
             be
             of
             force
             to
             supersede
             his
             conclusion
             ,
             1.
             
             That
             these
             words
             here
             set
             down
             by
             S.
             Matthew
             ,
             c.
             16.
             are
             not
             the
             Instrument
             of
             
               Christs
               conveyance
            
             ,
             the
             words
             of
             his
             commission
             ,
             but
             those
             
               other
               Joh.
            
             20.21
             .
             
               As
               my
               Father
               hath
               sent
               me
               ,
            
             
             
               so
               send
               I
               you
            
             ,
             upon
             which
             words
             it
             is
             added
             ,
             he
             
               breathed
               on
               them
               ,
               and
               said
               ,
               Receive
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               ,
               Whose
               sins
               you
               remit
               ,
               they
               are
               remitted
            
             —
             And
             these
             (
             as
             also
             those
             Mat.
             28.19
             .
             which
             are
             a
             
             repetition
             much
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             )
             are
             delivered
             in
             common
             ,
             and
             equally
             to
             all
             ,
             and
             every
             of
             the
             
               eleven
               Apostles
            
             ,
             as
             is
             evident
             by
             the
             plural
             style
             throughout
             that
             Commission
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             21.
             
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             words
             Mat.
             16.
             are
             only
             a
             promise
             in
             the
             future
             ,
             what
             Christ
             will
             afterward
             do
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             donation
             there
             set
             down
             only
             by
             way
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             anticipation
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             making
             this
             promise
             to
             him
             peculiarly
             ,
             seem
             to
             make
             any
             thing
             for
             him
             ,
             then
             the
             repetition
             of
             that
             
               promise
               ,
               Mat.
            
             18.18
             .
             which
             is
             made
             to
             all
             the
             
               Apostles
               indefinitely
            
             will
             take
             off
             that
             appearance
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               I
               say
               unto
               you
            
             (
             to
             all
             of
             them
             equally
             and
             without
             any
             peculiarity
             of
             restriction
             )
             
               whatsoever
               ye
               shall
               bind
               &c.
            
             
             The
             applying
             the
             words
             particularly
             to
             S.
             Peter
             hath
             one
             special
             energie
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             concludes
             that
             the
             Ecclesiastical
             power
             of
             oeconomy
             or
             stewardship
             in
             
               Christ's
               house
            
             (
             of
             which
             the
             keyes
             are
             the
             
               token
               Isa
            
             .
             22.21
             .
             )
             belongs
             to
             single
             persons
             ,
             such
             as
             S.
             Peter
             was
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             to
             Consistories
             ,
             or
             assemblies
             ,
             that
             whatsoever
             S.
             Peter
             acted
             by
             virtue
             of
             Christs
             power
             thus
             
             promised
             ,
             he
             should
             be
             fully
             able
             to
             
               act
               himself
            
             ,
             without
             the
             conjunction
             of
             any
             other
             ,
             and
             that
             what
             he
             thus
             did
             (
             
               clave
               non
               errante
            
             )
             no
             one
             (
             or
             more
             men
             )
             
               on
               earth
            
             could
             rescind
             
               without
               him
            
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             just
             ground
             of
             placing
             the
             
               power
               Ecclesiastical
            
             in
             
               Single
               persons
            
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             Communities
             ,
             in
             the
             Prelate
             of
             
               each
               Church
            
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             Presbytery
             .
             But
             still
             this
             is
             no
             confining
             of
             this
             power
             to
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             any
             more
             then
             to
             any
             other
             
               single
               Apostle
            
             ,
             who
             had
             this
             power
             as
             distinctly
             promised
             to
             each
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             here
             S.
             Peter
             is
             pretended
             ,
             and
             acknowledged
             to
             have
             ;
             To
             which
             purpose
             ,
             as
             the
             words
             of
             Scripture
             are
             most
             clear
             Mat.
             18.18
             .
             (
             and
             accordingly
             Mat.
             19.
             the
             promise
             is
             again
             made
             of
             
               twelve
               thrones
            
             for
             
               each
               Apostle
            
             to
             sit
             on
             one
             ,
             to
             judge
             ,
             i.
             e.
             to
             rule
             ,
             or
             preside
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             when
             that
             promise
             was
             finally
             performed
             in
             the
             descent
             of
             the
             
               Spirit
               ,
               Act.
            
             2.
             the
             fire
             that
             represented
             that
             Spirit
             was
             divided
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               sat
               upon
               every
               one
               of
               them
               ,
            
             without
             any
             peculiar
             mark
             allowed
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             and
             
               they
               were
               all
               filled
               with
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               ,
            
             and
             so
             this
             
               promise
               equally
               performed
            
             ,
             
             as
             it
             was
             made
             ,
             to
             all
             )
             so
             is
             this
             exactly
             the
             notion
             ,
             which
             the
             
               ancient
               Fathers
            
             of
             the
             Church
             appear
             to
             have
             had
             of
             them
             ;
             
             Thus
             Theophylact
             according
             to
             S.
             Chrysostomes
             sense
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Though
               the
               words
               [
               I
               will
               give
               thee
               ]
               were
               delivered
               to
               S.
               Peter
               alone
               ,
               yet
               the
               power
               hath
               been
               conferred
               on
               all
               the
               Apostles
               .
            
             
             S.
             Cyprian
             hath
             an
             eminent
             place
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             
               Dominus
               noster
               —
               Episcopi
               honorem
               &
               Ecclesiae
               suae
               rationem
               disponens
               in
               Evangelio
               loquitur
               ,
               &
               dicit
               Petro
               ,
               Ego
               tibi
               dice
               ,
               Quia
               tu
               es
               Petrus
               ,
               &
               tibi
               dabo
               claves
               —
               Inde
               per
               temporum
               &
               successionum
               vices
               Episcoporum
               ordinatio
               &
               Ecclesiae
               ratio
               decurrit
               ,
               ut
               Ecclesia
               super
               Episcopos
               constituatur
               ,
               &
               omnis
               actus
               Ecclesiae
               per
               eosdem
               gubernetur
               ,
               Christ
               meaning
               to
               set
               down
               the
               way
               of
               ordering
               his
               Church
               ,
               saith
               unto
               Peter
               ,
               I
               will
               give
               thee
               the
               keyes
               —
               From
               this
               promise
               of
               his
               ,
               the
               ordination
               of
               Bishops
               and
               course
               of
               the
               Church
               hath
               continued
               by
               all
               successions
               and
               vicissitudes
               ,
               So
               that
               the
               Church
               is
               built
               upon
               Bishops
            
             (
             in
             the
             
               plural
               )
               and
               every
               Ecclesiastick
               act
               is
               governed
               by
               them
               .
            
             
             So
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             
             
               Claves
               illas
               regni
               Coelorum
               in
               beato
               Petro
               cuncti
               suscepimus
               Sacerdotes
               ,
               All
               we
               Bishops
               have
               in
               S.
               Peter
               received
               those
               keyes
               of
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heavens
               .
            
             
             And
             accordingly
             S.
             Athanasius
             mentions
             the
             office
             of
             Bishop
             as
             one
             of
             those
             things
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               which
               Christ
               effigiated
               or
               formed
               in
               or
               by
               the
               Apostles
            
             ;
             And
             S.
             Basil
             the
             great
             calls
             
               Episcopacy
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               the
               Presidency
               of
               the
               Apostles
               ,
            
             the
             very
             same
             ,
             that
             Christ
             bestowed
             upon
             all
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             on
             one
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             23.
             
             By
             all
             which
             it
             is
             evident
             again
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             which
             
               Christs
               commission
            
             instated
             on
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             was
             in
             like
             manner
             intrusted
             to
             every
             other
             
               single
               Apostle
            
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             consequently
             that
             this
             of
             
               universal
               Pastor
            
             was
             no
             personal
             privilege
             ,
             or
             peculiarity
             of
             S.
             Peters
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             24.
             
             
             Thirdly
             ,
             that
             argument
             which
             is
             taken
             by
             learned
             Romanists
             from
             the
             name
             of
             Peter
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             a
             Rock
             or
             
               foundation
               stone
            
             ]
             bestowed
             on
             him
             by
             Christ
             ,
             as
             if
             that
             were
             sufficient
             to
             found
             this
             pretended
             Supremacy
             ,
             is
             presently
             evacuated
             ,
             and
             
             retorted
             on
             the
             pretenders
             ,
             when
             't
             is
             remembred
             1.
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             directly
             the
             same
             ,
             signifies
             vulgarly
             
               a
               stone
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             in
             
               Homers
               Iliad
            
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             )
             and
             of
             it self
             denotes
             no
             more
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             
               context
               ,
               Mat.
            
             16.18
             .
             being
             applied
             to
             a
             building
             must
             needs
             signifie
             a
             
               foundation
               stone
            
             ;
             and
             then
             2.
             that
             all
             the
             12
             Apostles
             are
             in
             like
             manner
             (
             and
             not
             
               he
               only
            
             ,
             or
             above
             any
             other
             )
             styled
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               twelve
               foundations
               Apoc.
            
             21.14
             .
             each
             of
             which
             stones
             having
             the
             name
             of
             an
             Apostle
             on
             it
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             power
             ,
             and
             dignity
             that
             belonged
             to
             every
             one
             ,
             is
             severally
             compared
             to
             a
             
               precious
               stone
            
             ;
             And
             it
             being
             there
             in
             vision
             apparent
             ,
             that
             the
             wall
             of
             the
             city
             ,
             i.
             e.
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             being
             measured
             exactly
             ,
             and
             found
             to
             be
             an
             
               hundred
               fourty
               four
            
             ,
             i.
             e.
             
               twelve
               times
               twelve
               cubits
            
             ,
             't
             is
             evident
             that
             that
             mensuration
             assignes
             an
             equal
             proportion
             whether
             of
             power
             or
             province
             to
             all
             and
             every
             of
             the
             Apostles
             which
             is
             again
             a
             prejudice
             to
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             of
             any
             one
             of
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             The
             Evidences
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             succeeding
             S.
             Peter
             examined
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             
             FRom
             this
             argument
             of
             the
             pretenders
             as
             it
             respects
             S.
             
               Peters
               person
            
             ,
             and
             hath
             thus
             been
             manifested
             to
             be
             utterly
             incompetent
             to
             inferre
             the
             designed
             conclusion
             ,
             It
             is
             now
             very
             easie
             ,
             but
             withall
             very
             unnecessary
             to
             proceed
             to
             the
             other
             part
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             it
             concerns
             S.
             
               Peters
               successors
            
             in
             his
             Episcopal
             ,
             or
             (
             which
             is
             all
             one
             as
             to
             this
             matter
             )
             his
             Apostolical
             seat
             ,
             and
             power
             at
             Rome
             ,
             For
             certainly
             what
             he
             had
             not
             himself
             ,
             he
             cannot
             devolve
             to
             any
             of
             his
             successors
             upon
             that
             one
             skore
             of
             succeeding
             him
             ,
             and
             therefore
             as
             this
             of
             S.
             
               Peters
               personal
            
             power
             ,
             and
             eminence
             is
             the
             principal
             ,
             So
             it
             is
             in
             effect
             the
             only
             ground
             of
             the
             Romanists
             pretension
             ,
             this
             other
             of
             derivative
             power
             in
             his
             successor
             ,
             being
             like
             water
             that
             flowes
             from
             a
             spring
             ,
             apt
             to
             ascend
             no
             higher
             ,
             then
             the
             fountain
             stood
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             again
             think
             fit
             to
             remind
             the
             Romanist
             ,
             and
             peremptorily
             
             to
             insist
             on
             this
             exception
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             cannot
             make
             good
             S.
             
               Peters
               Oecumenical
            
             power
             ,
             and
             Pastorship
             over
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             from
             the
             donation
             of
             Christ
             (
             which
             I
             suppose
             hath
             been
             evidenced
             he
             cannot
             do
             ,
             and
             for
             any
             proofs
             made
             use
             of
             by
             any
             to
             that
             purpose
             ,
             and
             drawn
             either
             from
             
               Feed
               my
               sheep
            
             ,
             and
             lambs
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             mention
             of
             the
             
               two
               swords
            
             ,
             or
             from
             
               Thou
               art
               Peter
            
             —
             they
             have
             so
             little
             apparence
             of
             strength
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             have
             so
             often
             been
             answered
             by
             those
             of
             our
             perswasion
             ,
             that
             I
             cannot
             think
             it
             useful
             ,
             or
             seasonable
             to
             descend
             to
             any
             farther
             survey
             of
             them
             )
             his
             other
             pretensions
             are
             at
             an
             end
             for
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             of
             the
             Pope
             his
             successor
             ,
             whose
             power
             ,
             and
             authority
             over
             all
             other
             Bishops
             cannot
             farther
             be
             extended
             (
             upon
             this
             account
             of
             succession
             )
             then
             S.
             Peter's
             was
             over
             all
             other
             Apostles
             ,
             the
             several
             Bishops
             of
             the
             world
             
               holding
               from
            
             (
             as
             succeeding
             )
             some
             Apostle
             or
             other
             ,
             as
             certainly
             as
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             can
             by
             any
             be
             supposed
             to
             
               succeed
               S.
               Pe-Peter
            
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             of
             *
             
               Tertullian
               ,
               Sicut
               Smyrnaeorum
               Ecclesia
               Polycarpum
               
               à
               Joanne
               collocatum
               refert
               ,
               Sicut
               Romanorum
               Clementem
               à
               Petro
               ordinatum
               edit
               ,
               perinde
               utique
               &
               caeterae
               exhibent
               quos
               ab
               Apostolis
               in
               Episcopatum
               constitutos
               Apostolici
               seminis
               traduces
               habent
               ,
               As
               the
               records
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Smyrna
               deduce
               Polycarp
               their
               Bishop
               from
               S.
               John
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               relates
               that
               Clement
               (
               their
               Bishop
               )
               was
               ordained
               by
               S.
               Peter
               ,
               in
               like
               manner
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Churches
               shew
               us
               the
               Bishops
               which
               they
               have
               had
               constituted
               by
               the
               Apostles
               ,
               and
               who
               have
               brought
               down
               and
               derived
               the
               Apostolick
               seed
               unto
               them
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             What
             therefore
             I
             shall
             now
             adde
             in
             return
             to
             the
             
               second
               branch
            
             of
             this
             argument
             ,
             concerning
             the
             power
             of
             S.
             
               Peters
               successor
            
             ,
             as
             such
             ,
             will
             be
             perfectly
             
               ex
               abundanti
               ,
               more
               then
            
             needs
             ,
             and
             so
             I
             desire
             it
             may
             be
             looked
             on
             by
             the
             reader
             ,
             whose
             curiosity
             perhaps
             may
             require
             farther
             satisfaction
             ,
             when
             his
             reason
             doth
             not
             ,
             and
             in
             compliance
             therewith
             I
             shall
             propose
             these
             few
             considerations
             .
             *
             First
             whether
             S.
             Peter
             did
             not
             as
             truly
             plant
             a
             Church
             of
             
               Jewish
               believers
            
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             and
             leave
             a
             
               successor
               
               Bishop
            
             there
             ,
             as
             at
             Rome
             he
             is
             supposed
             to
             have
             done
             ?
             2.
             
             Whether
             this
             were
             not
             done
             by
             him
             ,
             before
             ever
             he
             came
             to
             Rome
             ?
             3.
             
             Whether
             the
             Concession
             of
             these
             two
             unquestioned
             matters
             of
             fact
             ▪
             doe
             not
             devolve
             all
             power
             ,
             and
             Jurisdiction
             on
             the
             Bishop
             of
             
               Antioch
               S.
               Peters
               successor
            
             there
             ,
             which
             by
             that
             tenure
             and
             claim
             of
             succession
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             can
             be
             pretended
             to
             by
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               ,
               S.
               Peters
               successor
            
             also
             ?
             Nay
             ,
             Whether
             the
             right
             of
             Primogeniture
             be
             not
             so
             much
             more
             considerable
             on
             this
             side
             ,
             then
             any
             circumstance
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             which
             can
             be
             offered
             to
             counterbalance
             it
             ,
             that
             he
             which
             succeeded
             him
             in
             his
             
               first
               seat
               (
               Antioch
            
             )
             is
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             force
             in
             the
             argument
             of
             succession
             ,
             to
             be
             looked
             on
             as
             the
             
               chief
               of
               his
               strength
            
             ,
             partaker
             of
             
               more
               power
            
             by
             virtue
             of
             that
             succession
             ,
             then
             he
             that
             afterward
             succeeded
             him
             at
             Rome
             ?
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             This
             we
             know
             ,
             that
             anciently
             there
             were
             
               three
               Patriarchates
            
             ,
             and
             Antioch
             was
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             Rome
             was
             another
             ;
             and
             though
             I
             ,
             who
             lay
             not
             that
             weight
             on
             the
             argument
             of
             succession
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             am
             not
             engaged
             
             to
             affirme
             that
             Antioch
             was
             the
             chief
             of
             these
             ,
             yet
             this
             I
             contend
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             much
             lesse
             reason
             ,
             that
             any
             precedence
             ,
             which
             is
             afforded
             Rome
             by
             the
             
               ancient
               Canons
            
             ,
             should
             be
             deemed
             imputable
             to
             this
             succession
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             when
             't
             is
             evident
             that
             claim
             belongs
             to
             Antioch
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             first
             to
             Antioch
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             no
             otherwise
             to
             Rome
             ,
             then
             as
             it
             was
             first
             competible
             to
             Antioch
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             Of
             Rome
             it
             is
             confessed
             that
             the
             primacy
             of
             dignity
             or
             order
             belonged
             to
             that
             ,
             the
             next
             place
             to
             Alexandria
             ,
             the
             third
             to
             Antioch
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             evidence
             that
             the
             succession
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             was
             not
             considered
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             for
             then
             Alexandria
             ,
             which
             held
             only
             from
             
               S.
               Mark
            
             ,
             must
             needs
             have
             yeelded
             to
             Antioch
             which
             held
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             .
             The
             original
             of
             this
             precedence
             ,
             or
             dignity
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             is
             sure
             much
             more
             fitly
             deduced
             by
             the
             
               fourth
               General
               Councel
            
             holden
             at
             Chalcedon
             ,
             
             confirming
             the
             decree
             of
             the
             
               Councel
               of
               Constantinople
            
             ,
             that
             that
             See
             shall
             have
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               equal
               privileges
            
             ,
             and
             dignities
             ,
             and
             advantages
             with
             Rome
             ,
             upon
             
             this
             account
             ,
             that
             Constantinople
             was
             
               New
               Rome
            
             ,
             and
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Empire
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             which
             ,
             say
             they
             ,
             was
             the
             reason
             (
             and
             not
             any
             donation
             of
             Christs
             to
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             or
             succession
             of
             that
             Bishop
             from
             him
             )
             that
             Rome
             enjoyed
             such
             privileges
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             and
             therefore
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               The
               Fathers
               at
               Constantinople
               being
               moved
               with
               the
               same
               reasons
               had
               rightly
               judged
               that
               now
               the
               same
               privileges
               should
               belong
               to
               that
               Church
               or
               City
               ,
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             being
             next
             to
             
               Old
               Rome
            
             should
             in
             all
             
               Ecclesiastical
               affaires
            
             have
             the
             
               same
               dignity
            
             ,
             or
             greatnesse
             that
             
               Old
               Rome
            
             had
             .
             Where
             ,
             as
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             dignity
             of
             that
             See
             is
             duly
             set
             down
             ,
             and
             (
             which
             is
             observable
             )
             in
             the
             whole
             contest
             never
             so
             much
             as
             quarelled
             at
             by
             the
             
               Legats
               ,
               viz.
            
             the
             residence
             of
             the
             
               Imperial
               Majesty
            
             there
             (
             a
             thing
             very
             remarkable
             in
             the
             several
             degrees
             of
             dignity
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             of
             
               Patriarchs
               ,
               Primates
               ,
               Archbishops
               ,
               Bishops
               ,
            
             
             which
             generally
             observed
             their
             proportions
             with
             the
             
               civil
               state
            
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             shewed
             )
             so
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             it
             also
             ,
             no
             supremacy
             of
             power
             over
             all
             the
             Bishops
             of
             the
             world
             (
             for
             that
             monarchical
             power
             is
             not
             at
             once
             competible
             to
             two
             equals
             or
             rivals
             )
             and
             withall
             the
             moveablenesse
             or
             communicablenesse
             of
             that
             dignity
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             may
             follow
             the
             
               Imperial
               seat
            
             ,
             whithersoever
             it
             is
             removeable
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             fixed
             at
             Rome
             by
             any
             commission
             of
             Christ
             or
             succession
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             
             But
             because
             I
             shall
             suppose
             that
             a
             Canon
             ,
             though
             of
             an
             
               Vniversal
               Councel
            
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             found
             thus
             derogatory
             to
             the
             height
             which
             Rome
             now
             pretends
             to
             ,
             shall
             not
             by
             the
             Romanist
             be
             acknowledged
             to
             be
             authentick
             ,
             as
             wanting
             that
             which
             the
             Romanist
             makes
             absolutely
             necessary
             to
             the
             validity
             of
             Councels
             or
             Canons
             ,
             the
             suffrage
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             and
             consent
             of
             his
             Legates
             ;
             and
             because
             I
             mean
             not
             here
             to
             goe
             out
             of
             my
             way
             to
             vindicate
             (
             which
             I
             could
             very
             readily
             doe
             )
             the
             authority
             of
             that
             Canon
             ,
             or
             to
             shew
             the
             strangenesse
             of
             this
             dealing
             ,
             not
             to
             admit
             any
             testimony
             
             against
             them
             ,
             but
             wherein
             they
             have
             given
             their
             
               own
               suffrage
            
             (
             a
             method
             of
             security
             beyond
             all
             amulets
             ,
             if
             no
             man
             shall
             be
             believed
             against
             me
             ,
             till
             I
             have
             joyned
             with
             him
             to
             accuse
             and
             condemne
             my
             self
             )
             I
             shall
             therefore
             lay
             no
             more
             weight
             on
             this
             ,
             then
             will
             ,
             without
             this
             support
             ,
             be
             otherwise
             upheld
             ,
             and
             is
             in
             some
             measure
             evident
             by
             the
             Romanists
             rejecting
             this
             Canon
             ,
             and
             adding
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Antioch
             rejected
             it
             also
             ;
             which
             argues
             that
             that
             which
             the
             
               Church
               of
               Constantinople
            
             was
             willing
             to
             acquire
             by
             this
             decree
             ,
             was
             as
             derogatory
             to
             the
             dignity
             of
             Antioch
             as
             of
             Rome
             .
             And
             as
             that
             concludes
             that
             Antioch
             had
             professedly
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               equal
               privileges
            
             with
             Rome
             ,
             the
             dignity
             of
             a
             Patriarchate
             ,
             and
             the
             attendants
             and
             pompes
             of
             that
             ,
             So
             it
             proceeds
             on
             a
             concession
             ,
             that
             all
             that
             Constantinople
             wanted
             ,
             or
             in
             which
             this
             New
             came
             short
             of
             the
             
               Old
               Rome
            
             ,
             was
             only
             the
             dignity
             of
             a
             Patriarchate
             ,
             without
             any
             
               ordinary
               jurisdiction
            
             over
             other
             Churches
             .
             Which
             again
             shewes
             us
             what
             was
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             preeminence
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               See
            
             at
             that
             time
             ;
             no
             
               supreme
               
               authoritative
            
             power
             over
             other
             Primates
             ,
             
             but
             only
             a
             precedence
             ,
             or
             priority
             of
             place
             in
             Councels
             ,
             an
             eminence
             in
             respect
             of
             dignity
             ,
             which
             is
             perfectly
             reconcileable
             with
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             independence
             ,
             the
             no-subordination
             or
             subjection
             of
             other
             Primates
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             
             This
             hath
             formerly
             been
             manifested
             ,
             when
             we
             discoursed
             of
             the
             original
             ,
             and
             power
             ,
             and
             dignity
             of
             Primates
             ,
             and
             Patriarchs
             ,
             and
             is
             put
             beyond
             all
             controll
             by
             that
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Ephesus
             in
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             Cyprus
             ,
             over
             whom
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             though
             Patriarch
             of
             all
             the
             Orient
             ,
             was
             adjudged
             to
             have
             no
             manner
             of
             power
             .
             And
             this
             independency
             of
             Cyprus
             ,
             not
             only
             from
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             but
             from
             all
             others
             whomsoever
             ,
             was
             contested
             then
             ,
             as
             from
             the
             Apostles
             times
             ,
             and
             asserted
             ,
             and
             vindicated
             by
             that
             Councel
             ,
             and
             order
             given
             indefinitely
             against
             all
             invasions
             for
             time
             to
             come
             ,
             in
             whatever
             Diocese
             ,
             that
             no
             Bishop
             shall
             encroach
             upon
             
               anothers
               Province
            
             ,
             or
             usurp
             a
             power
             ,
             where
             from
             the
             Apostles
             times
             he
             had
             not
             enjoyed
             it
             ;
             which
             how
             directly
             it
             (
             is
             applicable
             to
             ,
             and
             )
             prejudgeth
             the
             
             pretensions
             of
             Rome
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             of
             Antioch
             ,
             is
             so
             manifest
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             need
             farther
             demonstrating
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             Of
             the
             same
             kind
             ,
             two
             farther
             instances
             I
             shall
             here
             adde
             ;
             first
             of
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             Carthage
             ,
             who
             being
             the
             
               chief
               Primate
            
             ,
             or
             Metropolitan
             (
             for
             these
             two
             words
             in
             the
             African
             style
             ,
             different
             from
             the
             usage
             of
             other
             Churches
             ,
             are
             observeable
             to
             signifie
             the
             same
             thing
             )
             in
             Africk
             ,
             i.
             e.
             in
             one
             of
             the
             
               thirteen
               Dioceses
            
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             appears
             to
             have
             been
             independent
             from
             all
             other
             power
             ,
             an
             absolute
             Primate
             ,
             subject
             to
             no
             superiour
             ,
             or
             Patriarch
             ,
             whether
             of
             Alexandria
             ,
             or
             Rome
             .
             This
             is
             evident
             by
             Justinian
             in
             the
             131
             Novel
             ,
             where
             the
             Emperour
             gives
             the
             same
             privileges
             to
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             *
             Carthage
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             formerly
             given
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             
               Justiniana
               prima
            
             ;
             which
             being
             the
             
               second
               example
            
             I
             meant
             to
             mention
             ,
             I
             shall
             briefly
             shew
             what
             that
             Prerogative
             was
             ,
             which
             equally
             belonged
             to
             these
             two
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             
               Justiniana
               Prima
            
             was
             the
             head
             of
             a
             Dacia
             the
             new
             ;
             a
             Diocese
             (
             as
             that
             signifies
             more
             then
             a
             Province
             ,
             a
             b
             Primat's
             ,
             a
             Patriarch's
             dominion
             )
             erected
             by
             
               Justinian
               the
               Emperour
            
             ;
             and
             that
             city
             thus
             dignified
             ,
             as
             the
             c
             place
             where
             he
             had
             been
             born
             ,
             and
             the
             Archbishop
             thereof
             made
             Primate
             of
             all
             that
             Diocese
             .
             This
             is
             thus
             expressed
             in
             the
             
               Imperial
               Constitutions
               ,
               Nov.
            
             11.
             
               that
               he
               shall
               have
               omnem
               censuram
               Ecclesiasticam
               ,
               summum
               Sacerdotium
               ,
               summum
               fastigium
               ,
               summam
               dignitatem
               ,
               all
               power
               of
               Ecclesiastical
               jurisdiction
               ,
               the
               supreme
               Priesthood
               ,
               supreme
               honour
               and
               dignity
            
             ;
             And
             in
             the
             Constitutions
             set
             out
             by
             Gothofred
             out
             of
             an
             
               old
               
               MS.
               
               Copy
               ,
               Tu
               &
               omnes
               Justinianae
               primae
               Antistites
               ,
               quicquid
               oriatur
               inter
               eos
               discrimen
               ,
               ipsi
               hoc
               dirimant
               ,
               &
               finem
               eis
               imponant
               ,
               &
               nec
               ad
               alium
               quendam
               eatur
               ,
               sed
               suum
               agnoscant
               Archiepiscopum
               omnes
               praedictae
               Provinciae
               —
               that
               all
               the
               Provinces
               shall
               in
               the
               last
               resort
               make
               their
               appeal
               to
               him
               for
               all
               controversies
               .
            
             And
             Nov.
             131.
             c.
             3.
             
               that
               in
               all
               that
               Diocese
               he
               shall
               have
               locum
               Apostolicae
               sedis
               ,
               the
               place
               or
               dignity
               of
               an
               Apostolical
               seat
            
             ;
             which
             gave
             Nicephorus
             occasion
             (
             in
             his
             relation
             of
             this
             matter
             )
             to
             affirme
             that
             the
             Emperour
             made
             it
             a
             
               free
               city
               ,
               and
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               an
               head
               unto
               itself
               ,
            
             with
             
               full
               power
               independent
            
             from
             all
             others
             :
             And
             though
             the
             
               first
               Bishop
            
             thereof
             was
             consecrated
             by
             
               Vigilius
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             as
             by
             some
             Bishop
             it
             is
             certain
             he
             must
             ,
             yet
             that
             is
             of
             no
             force
             against
             the
             conclusion
             ,
             to
             which
             I
             designe
             this
             instance
             ,
             it
             being
             evident
             that
             being
             consecrated
             ,
             he
             was
             absolute
             ,
             and
             depended
             not
             on
             any
             ,
             and
             his
             *
             successors
             were
             to
             be
             ordained
             by
             his
             Councel
             of
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             Pope
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             Which
             as
             it
             makes
             a
             
               second
               instance
            
             of
             the
             point
             in
             hand
             ,
             so
             when
             it
             is
             remembred
             ,
             that
             all
             this
             
               independent
               absolute
            
             power
             was
             conferred
             upon
             this
             city
             (
             the
             Emperors
             favorite
             )
             only
             by
             his
             making
             it
             a
             Primate's
             ,
             or
             
               chief
               Metropolitane's
               See
            
             ,
             and
             that
             Carthage's
             being
             the
             
               Prime
               Metropolis
            
             of
             Africk
             is
             expressed
             by
             having
             the
             
               same
               privileges
            
             ,
             that
             
               Justiniana
               Prima
            
             had
             ,
             It
             will
             follow
             (
             what
             is
             most
             certain
             ,
             and
             might
             otherwise
             be
             testified
             by
             innumerable
             evidences
             )
             that
             
               every
               Primate
            
             ,
             or
             
               chief
               Metropolitane
            
             was
             absolute
             within
             his
             own
             circuit
             ,
             neither
             subject
             nor
             subordinate
             to
             any
             
               forein
               Superiour
            
             ,
             whether
             Pope
             ,
             or
             Patriarch
             ;
             And
             that
             was
             all
             which
             was
             useful
             (
             much
             more
             then
             was
             necessary
             )
             to
             be
             here
             demonstrated
             .
             And
             being
             so
             ,
             there
             remains
             to
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             no
             farther
             claim
             to
             the
             subjection
             of
             this
             Island
             ,
             nor
             appearance
             of
             proof
             of
             the
             charge
             of
             schisme
             ,
             in
             casting
             off
             that
             yoke
             ,
             upon
             this
             first
             score
             of
             S.
             Peter's
             ,
             or
             his
             successors
             right
             to
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             
             Upon
             this
             head
             of
             discourse
             depends
             also
             all
             that
             is
             ,
             or
             can
             be
             said
             for
             the
             confining
             the
             
               Catholick
               Church
            
             to
             the
             number
             of
             those
             ,
             who
             live
             in
             obedience
             to
             the
             
               Roman
               Church
            
             ,
             or
             Bishop
             .
             For
             if
             there
             have
             been
             from
             the
             
               Apostles
               times
            
             ,
             an
             
               independent
               power
            
             vested
             in
             
               each
               Primate
            
             ,
             or
             
               chief
               Metropolitane
            
             (
             as
             hath
             been
             evidently
             shown
             )
             then
             how
             can
             it
             be
             necessary
             to
             the
             being
             of
             a
             member
             of
             the
             
               Catholick
               Church
            
             ,
             to
             be
             subject
             to
             that
             one
             Primate
             ?
             'T
             is
             certainly
             sufficient
             to
             the
             conservation
             of
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             whole
             Church
             ,
             that
             every
             one
             pay
             an
             obedience
             ,
             where
             an
             obedience
             is
             due
             ,
             and
             no
             way
             usefull
             toward
             that
             end
             ,
             that
             those
             that
             are
             
               born
               free
            
             ,
             should
             resigne
             up
             ,
             divest
             themselves
             of
             that
             privilege
             ,
             and
             become
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             servants
             or
             subjects
             of
             their
             
               own
               making
            
             .
             But
             I
             shall
             not
             enlarge
             on
             this
             matter
             ,
             but
             conclude
             with
             that
             of
             our
             Bishops
             in
             
               Convocation
               ,
               Anno
               Chr
            
             :
             1537.
             in
             their
             Book
             intituled
             ,
             [
             
               The
               Institution
               of
               a
               Christian
               man
               :
            
             ]
             that
             
               it
               was
               many
               hundred
               years
               before
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               could
               acquire
               any
               power
               of
               a
               Primate
               over
               any
               other
               Bishops
               ,
               which
               were
               
               not
               within
               his
               Province
               in
               Italie
               ,
               And
               that
               the
               Bishops
               of
               Rome
               doe
               now
               transgresse
               their
               own
               profession
               made
               in
               their
               Creation
               ,
               For
               all
               the
               Bishops
               of
               Rome
               alwaies
               when
               they
               be
               consecrated
               and
               made
               Bishops
               of
               that
               See
               ,
               doe
               make
               a
               solemn
               profession
               and
               vow
               ,
               that
               they
               shall
               inviolably
               observe
               all
               the
               Ordinances
               made
               in
               the
               eight
               first
               General
               Councels
               ,
               among
               which
               it
               is
               especially
               provided
               ,
               that
               all
               causes
               shall
               be
               determined
               within
               the
               Province
               ,
               where
               they
               be
               begun
               ,
               and
               that
               by
               the
               Bishops
               of
               the
               same
               Province
               ;
               which
               absolutely
               excludes
               all
               Papal
               ,
            
             i.
             e.
             
               forein
               power
            
             out
             of
             these
             Realms
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             Their
             third
             plea
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             having
             planted
             Christianity
             among
             us
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             THE
             next
             part
             of
             the
             Romanist's
             arguing
             against
             us
             ,
             is
             taken
             from
             a
             
               peculiar
               right
            
             ,
             or
             claim
             ,
             that
             the
             Bishop
             or
             See
             of
             Rome
             hath
             to
             
               our
               obedience
            
             ,
             upon
             the
             score
             of
             having
             
               planted
               Christianity
            
             among
             us
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             But
             before
             I
             proceed
             to
             shew
             the
             invalidity
             of
             this
             plea
             ,
             I
             desire
             it
             may
             first
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             the
             pleading
             of
             this
             ,
             as
             the
             title
             by
             which
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             hath
             right
             to
             our
             subjection
             ,
             is
             absolutely
             unreconcileable
             with
             his
             former
             pretensions
             founded
             in
             his
             
               oecumenical
               Pastorship
            
             by
             succession
             to
             S.
             Peter
             ;
             For
             certainly
             he
             that
             is
             supposed
             (
             in
             grosse
             )
             to
             have
             that
             original
             title
             to
             
               all
               power
            
             over
             
               all
               Churches
            
             ,
             cannot
             be
             imagined
             to
             acquire
             it
             afterward
             (
             by
             way
             of
             retail
             )
             over
             any
             
               particular
               Church
            
             .
             He
             that
             claims
             a
             reward
             ,
             as
             of
             his
             own
             labour
             and
             travail
             ,
             must
             be
             supposed
             to
             
               disclaim
               Donation
            
             ,
             which
             is
             antecedent
             to
             ,
             and
             exclusive
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             
             the
             title
             of
             descent
             is
             to
             that
             of
             Conquest
             ,
             And
             it
             is
             a
             very
             great
             prejudice
             to
             the
             justice
             of
             his
             pretensions
             ,
             who
             findes
             it
             necessary
             to
             mix
             things
             that
             are
             so
             incompetible
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             
             And
             therefore
             I
             am
             obliged
             to
             offer
             this
             Dilemma
             to
             the
             Romanist
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             and
             to
             demand
             ,
             Which
             is
             the
             Pope's
             true
             title
             to
             the
             subjection
             of
             this
             Island
             ?
             the
             Donation
             of
             Christ
             ,
             or
             conversion
             wrought
             by
             Augustine
             the
             Monk
             ?
             If
             the
             latter
             be
             affirmed
             to
             be
             it
             ,
             then
             it
             must
             be
             granted
             by
             him
             ,
             both
             that
             this
             Island
             before
             the
             time
             of
             
               Pope
               Gregory
            
             was
             no
             way
             subjected
             to
             the
             
               Romish
               See
            
             ,
             and
             withall
             that
             no
             
               Christian
               nation
            
             is
             at
             this
             day
             thus
             subject
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             doth
             appear
             to
             have
             been
             converted
             by
             Rome
             ,
             as
             the
             Saxons
             here
             are
             supposed
             to
             have
             been
             ;
             And
             then
             this
             concession
             will
             lose
             more
             subjects
             to
             the
             
               Apostolick
               See
            
             ,
             then
             the
             return
             of
             these
             Islands
             to
             the
             
               desired
               subjection
            
             would
             ever
             be
             able
             to
             countervail
             ,
             or
             recompense
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             reasonable
             to
             insist
             on
             the
             terms
             of
             this
             bargain
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             yeild
             the
             one
             ,
             till
             the
             other
             be
             yeilded
             to
             us
             ,
             But
             if
             the
             former
             be
             affirmed
             to
             be
             it
             ,
             
             and
             that
             indeed
             the
             commission
             from
             Christ
             to
             S.
             Peter
             be
             still
             the
             fundamental
             hold
             ,
             by
             which
             our
             subjection
             is
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             hath
             been
             due
             to
             his
             successors
             ,
             then
             is
             that
             other
             of
             the
             conversion
             by
             Augustine
             but
             a
             fallacious
             pretense
             ,
             a
             
               non
               causa
               pro
               causâ
            
             ,
             to
             amuze
             us
             ,
             and
             need
             not
             farther
             be
             answered
             ,
             or
             invalidated
             ,
             then
             by
             this
             confession
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             But
             then
             passing
             by
             this
             advantage
             ,
             and
             taking
             the
             objection
             ,
             as
             it
             lies
             by
             it self
             ,
             these
             farther
             considerations
             will
             take
             off
             all
             force
             from
             it
             .
             1.
             
             That
             this
             Island
             was
             converted
             to
             the
             Faith
             of
             Christ
             ,
             long
             before
             Augustine's
             preaching
             to
             the
             Saxons
             ,
             either
             in
             ,
             or
             very
             neer
             the
             
               Apostles
               times
            
             ,
             in
             Tiberius
             his
             reign
             ,
             saith
             Gildas
             ,
             and
             long
             before
             Tertullian's
             ,
             and
             Origen's
             time
             ,
             as
             by
             them
             appears
             ,
             
               Tertull
               :
               in
               Apol
            
             :
             and
             
               Orig
               :
               in
               Ezech
               :
               Hom
               :
            
             4.
             
             To
             this
             I
             shall
             not
             need
             to
             adde
             the
             testimony
             of
             Eleutherius
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             in
             the
             vulgar
             Epistle
             to
             our
             Lucius
             ,
             the
             first
             
               Christian
               King
            
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             styling
             him
             
               vicarium
               Dei
               in
               regno
               suo
               ,
               God's
               vicegerent
               in
               his
               own
               kingdome
               ,
            
             because
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             some
             doubt
             of
             the
             authenthenticknesse
             
             of
             that
             Epistle
             ,
             so
             the
             *
             only
             thing
             that
             we
             have
             now
             need
             to
             conclude
             from
             it
             ,
             is
             otherwise
             evident
             ,
             viz
             :
             
               that
               the
               Nation
               was
               in
               his
               time
               converted
               ,
            
             and
             so
             long
             
               before
               Augustine's
            
             coming
             .
             And
             though
             by
             
               Dioclesian's
               persecution
               ,
               Christianity
            
             were
             here
             shrewdly
             shaken
             ,
             yet
             I
             suppose
             ,
             that
             will
             not
             be
             thought
             argumentative
             ,
             both
             because
             it
             might
             be
             of
             
               ill
               example
            
             against
             other
             nations
             ,
             where
             the
             faith
             was
             as
             bloodily
             persecuted
             in
             that
             ,
             or
             other
             times
             ,
             and
             possibly
             at
             some
             point
             of
             time
             against
             Rome
             it self
             ,
             
             where
             S.
             
               Peter's
               chair
            
             was
             not
             alwaies
             amulet
             sufficient
             to
             avoid
             the
             like
             destructions
             ,
             and
             especially
             because
             it
             is
             evident
             ,
             that
             the
             
               British
               Church
            
             survived
             that
             calamity
             ,
             three
             of
             our
             Bishops
             being
             
               ten
               years
            
             after
             that
             ,
             present
             (
             and
             their
             
               names
               subscribed
               ,
               Eborius
               of
               Yorke
               ,
               Restitutus
               of
               London
               ,
               and
               Adelfius
               Coloniae
               Londinensium
            
             )
             at
             the
             
               Councel
               of
               Arles
               ,
               eleven
               years
            
             before
             the
             
               first
               Councel
               of
               Nice
            
             .
             So
             likewise
             at
             the
             time
             of
             that
             
               Nicene
               Councel
            
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             as
             Britaine
             was
             one
             of
             the
             
               six
               Dioceses
            
             of
             the
             
               West
               Empire
            
             (
             see
             
               Notitia
               Provinc
               :
               Occident
            
             :
             )
             so
             there
             were
             in
             it
             
             
               three
               Metropolitanes
            
             ,
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               York
            
             (
             his
             
               Province
               Maxima
               Caesariensis
            
             )
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               London
            
             (
             his
             
               Province
               Britannia
               prima
            
             )
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Caeruske
            
             (
             his
             
               Province
               Britannia
               secunda
            
             )
             in
             Monmouthshire
             ,
             *
             which
             after
             in
             
               King
               Arthur's
            
             time
             was
             translated
             to
             S.
             Davids
             ,
             where
             it
             continued
             an
             Archbishoprick
             ,
             till
             
               King
               Henry
            
             I.
             who
             subjected
             it
             to
             Canterbury
             ,
             and
             †
             all
             this
             space
             of
             about
             500
             years
             after
             Augustines
             coming
             ,
             the
             Bishops
             thereof
             ,
             
               eleven
               in
               number
               ,
               were
               all
               consecrated
               by
               the
               suffragan
               Bishops
               of
               that
               Province
               ,
               without
               any
               profession
               ,
               or
               subjection
               to
               any
               other
               Church
               ,
               as
               the
               Annales
               there
               affirm
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             To
             the
             same
             purpose
             is
             it
             ,
             
             that
             when
             Augustine
             required
             subjection
             to
             the
             Pope
             and
             
               Church
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             the
             Abbat
             of
             Bangor
             is
             recorded
             to
             have
             returned
             him
             this
             
               answer
               ,
               Notum
               sit
               vobis
               ,
               quòd
               nos
               omnes
               sumus
               —
               Be
               it
               known
               unto
               you
               ,
               that
               we
               are
               all
               subject
               ,
               and
               obedient
               to
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               Pope
               of
               Rome
               ,
               but
               so
               as
               we
               are
               also
               to
               every
               pious
               and
               
               good
               Christian
               ,
            
             viz
             :
             
               to
               love
               every
               one
               in
               his
               degree
               and
               place
               ,
               in
               perfect
               charity
               ,
               and
               to
               help
               every
               one
               by
               word
               and
               deed
               to
               attain
               to
               be
               the
               sons
               of
               God
            
             ;
             †
             
               Et
               aliam
               obedientiam
               quàm
               istam
               non
               scio
               debitam
               ei
               quem
               vos
               nominatis
               esse
               Papam
               ,
               nec
               esse
               Patrem
               Patrum
               vendicari
               &
               postulari
               ,
               And
               for
               any
               other
               obedience
               I
               know
               none
               due
               to
               him
               whom
               you
               call
               the
               Pope
               ,
               and
               as
               little
               doe
               I
               know
               by
               what
               right
               he
               can
               challenge
               to
               be
               father
               of
               fathers
               ,
               Bishop
               of
               Bishops
               ,
               or
               Vniversal
               Bishop
               .
               Praeterea
               nos
               sumus
               sub
               gubernatione
               Episcopi
               Caerlegionensis
               super
               Oscâ
               —
               As
               for
               us
               ,
               we
               are
               under
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Caerlegion
               upon
               Vsk
               ,
               who
               is
               to
               overlook
               and
               govern
               us
               under
               God.
               
            
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             
             From
             hence
             the
             result
             is
             clear
             ,
             that
             whatever
             is
             pretended
             from
             Augustine
             the
             Monk
             ,
             or
             supposed
             to
             have
             been
             then
             pressed
             by
             him
             ,
             for
             the
             advancing
             of
             the
             Popes
             interest
             in
             this
             Island
             ,
             and
             concluding
             us
             guilty
             of
             Schisme
             in
             
               casting
               off
            
             that
             yoke
             ,
             yet
             the
             
               British
               Bishops
            
             still
             holding
             out
             against
             this
             pretension
             ,
             and
             that
             with
             all
             reason
             on
             their
             side
             ,
             if
             the
             title
             of
             conversion
             ,
             which
             the
             Romanist
             pleads
             for
             our
             subjection
             ,
             may
             be
             of
             any
             validity
             
             with
             him
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             whole
             Island
             cannot
             upon
             this
             score
             of
             
               Augustine's
               conversion
            
             ,
             be
             now
             deemed
             schismatical
             ,
             it
             being
             certain
             ,
             that
             the
             
               whole
               Island
            
             ,
             &
             particularly
             the
             
               Dominion
               of
               Wales
            
             ,
             was
             not
             thus
             converted
             by
             Augustine
             ,
             nor
             formerly
             by
             any
             sent
             from
             Rome
             ,
             or
             that
             observed
             the
             
               Roman
               Order
            
             (
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             observation
             of
             Easter
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             usage
             received
             at
             Rome
             )
             but
             either
             by
             Joseph
             of
             Arimathea
             ,
             or
             
               Simon
               Zelotes
            
             ,
             as
             our
             Annals
             tell
             us
             most
             probably
             .
             And
             this
             in
             the
             first
             place
             must
             needs
             be
             yeilded
             to
             by
             those
             that
             expect
             to
             receive
             any
             advantage
             to
             their
             cause
             by
             this
             argument
             ;
             And
             if
             they
             will
             still
             extend
             their
             title
             equally
             ,
             to
             those
             parts
             of
             Britannie
             ,
             which
             Augustine
             did
             not
             ,
             as
             to
             those
             which
             he
             
               did
               convert
            
             ,
             to
             Wales
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             to
             Kent
             ,
             it
             is
             evident
             they
             must
             doe
             it
             upon
             some
             other
             score
             (
             whatsoever
             the
             pretense
             be
             )
             and
             not
             upon
             this
             of
             conversion
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             But
             then
             2
             dly
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             of
             this
             Island
             ,
             as
             was
             
               really
               converted
            
             to
             the
             Faith
             by
             the
             coming
             of
             Augustine
             ,
             
             there
             is
             no
             title
             for
             their
             subjection
             ,
             and
             the
             perpetual
             subjection
             
             of
             their
             posterity
             from
             this
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             To
             examine
             this
             a
             while
             by
             other
             known
             practises
             of
             the
             Christian
             world
             ,
             S.
             Paul
             by
             himself
             or
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             Procurators
             ,
             was
             the
             
               great
               Converter
            
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ;
             Concerning
             him
             I
             shall
             demand
             ,
             whether
             all
             those
             
               nations
               converted
            
             by
             him
             and
             his
             ministers
             ,
             are
             to
             all
             ages
             obliged
             to
             be
             subject
             to
             that
             chair
             ,
             where
             S.
             Paul
             sat
             (
             whether
             in
             the
             Church
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             or
             Rome
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             )
             at
             the
             time
             of
             his
             sending
             out
             ,
             or
             going
             himself
             to
             convert
             them
             ;
             If
             so
             ,
             then
             1.
             there
             cannot
             be
             a
             greater
             prejudice
             imaginable
             to
             S.
             
               Peter's
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             ;
             And
             2.
             it
             will
             in
             the
             story
             of
             the
             fact
             appear
             to
             have
             no
             degree
             of
             truth
             in
             it
             ;
             Timothie
             that
             was
             placed
             over
             Asia
             in
             Ephesus
             ,
             and
             Titus
             over
             Crete
             ,
             being
             (
             as
             hath
             formerly
             appeared
             )
             supreme
             in
             those
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             independent
             from
             any
             other
             See
             ,
             And
             generally
             that
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             Primates
             or
             Patriarchs
             ,
             to
             have
             no
             superior
             either
             to
             ordain
             ,
             or
             
               exercise
               jurisdiction
            
             over
             them
             ,
             but
             themselves
             to
             be
             absolute
             within
             their
             Province
             ,
             and
             their
             successors
             to
             be
             ordained
             by
             the
             
               suffragan
               Bishops
            
             under
             
             them
             ;
             which
             could
             not
             be
             ,
             if
             every
             such
             Church
             ,
             where
             such
             a
             Primate
             was
             placed
             ,
             were
             subject
             to
             that
             Church
             ,
             from
             which
             they
             received
             the
             Faith.
             
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             
             To
             put
             this
             whole
             matter
             out
             of
             controversie
             ,
             It
             is
             ,
             and
             hath
             alwaies
             been
             in
             the
             power
             of
             
               Christian
               Emperors
            
             ,
             and
             Princes
             within
             their
             Dominions
             to
             
               erect
               Patriarchates
            
             ,
             or
             to
             translate
             them
             from
             one
             city
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             therefore
             whatever
             title
             is
             supposeable
             to
             be
             acquired
             by
             the
             Pope
             in
             this
             Island
             upon
             the
             first
             planting
             of
             the
             Gospel
             here
             ,
             this
             cannot
             so
             oblige
             the
             Kings
             of
             England
             ever
             since
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             may
             freely
             remove
             that
             power
             from
             Rome
             to
             Canterbury
             ,
             and
             subject
             all
             the
             Christians
             of
             this
             Island
             to
             the
             spiritual
             power
             of
             that
             Archbishop
             or
             
               Primate
               ,
               independently
            
             from
             any
             
               forein
               Bishop
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             For
             the
             erection
             of
             Primacies
             or
             Patriarchates
             ,
             that
             of
             
               Justiniana
               Prima
            
             †
             forementioned
             ,
             and
             set
             down
             at
             large
             ,
             is
             an
             evident
             proof
             ,
             Justinian
             erecting
             that
             (
             long
             after
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Primates
             seats
             in
             the
             Empire
             )
             to
             be
             an
             
               Archiepiscopal
               See
               ,
               absolute
            
             and
             independent
             ,
             and
             subjecting
             
             all
             Dacia
             the
             new
             to
             it
             ▪
             And
             though
             the
             
               Pope
               Vigilius
            
             was
             by
             the
             Emperour
             appointed
             to
             ordain
             the
             
               first
               Bishop
            
             there
             ,
             yet
             were
             his
             successors
             to
             be
             ordained
             by
             his
             own
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             and
             the
             Bishops
             under
             him
             not
             to
             appeal
             to
             any
             others
             ,
             as
             hath
             in
             each
             particular
             formerly
             been
             evidenced
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             
             The
             same
             also
             hath
             in
             like
             manner
             been
             shewn
             of
             Carthage
             ,
             which
             was
             by
             the
             same
             Justinian
             (
             not
             originally
             dignified
             ,
             but
             )
             †
             after
             the
             rescuing
             it
             out
             of
             the
             Vandales
             hands
             ,
             restored
             to
             a
             state
             of
             Primacie
             ,
             after
             the
             pattern
             or
             image
             of
             
               Justiniana
               Prima
            
             ,
             and
             
               two
               Provinces
            
             more
             annexed
             ,
             then
             had
             antiently
             belonged
             to
             that
             
               Bishops
               jurisdiction
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             12.
             
             
             Before
             either
             of
             these
             the
             
               Emperour
               Valentinian
            
             the
             3
             d
             ,
             
               Anno
               Christi
            
             432.
             by
             his
             Rescript
             constituted
             Ravenna
             a
             
               Patriarchal
               seat
            
             ;
             And
             from
             his
             time
             that
             held
             the
             Patriarchate
             without
             any
             dependence
             on
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             to
             the
             time
             of
             
               Constantinus
               Pogonatus
            
             ,
             And
             though
             at
             that
             time
             the
             
               Greek
               Emperors
               Vicarii
            
             or
             Exarchs
             being
             not
             able
             to
             support
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Ravenna
             against
             the
             
             Longobards
             ,
             he
             was
             fain
             to
             flie
             for
             support
             to
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             and
             so
             submitted
             himself
             unto
             him
             ,
             and
             after
             Reparatus
             ,
             the
             next
             
               Bishop
               Theodorus
            
             did
             the
             like
             to
             
               Pope
               Agatho
            
             ,
             whether
             upon
             the
             score
             of
             great
             friendship
             with
             him
             ,
             or
             in
             despite
             to
             his
             own
             Clergie
             (
             with
             whom
             he
             had
             variance
             )
             saith
             Sabellicus
             ,
             yet
             the
             people
             of
             Ravenna
             thought
             themselves
             injured
             hereby
             ,
             and
             joyned
             with
             their
             next
             
               Bishop
               Foelix
            
             to
             maintain
             their
             privilege
             ,
             though
             
               Pope
               Constantine
            
             stirring
             up
             Justinian
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             against
             them
             ,
             they
             were
             worsted
             ,
             and
             defeated
             in
             their
             attempt
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             13.
             
             Other
             examples
             there
             are
             of
             this
             kinde
             ,
             *
             Balsamon
             points
             at
             some
             ,
             which
             from
             the
             †
             
               Emperours
               charter
            
             had
             this
             privilege
             ,
             not
             to
             be
             subject
             to
             the
             
               Patriarch
               of
               Constantinople
            
             ,
             calling
             them
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             were
             
               Archbishops
               independent
            
             :
             So
             under
             Phocas
             ,
             the
             Patriarchate
             of
             Grado
             in
             Italie
             was
             erected
             ,
             saith
             *
             
               Warnefridus
               de
               gestis
               Longobard
            
             :
             Others
             ,
             as
             
               Eginartus
               Chancellor
            
             to
             Charles
             the
             Great
             ,
             and
             who
             wrote
             his
             life
             ,
             say
             it
             was
             done
             by
             Charles
             the
             Great
             .
             And
             so
             doth
             Rhegino
             
             who
             lived
             in
             the
             next
             age
             .
             And
             accordingly
             in
             
               Duarenus
               de
               Benef
            
             :
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             9.
             among
             the
             
               Minorum
               Gentium
               Patriarchatus
            
             ,
             that
             of
             Grado
             is
             reckoned
             for
             one
             ,
             and
             joyned
             with
             
               Aquileia
               ,
               Canterbury
            
             and
             Bourges
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             14.
             
             
             And
             that
             it
             was
             a
             frequent
             usage
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             may
             appear
             by
             the
             12
             th
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             ,
             where
             we
             finde
             mention
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               cities
               honoured
               by
               letters
               patents
               from
               the
               Kings
               or
               Emperors
               with
               the
               name
               and
               dignity
               of
               Metropoles
               ,
            
             and
             where
             the
             Councel
             represses
             the
             ambition
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             which
             sought
             those
             
               privileges
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               by
               Rescripts
               from
               the
               Emperours
               ,
            
             and
             censures
             it
             ,
             (
             in
             them
             that
             so
             sought
             it
             )
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               not
               agreeable
               to
               the
               Ecclesiastical
               Canons
               ,
               repressing
            
             the
             ambition
             of
             the
             Bishops
             ,
             but
             not
             cassating
             the
             Rescripts
             ,
             nor
             withdrawing
             the
             honour
             from
             the
             Metropolis
             so
             erected
             ;
             Of
             this
             
               Canon
               Balsamon
            
             saith
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             was
             made
             ,
             many
             Emperours
             had
             erected
             many
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             and
             naming
             three
             ,
             adds
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             
               other
               Bishopricks
               
               were
               thus
               honoured
               ,
            
             and
             that
             the
             Emperours
             did
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               according
               to
               the
               power
               that
               was
               given
               them
               .
            
             Where
             it
             is
             farther
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             1.
             that
             this
             Councel
             was
             within
             20
             years
             after
             that
             grant
             of
             Valentinian
             ,
             and
             consequently
             ,
             if
             Balsamon
             say
             right
             ,
             (
             that
             at
             that
             time
             many
             Emperours
             had
             erected
             many
             )
             there
             must
             needs
             be
             others
             before
             Valentinian
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             17
             th
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             doth
             more
             expresly
             attribute
             this
             power
             to
             the
             
               Prince
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               If
               a
               city
               be
               built
               or
               restored
               by
               the
               Kings
               power
               ,
               let
               the
               Ecclesiastical
               order
               follow
               the
               Political
               .
            
             And
             the
             same
             power
             is
             acknowledged
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             Prince
             by
             the
             
               Councel
               in
               Trullo
               Can
            
             :
             38.
             
             And
             then
             3.
             that
             these
             two
             last
             Canons
             are
             reconciled
             with
             that
             12
             th
             of
             Chalcedon
             ,
             by
             the
             law
             of
             
               Alexius
               Comnenus
            
             ,
             and
             assented
             to
             by
             the
             Synod
             under
             him
             ,
             See
             
               Balsam
               :
               in
               Can
            
             :
             38.
             
             
               Concil
               :
               in
               Trullo
            
             ,
             who
             concludes
             that
             the
             King
             might
             doe
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               upon
               
               his
               own
               incitation
               or
               motion
               ,
               but
               it
               should
               not
               be
               lawful
               for
               any
               by
               base
               sollicitation
               to
               seek
               or
               obtain
               it
               ,
            
             adding
             that
             in
             that
             case
             ,
             
               upon
               any
               such
               Rescript
               of
               the
               Emperour
               for
               such
               erection
               ,
               it
               might
               be
               lawful
               for
               the
               Patriarch
               to
               suspend
               the
               confirmation
               of
               the
               Charter
               ,
               untill
               he
               represented
               to
               the
               Emperour
               what
               the
               Canons
               were
               in
               that
               case
               ,
               and
               understood
               if
               the
               Emperour
               did
               it
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               from
               his
               own
               motion
               ,
               which
               appearing
               ,
               the
               Patriarch
               was
               to
               admit
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             And
             accordingly
             the
             same
             Balsamon
             (
             on
             
               Concil
               :
               Carthag
               :
               Can
            
             :
             16.
             )
             doth
             upon
             that
             Canon
             professedly
             found
             the
             authority
             of
             
               Princes
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               —
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               to
               advance
               an
               Episcopal
               See
               into
               a
               Metropolis
               ,
               and
               anew
               to
               constitute
               Bishops
               and
               Metropolitanes
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             15.
             
             
             As
             for
             the
             transplanting
             it
             also
             from
             one
             city
             to
             another
             ,
             besides
             that
             the
             power
             of
             doing
             that
             ,
             is
             consequent
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             the
             examples
             of
             this
             practise
             are
             antient
             ,
             
             and
             frequent
             in
             this
             kingdome
             ;
             The
             passage
             set
             down
             out
             of
             the
             Annals
             of
             Gisburne
             may
             be
             sufficient
             ,
             From
             Caeruske
             
             the
             Metropolitan
             seat
             was
             translated
             to
             S.
             Davids
             by
             
               King
               Arthur
            
             ,
             where
             it
             continued
             till
             Henry
             I.
             and
             then
             was
             reduced
             to
             Canterbury
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             16.
             
             In
             like
             manner
             't
             is
             evident
             that
             the
             Kings
             of
             England
             have
             
               divided
               Bishopricks
            
             ,
             and
             erected
             new
             ones
             ;
             About
             the
             year
             630.
             
             
               Kinigilsa
               King
            
             of
             the
             West-Saxons
             ,
             and
             Oswald
             of
             the
             
               Northumbers
               ,
               erected
            
             an
             
               Episcopal
               See
            
             at
             Dorchester
             ,
             and
             placed
             Birinus
             in
             it
             ,
             so
             saith
             
               Guil
               :
               Malmesb
               :
               de
               Gest
               :
               Pontif
               :
               Angl
               :
            
             l.
             2.
             
             About
             the
             year
             660
             ,
             
               Kenewalch
               King
            
             of
             the
             
               West-Saxons
               divided
            
             this
             Bishoprick
             ,
             and
             left
             part
             to
             Dorchester
             ,
             and
             assigned
             the
             western
             part
             to
             be
             the
             Diocese
             of
             the
             
               new
               Bishop
            
             ,
             which
             he
             constituted
             at
             Winchester
             ,
             so
             saith
             
               Hen
               :
               Huntingd
               :
               Hist
            
             :
             l.
             3.
             
             Then
             Winchester
             was
             subdivided
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               King
               Ina
            
             ,
             who
             also
             erected
             a
             
               new
               Bishoprick
            
             at
             Sherburne
             ,
             and
             gave
             it
             to
             Aldelme
             ,
             so
             
               Henr
               :
               Huntingd
            
             :
             l.
             4.
             and
             
               Guil
               :
               Malm
               :
               de
               Reg
               :
               Angl
               :
            
             l.
             1.
             c.
             2.
             
             And
             after
             the
             Norman
             conquest
             ,
             Henry
             I.
             divided
             Cambridgeshire
             from
             the
             See
             of
             Lincolne
             ,
             and
             erected
             the
             Bishoprick
             of
             Elie
             ,
             so
             saith
             
               Guiliel
               :
               Malm
               :
               de
               Gest
               :
               Pontif
               :
               Angl
            
             :
             l.
             4.
             and
             
             
               Florentius
               Wigorn
               :
               Anno
            
             1109.
             who
             lived
             at
             that
             time
             .
             So
             also
             saith
             Eadmer
             with
             some
             variation
             ,
             
               Regi
               ,
               Archiepiscopo
               ,
               caeterísque
               Principibus
               regni
               visum
               fuit
               de
               ipsâ
               Parochiâ
               (
               Lincolniae
               )
               sumendum
               ,
               quo
               fieret
               alter
               Episcopatus
               ,
               cujus
               cathedra
               Principatus
               poneretur
               in
               Abbatiâ
               de
               Eli
               ,
               It
               seemed
               good
               to
               the
               King
               ,
               the
               Archbishop
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Princes
               of
               the
               kingdome
               to
               take
               as
               much
               out
               of
               the
               Diocese
               of
               Lincolne
               ,
               as
               would
               make
               another
               Bishoprick
               ,
               the
               chair
               whereof
               should
               be
               set
               up
               in
               the
               Abbacie
               of
               Elie.
            
             Adding
             indeed
             that
             Anselme
             (
             a
             zealous
             ,
             promoter
             of
             the
             Papal
             authority
             ,
             as
             the
             
               author
               Eadmer
            
             was
             a
             disciple
             and
             admirer
             of
             Anselme
             )
             wrote
             to
             
               Pope
               Paschalis
            
             ,
             desiring
             his
             consent
             to
             it
             ,
             as
             a
             thing
             fit
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             and
             yet
             to
             which
             he
             assures
             him
             he
             would
             not
             give
             his
             consent
             ,
             but
             
               salvâ
               authoritate
               Papae
               ,
               reserving
               the
               rights
               of
               the
               Pope
            
             ;
             Which
             though
             it
             doth
             suppose
             the
             Popes
             pretensions
             to
             that
             
               authority
               at
               that
            
             time
             ,
             and
             
               Anselm's
               yeilding
            
             it
             to
             him
             ,
             yet
             it
             proves
             also
             this
             right
             of
             our
             Kings
             to
             have
             been
             even
             then
             adhered
             to
             ,
             preserved
             ,
             and
             exercised
             by
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             former
             authors
             had
             set
             it
             down
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             17.
             
             
             Of
             this
             nature
             also
             is
             the
             authority
             of
             Kings
             in
             exempting
             any
             Ecclesiastical
             person
             from
             the
             
               Bishops
               Jurisdiction
            
             ,
             and
             granting
             
               Episcopal
               Jurisdiction
            
             to
             such
             person
             ,
             which
             is
             largely
             asserted
             and
             exemplified
             in
             Cawdries
             case
             5.
             
             Report
             .
             14.
             
             One
             instance
             of
             this
             will
             serve
             for
             all
             ,
             that
             of
             William
             the
             Conqueror
             ,
             who
             exempted
             
               Battel
               Abbey
            
             in
             Sussex
             from
             the
             Jurisdiction
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Chichester
            
             ,
             and
             gave
             the
             
               Abbat
               Episcopal
               Jurisdiction
            
             in
             his
             Territorie
             and
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Charter
             are
             produced
             by
             M
             r
             ▪
             Selden
             on
             
               Eadmer
               ,
               Hoc
               regali
               authoritate
               &
               Episcoporum
               ac
               Baronum
               meorum
               attestatione
               constituo
               ,
               I
               appoint
               this
               by
               my
               royal
               authority
               by
               the
               attestation
               of
               my
               Bishops
               and
               Barons
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             18.
             
             
             Adde
             even
             unto
             this
             ,
             that
             even
             the
             
               Westerne
               Princes
            
             (
             in
             those
             parts
             where
             the
             
               Bishops
               of
               Rome
            
             have
             much
             hightned
             their
             power
             ,
             ever
             since
             the
             Kings
             were
             Christians
             )
             the
             
               German
               Emperours
            
             ,
             the
             
               Kings
               of
               France
            
             and
             England
             ,
             alwayes
             claimed
             to
             be
             founders
             of
             all
             Bishopricks
             in
             their
             
               Dominions
               ,
               Patrons
            
             of
             them
             to
             bestow
             them
             by
             investiture
             ,
             that
             the
             
             Kings
             of
             France
             and
             England
             often
             claimed
             and
             were
             acknowledged
             to
             have
             right
             ,
             that
             no
             Legate
             from
             Rome
             might
             come
             into
             the
             Land
             ,
             and
             use
             jurisdiction
             without
             their
             leave
             ;
             All
             which
             put
             together
             are
             a
             foundation
             for
             this
             power
             of
             the
             Princes
             to
             erect
             or
             translate
             a
             Patriarchate
             ,
             It
             being
             withall
             acknowledged
             that
             
               our
               Kings
            
             have
             the
             same
             authority
             in
             their
             Territories
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Roman
               Emperour
            
             had
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             19.
             
             
             And
             the
             reason
             of
             all
             this
             is
             clear
             ,
             not
             only
             from
             the
             
               supreme
               authority
               of
               Kings
            
             in
             all
             sorts
             of
             causes
             ,
             even
             those
             of
             the
             *
             Church
             ,
             as
             
             well
             as
             Civil
             (
             as
             might
             be
             proved
             at
             large
             ,
             if
             here
             it
             were
             needful
             ,
             and
             cannot
             be
             reasonably
             so
             confined
             ,
             as
             not
             to
             belong
             to
             a
             matter
             of
             this
             nature
             )
             but
             peculiarly
             from
             that
             which
             hath
             
             been
             already
             noted
             (
             and
             expressely
             ,
             ordered
             ,
             Can.
             17.
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             even
             now
             cited
             )
             of
             the
             
               Ecclesiastical
               division
            
             of
             Provinces
             &c
             :
             
             following
             the
             civil
             ,
             For
             1.
             it
             being
             certainly
             in
             the
             power
             of
             the
             King
             to
             place
             his
             Praetoria
             or
             courts
             of
             Assizes
             ,
             where
             he
             please
             ;
             and
             2.
             it
             being
             the
             known
             original
             of
             Metropoles
             ,
             and
             divisions
             of
             Provinces
             (
             as
             Strabo
             saith
             ,
             Geogr.
             l.
             17.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Provinces
               are
               variously
               distributed
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               because
               the
               Romanes
               divide
               them
               not
               by
               tribes
               or
               families
               ,
               but
               after
               another
               manner
               in
               relation
               to
               the
               cities
               ,
               where
               they
               set
               up
               their
               courts
               of
               Assizes
            
             —
             )
             and
             again
             it
             being
             most
             reasonable
             ,
             that
             as
             any
             new
             
               accident
               raises
            
             one
             city
             to
             a
             greater
             populousnesse
             ,
             or
             depresses
             another
             ,
             so
             for
             the
             convenience
             of
             the
             people
             one
             should
             be
             made
             the
             seat
             of
             Judicature
             ,
             the
             other
             cease
             to
             be
             so
             ,
             (
             and
             no
             man
             so
             fit
             to
             passe
             the
             judgement
             when
             this
             should
             be
             ,
             as
             the
             King
             )
             and
             3.
             the
             very
             same
             reasons
             of
             convenience
             
             moving
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             State
             ,
             the
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             over
             them
             Metropolitanes
             and
             Primates
             having
             their
             judicatures
             ,
             and
             audiences
             ,
             which
             in
             all
             reason
             must
             be
             so
             disposed
             of
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             most
             for
             the
             convenience
             of
             administration
             ,
             that
             they
             and
             all
             under
             them
             may
             do
             their
             duties
             with
             most
             facility
             ,
             and
             to
             greatest
             advantage
             ,
             and
             lastly
             there
             being
             no
             obstacle
             imaginable
             from
             any
             contrary
             constitution
             either
             of
             Christ
             or
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             against
             which
             the
             Prince
             can
             be
             said
             to
             offend
             either
             directly
             or
             interpretatively
             (
             as
             I
             suppose
             is
             already
             clear
             from
             the
             refutation
             of
             the
             plea
             from
             
               S.
               Peters
               universal
               Pastorship
            
             )
             whensoever
             he
             shall
             think
             fit
             to
             make
             such
             changes
             ,
             the
             Conclusion
             is
             rational
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             
               evident
               ;
               just
            
             that
             it
             should
             be
             so
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             cleare
             ,
             that
             elsewhere
             it
             hath
             oft
             been
             so
             
               de
               facto
            
             ,
             (
             and
             appointed
             by
             the
             Canon
             of
             
               Chalcedon
               de
               jure
            
             )
             that
             the
             King
             may
             erect
             a
             Primacy
             when
             he
             please
             (
             and
             so
             it
             is
             certain
             that
             
               King
               Ethelbert
            
             at
             the
             time
             of
             
               Augustines
               planting
            
             the
             faith
             ,
             did
             at
             Canterbury
             ,
             the
             seate
             of
             his
             
               Kingdome
               ,
               Imperit
               sui
               totius
               Metropolis
            
             saith
             Bede
             l.
             1.
             c
             25.
             )
             &
             conquently
             
             remove
             it
             from
             any
             other
             place
             at
             his
             pleasure
             :
             Had
             it
             not
             been
             for
             this
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             assignable
             ,
             why
             ,
             this
             nation
             being
             in
             Constantines
             time
             under
             three
             Metropolitans
             ,
             the
             
               Arch-bishop
               of
               York
            
             (
             and
             the
             Primacy
             belonging
             to
             that
             city
             ,
             as
             being
             then
             the
             
               Emperours
               seat
            
             ,
             where
             
               Septimius
               Severus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Constantius
               Chlorus
            
             died
             ,
             and
             the
             Praetorium
             of
             the
             Diocese
             of
             Britannie
             )
             the
             
               Arch-bishop
               of
               London
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Arch-bishop
               of
               Caerusk
               in
               Monmouthshire
            
             ,
             either
             1.
             there
             should
             be
             (
             as
             there
             was
             )
             an
             addition
             of
             
               two
               Provinces
            
             more
             ,
             Valentia
             ,
             and
             
               Flavia
               Caesariensis
            
             ,
             or
             2.
             the
             
               Metropolitical
               power
            
             should
             be
             removed
             from
             London
             to
             Canterbury
             (
             as
             also
             from
             Caerusk
             to
             S.
             David's
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             )
             and
             the
             Primacie
             from
             Yorke
             to
             Canterbury
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             20.
             
             
             Now
             what
             is
             thus
             vested
             in
             the
             
               Regal
               power
            
             ,
             cannot
             be
             
               taken
               away
            
             by
             
               forein
               laws
            
             ,
             or
             by
             prescription
             be
             so
             alienated
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             remains
             perfectly
             lawful
             for
             the
             Prince
             to
             resume
             it
             .
          
           
             sect
             ;
             .
             21.
             
             That
             laws
             made
             at
             Rome
             doe
             not
             take
             away
             the
             liberty
             of
             another
             
               national
               Church
            
             to
             make
             
               contrary
               
               laws
            
             thereunto
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             such
             obviation
             no
             Schisme
             is
             incurred
             ,
             we
             finde
             delivered
             in
             the
             Councel
             of
             
               Carthage
               (
               Can
            
             :
             71.
             according
             to
             Balsamon's
             division
             )
             And
             though
             the
             Canon
             be
             not
             set
             down
             by
             Binius
             ,
             yet
             both
             he
             and
             Baronius
             acknowledge
             ,
             that
             what
             was
             contain'd
             in
             that
             particular
             Canon
             ,
             was
             the
             main
             occasion
             of
             the
             Synod
             ;
             And
             the
             Antiquity
             thereof
             is
             considerable
             ,
             those
             Canons
             being
             made
             ,
             say
             Baronius
             and
             
               Binius
               ,
               Anno
            
             401.
             
          
           
             §
             .
             22.
             
             So
             likewise
             that
             a
             Law
             (
             though
             made
             by
             a
             
               General
               Councel
            
             and
             with
             the
             consent
             of
             all
             
               Christian
               Princes
            
             ,
             yet
             )
             if
             it
             have
             respect
             to
             a
             
               civil
               right
            
             ,
             may
             ,
             in
             this
             or
             that
             nation
             ,
             be
             repealed
             ,
             is
             the
             judgment
             of
             
               Roger
               Widrington
            
             (
             or
             
               Father
               Preston
            
             )
             in
             his
             
               last
               rejoinder
               to
               Fitzherbert
            
             c.
             11.
             
             §
             .
             44.
             and
             c.
             8.
             he
             confirms
             it
             by
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Zuarez
             ,
             l.
             2.
             
               de
               leg
            
             :
             c.
             19.
             and
             the
             reason
             of
             Zuarez
             is
             ,
             because
             such
             a
             law
             made
             at
             a
             general
             meeting
             of
             Princes
             ,
             is
             intrinsecally
             a
             
               civil
               law
            
             ;
             and
             hath
             not
             force
             by
             virtue
             of
             the
             law
             to
             binde
             the
             subjects
             of
             any
             
               particular
               kingdome
            
             ,
             or
             Common-wealth
             ,
             any
             otherwise
             
             then
             as
             it
             is
             enacted
             ,
             or
             received
             by
             the
             Governors
             and
             subjects
             of
             that
             kingdome
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             23.
             
             And
             this
             is
             affirmed
             ,
             and
             extended
             by
             Balsamon
             to
             all
             Canons
             in
             general
             ,
             as
             the
             judgment
             of
             learned
             men
             ,
             in
             his
             notes
             on
             that
             16
             th
             Canon
             of
             the
             
               Councel
               of
               Carthage
            
             before
             cited
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             24.
             
             
             And
             for
             the
             matter
             of
             Prescription
             ,
             the
             decision
             of
             †
             Sayr
             is
             worth
             observing
             ,
             that
             in
             such
             cases
             as
             these
             ,
             
               Cum
               Praescriptio
               sit
               tantùm
               de
               jure
               Civili
               &
               Canonico
               ,
               When
               the
               Prescription
               is
               neither
               of
               the
               law
               of
               Nature
               ,
               nor
               the
               Divine
               law
               ,
               nor
               the
               law
               of
               Nations
               ,
               but
               only
               of
               the
               Civil
               and
               Canon
               law
               ,
            
             there
             
               non
               plus
               se
               extendit
               quàm
               unusquisque
               supremus
               Princeps
               in
               suo
               Regno
               eam
               suis
               legibus
               extensam
               esse
               velit
               ,
               it
               extends
               no
               farther
               then
               every
               supreme
               Prince
               in
               his
               Realm
               by
               his
               laws
               is
               supposed
               to
               will
               that
               it
               shall
               be
               extended
               ,
            
             which
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             cannot
             be
             supposed
             ,
             in
             matters
             of
             this
             nature
             ,
             of
             
               exempting
               subjects
               from
               making
               their
               appeal
               to
               their
               King
               ,
            
             for
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               non
               est
               de
               mente
               alicujus
               Principis
               ut
               quispiam
               subditorum
               possit
               praescribere
               quòd
               ad
               Principem
               ab
               
               eo
               non
               appelletur
               ,
               aut
               quòd
               eum
               coercere
               non
               potest
               ,
               quando
               ratio
               &
               justitia
               postulat
               .
               It
               is
               not
               imaginable
               to
               be
               the
               minde
               of
               any
               Prince
               ,
               that
               any
               of
               his
               subjects
               should
               be
               able
               to
               prescribe
               that
               he
               is
               not
               to
               appeal
               to
               his
               Prince
            
             (
             but
             to
             some
             other
             )
             
               or
               that
               his
               Prince
               may
               not
               punish
               him
               when
               reason
               and
               justice
               requires
               .
            
             It
             were
             easie
             to
             apply
             this
             distinctly
             to
             the
             confirming
             of
             all
             ,
             that
             I
             here
             pretend
             ,
             but
             I
             shall
             not
             thus
             expatiate
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
             Their
             third
             Evidence
             from
             our
             casting
             off
             Obedience
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             at
             the
             Reformation
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             UPon
             that
             one
             ground
             laid
             in
             the
             
               former
               Chapter
            
             ,
             the
             power
             of
             Kings
             in
             general
             ,
             and
             
               particularly
               ad
               hunc
               actum
            
             to
             
               remove
               Patriarchates
            
             ;
             whatsoever
             can
             be
             pretended
             against
             the
             lawfulnesse
             of
             the
             Reformation
             in
             
               these
               kingdomes
            
             ,
             will
             easily
             be
             answered
             .
             And
             therefore
             supposing
             the
             third
             ,
             and
             last
             objection
             to
             lie
             against
             our
             Reformation
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             founded
             in
             the
             casting
             off
             that
             obedience
             to
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             which
             was
             formerly
             paid
             him
             by
             our
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             people
             under
             them
             ,
             I
             shall
             now
             briefly
             descend
             to
             that
             ,
             first
             laying
             down
             the
             matter
             of
             fact
             ,
             as
             it
             lies
             visible
             in
             our
             records
             ,
             and
             then
             vindicating
             it
             from
             all
             blame
             of
             schisme
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             the
             premises
             can
             any
             way
             be
             thought
             to
             adhere
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             And
             first
             for
             the
             matter
             of
             fact
             ,
             it
             is
             acknowledged
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             
               King
               Henry
            
             VIII
             .
             the
             Papal
             (
             and
             with
             it
             all
             forein
             )
             power
             in
             
             Ecclesiastical
             affairs
             was
             both
             by
             acts
             of
             Convocation
             of
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             and
             by
             statutes
             or
             acts
             of
             
               Parliament
               ,
               cast
            
             out
             of
             this
             kingdome
             .
             The
             first
             step
             or
             degree
             hereof
             was
             the
             
               Clergie's
               synodical
               recognizing
            
             the
             
               King
               ,
               singularem
               Ecclesiae
               Anglicanae
               Protectorem
               ,
               unicum
               &
               supremum
               Dominum
               —
               the
               singular
               Protector
               ,
               the
               only
               and
               supreme
               Head
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               ,
            
             Upon
             this
             were
             built
             the
             statutes
             of
             24
             Hen
             :
             VIII
             .
             prohibiting
             all
             Appeals
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             
               determining
               all
               Ecclesiasticall
               suits
               ,
               and
               controversies
               within
               the
               kingdome
            
             ;
             The
             statute
             of
             25
             Hen
             :
             VIII
             .
             for
             the
             
               manner
               of
               electing
               and
               consecrating
               of
               Archbishops
               and
               Bishops
               ,
            
             and
             another
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             year
             ,
             
               prohibiting
               the
               payment
               of
               all
               impositions
               to
               the
               court
               of
               Rome
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               obtaining
               all
               such
               dispensations
               from
               the
               See
               of
               Canterbury
               ,
               which
               were
               formerly
               procured
               from
               the
               Popes
               of
               Rome
               ,
            
             and
             that
             of
             26
             Hen
             :
             VIII
             .
             
               declaring
               the
               King
               to
               be
               the
               supreme
               head
            
             (
             which
             in
             
               Queen
               Elizabeth's
               reign
            
             was
             ,
             to
             avoid
             mistakes
             ,
             changed
             into
             
               supreme
               Governour
               )
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               ,
               and
               to
               have
               all
               honours
               and
               praeeminencies
               ,
               
               which
               were
               annexed
               to
               that
               title
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             This
             was
             in
             the
             next
             place
             attended
             with
             the
             submission
             of
             the
             Clergie
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             agreed
             on
             ,
             first
             in
             Convocation
             ,
             and
             afterward
             in
             25
             Hen
             :
             VIII
             .
             enacted
             by
             Parliament
             ,
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             that
             
               as
               it
               was
               by
               the
               Clergie
               acknowledged
               that
               the
               Convocation
               of
               the
               Clergie
               then
               was
               ,
               alwaies
               had
               been
               ,
               and
               ought
               to
               be
               assembled
               by
               the
               Kings
               writ
               ,
               and
               as
               they
               submitting
               themselves
               to
               the
               King's
               Majestie
               had
               promised
            
             in
             verbo
             sacerdotis
             ,
             
               that
               they
               would
               never
               from
               thenceforth
               presume
               to
               attempt
               ,
               allege
               ,
               claim
               ,
               or
               put
               in
               ure
               ,
               enact
               ,
               promulge
               ,
               or
               exercise
               any
               new
               Canons
               ,
               Constitutions
               ,
               Ordinances
               Provincial
               or
               other
               —
               unlesse
               the
               King
               's
               most
               royal
               assent
               may
               to
               them
               be
               had
               to
               make
               ,
               promulge
               ,
               &
               execute
               the
               same
               —
               so
               it
               was
               now
               enacted
               ,
               that
               none
               of
               the
               Clergie
               should
               enact
               ,
               promulge
               ,
               or
               execute
               any
               such
               Canons
               ,
               Constitutions
               ,
               and
               Ordinances
               Provincial
               or
               Synodical
               ,
               without
               assent
               and
               authority
               received
               from
               the
               King
               ,
               upon
               pain
               of
               imprisonment
               ,
               and
               fine
               at
               the
               Kings
               pleasure
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             The
             third
             and
             last
             step
             of
             this
             began
             with
             the
             debate
             of
             the
             Vniversities
             ,
             
             and
             most
             
               eminent
               Monasteries
            
             in
             the
             kingdome
             ;
             
               An
               aliquid
               authoritatis
               in
               hoc
               Regno
               Angliae
               Pontifici
               Romano
               de
               jure
               competat
               ,
               plusquam
               alii
               cuiquam
               Episcopo
               extero
               ?
               Whether
               any
               authority
               did
               of
               right
               belong
               to
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               in
               the
               Kingdome
               of
               England
               more
               then
               to
               any
               other
               forein
               Bishop
               ?
            
             and
             upon
             agitation
             ,
             it
             was
             generally
             defined
             in
             the
             negative
             ,
             and
             so
             returned
             testified
             under
             their
             hands
             and
             seals
             .
             The
             like
             was
             soon
             after
             concluded
             ,
             and
             resolved
             by
             the
             Convocation
             of
             the
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             and
             subscribed
             and
             confirmed
             by
             their
             
               corporal
               oathes
            
             :
             And
             at
             that
             time
             was
             written
             and
             printed
             the
             
               Tract
               de
               verâ
               differentiâ
               Regiae
               et
               Ecclesiasticae
               potestatis
               ,
            
             set
             out
             by
             the
             Prelates
             ,
             the
             chief
             composers
             of
             which
             were
             ,
             
               John
               Stokesly
               ,
               Bishop
               of
               London
               ;
               Cutbert
               Tunstall
               ,
               Bishop
               of
               Durham
               ;
               Stephen
               Gardiner
               ,
               Bishop
               of
               Winchester
            
             ;
             and
             
               D
               r
               Thirlby
            
             afterward
             Bishop
             ;
             where
             from
             the
             practise
             of
             the
             Saxon
             ,
             and
             first
             
               Norman
               Kings
            
             they
             evidence
             the
             truth
             of
             that
             Negative
             out
             of
             story
             .
             And
             what
             was
             thus
             concluded
             by
             the
             Clergie
             was
             soon
             turned
             into
             an
             Act
             of
             Parliament
             
             also
             in
             28
             Hen
             :
             VIII
             .
             called
             
               An
               Act
               extinguishing
               the
               authority
               of
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               ,
            
             and
             prescribing
             an
             oath
             to
             all
             
               Officers
               Ecclesiastical
            
             ,
             and
             lay
             ,
             of
             
               renouncing
               the
               said
               Bishop
               and
               his
               authority
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             By
             these
             three
             degrees
             it
             is
             acknowledged
             that
             the
             Bishops
             and
             Clergie
             first
             ,
             then
             the
             
               King
               confirming
            
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Convocation
             ,
             and
             after
             making
             Acts
             of
             Parliament
             to
             the
             same
             purposes
             ,
             renounced
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               See
            
             ,
             and
             cast
             it
             out
             of
             this
             Island
             ;
             
             and
             though
             the
             
               first
               Act
            
             of
             the
             Clergie
             in
             this
             were
             so
             induced
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             believe
             that
             nothing
             but
             the
             
               apprehension
               of
               dangers
            
             which
             hung
             over
             them
             (
             by
             a
             Praemunire
             incurred
             by
             them
             )
             could
             probably
             have
             inclined
             them
             to
             it
             ,
             &
             therefore
             I
             shall
             not
             pretend
             that
             it
             was
             perfectly
             an
             act
             of
             their
             
               first
               will
            
             ,
             and
             choice
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             the
             
               necessity
               of
               affairs
            
             recommended
             to
             them
             ,
             yet
             the
             matter
             of
             right
             being
             upon
             that
             occasion
             taken
             into
             their
             most
             serious
             debate
             in
             a
             synodical
             way
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             a
             fit
             and
             commodious
             expression
             uniformly
             pitch'd
             upon
             by
             joynt
             consent
             of
             both
             houses
             of
             the
             
             Convocation
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             to
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             did
             believe
             what
             they
             did
             professe
             ,
             the
             fear
             being
             the
             occasion
             of
             their
             debates
             ,
             but
             the
             reasons
             or
             arguments
             offered
             in
             debate
             ,
             the
             causes
             (
             as
             in
             all
             charity
             we
             are
             to
             judge
             )
             of
             their
             decision
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             But
             I
             shall
             not
             lay
             much
             weight
             on
             that
             judgment
             of
             charity
             ,
             because
             if
             that
             which
             was
             thus
             determined
             by
             King
             and
             Bishops
             were
             falsly
             determined
             ,
             then
             the
             voluntarinesse
             ,
             or
             freenesse
             of
             the
             determination
             will
             not
             be
             able
             to
             justifie
             it
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             if
             the
             determination
             were
             just
             ,
             then
             was
             there
             truth
             in
             it
             ,
             antecedent
             to
             ,
             and
             abstracted
             from
             the
             determination
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             their
             duty
             so
             to
             determine
             ,
             and
             crime
             that
             they
             were
             unwilling
             to
             doe
             it
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             whole
             difficulty
             devolves
             to
             this
             
               one
               enquiry
            
             ,
             Whether
             at
             that
             time
             of
             the
             reign
             of
             Henry
             VIII
             .
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             were
             
               supreme
               head
            
             ,
             or
             Governour
             of
             this
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             or
             had
             any
             
               real
               authority
            
             here
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             might
             not
             
               lawfully
               remove
            
             from
             him
             to
             some
             other
             ,
             viz
             :
             to
             the
             
               Archbishop
               of
               Canterbury
            
             ,
             if
             he
             pleased
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             And
             this
             is
             presently
             determined
             upon
             the
             grounds
             which
             have
             been
             formerly
             laid
             ,
             and
             confirmed
             to
             have
             truth
             in
             them
             .
             For
             the
             pretensions
             for
             the
             
               Popes
               supremacy
            
             of
             power
             among
             us
             being
             by
             the
             assertors
             thereof
             founded
             in
             one
             of
             these
             three
             ,
             either
             in
             his
             right
             (
             as
             S.
             
               Peter's
               successour
            
             )
             to
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             ,
             that
             including
             his
             power
             over
             England
             ,
             as
             a
             member
             of
             the
             whole
             ;
             or
             2.
             by
             the
             
               paternal
               right
            
             which
             by
             
               Augustine's
               planting
            
             the
             Gospel
             among
             the
             Saxons
             is
             thought
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             Pope
             (
             and
             his
             successours
             )
             that
             sent
             him
             ;
             or
             3.
             in
             the
             
               voluntary
               concession
            
             of
             some
             Kings
             ;
             the
             two
             former
             of
             these
             have
             been
             largely
             disproved
             already
             ,
             Chap.
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             and
             6.
             in
             discourses
             purposely
             ,
             and
             distinctly
             applied
             to
             those
             pretensions
             .
             
             And
             for
             the
             third
             ,
             that
             will
             appear
             to
             have
             received
             its
             determination
             also
             ,
             I.
             by
             the
             absolutenesse
             of
             the
             power
             of
             our
             Princes
             ,
             (
             to
             which
             purpose
             I
             shall
             mention
             but
             one
             passage
             ,
             that
             of
             †
             
               G.
               de
               Heimburg
            
             ,
             some
             
               two
               hundred
               years
            
             since
             in
             the
             last
             words
             of
             his
             
               tract
               de
               Injust
               :
               Vsurp
               :
               Pap
               :
            
             where
             speaking
             of
             the
             Emperors
             making
             oath
             to
             the
             
             Pope
             ,
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               this
               is
               a
               submission
               in
               him
               ,
               and
               a
               patience
               above
               what
               any
               other
               suffers
               ,
            
             and
             proves
             it
             by
             this
             argument
             ,
             
               Nam
               eximius
               Rex
               Angliae
               ,
               Franciae
               ,
               Dux
               ,
               Marchio
               ,
               non
               astringitur
               Papae
               quocunque
               juramento
               :
               factus
               Imperator
               jurare
               tenetur
               secundum
               Decretales
               eorum
               fabulosè
               fictas
               ,
               ita
               ut
               supremus
               Monarcha
               magis
               servilis
               conditionis
               ,
               quàm
               quilibet
               ejus
               inferior
               fieri
               censeatur
               ,
               The
               King
               of
               England
               and
               France
               ,
               any
               Duke
               or
               Marquesse
               of
               that
               Kingdome
               is
               not
               bound
               to
               the
               Pope
               by
               any
               oath
               ,
               yet
               the
               Emperour
               at
               his
               creation
               is
               thus
               bound
               to
               swear
               according
               to
               the
               Popes
               Decretals
               fabulously
               invented
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               supreme
               Monarch
               is
               made
               to
               be
               of
               a
               more
               servile
               condition
               then
               any
               his
               inferior
               Prince
            
             —
             .
             )
             And
             2.
             by
             the
             rights
             of
             Kings
             to
             remove
             or
             
               erect
               Patriarchates
            
             ,
             and
             will
             be
             farther
             confirmed
             in
             the
             Negative
             ,
             if
             answer
             be
             first
             given
             to
             this
             Dilemma
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             
             The
             authority
             of
             the
             Pope
             in
             this
             Kingdome
             ,
             which
             is
             pretended
             to
             be
             held
             by
             the
             concession
             of
             our
             Kings
             ,
             was
             either
             so
             originally
             vested
             in
             our
             Kings
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             
               lawfully
               grant
            
             it
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             pleased
             ,
             
             pleased
             ,
             and
             so
             did
             lawfully
             grant
             it
             to
             the
             Pope
             ;
             or
             it
             was
             not
             thus
             originally
             vested
             in
             our
             Kings
             ;
             If
             it
             were
             not
             ,
             then
             was
             that
             grant
             an
             
               invalid
               ,
               null
            
             grant
             ,
             for
             such
             are
             all
             concessions
             of
             that
             which
             is
             not
             ours
             to
             give
             ,
             
               presumptions
               ,
               invasions
               ,
               robberies
            
             in
             the
             giver
             ,
             which
             devolve
             no
             right
             to
             the
             receiver
             ,
             and
             then
             this
             is
             a
             pitiful
             claim
             which
             is
             thus
             founded
             :
             But
             if
             that
             authority
             were
             so
             vested
             in
             the
             
               Kings
               of
               England
            
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             lawfully
             grant
             it
             to
             whom
             they
             pleased
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             only
             way
             by
             which
             the
             Pope
             can
             pretend
             to
             hold
             any
             thing
             by
             this
             title
             of
             
               regal
               concession
            
             )
             then
             certainly
             the
             same
             power
             remains
             still
             vested
             in
             the
             King
             to
             dispose
             it
             from
             him
             to
             some
             other
             as
             freely
             ,
             as
             the
             same
             King
             may
             upon
             good
             causes
             remove
             his
             Chancellour
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             of
             his
             officers
             from
             his
             place
             ,
             and
             commit
             it
             to
             another
             (
             this
             way
             of
             arguing
             is
             made
             use
             of
             by
             the
             Bishops
             in
             
               Convocation
               ,
               Anno
               Chr
            
             :
             1537.
             in
             the
             Book
             by
             them
             intituled
             [
             
               The
               Institution
               of
               a
               Christian
               man
            
             ]
             )
             Or
             if
             the
             same
             power
             doe
             not
             still
             remain
             in
             the
             King
             ,
             then
             is
             the
             
               King's
               power
            
             diminished
             ,
             and
             he
             consequently
             
             by
             this
             his
             act
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             treat
             ,
             become
             
               lesse
               a
               King
            
             ,
             then
             formerly
             he
             was
             ,
             And
             then
             we
             know
             that
             such
             acts
             which
             make
             him
             so
             ,
             are
             
               invalid
               acts
            
             ,
             it
             being
             acknowledged
             to
             be
             above
             the
             power
             of
             the
             King
             himself
             ,
             to
             divest
             himself
             and
             his
             successors
             of
             any
             part
             of
             his
             regal
             power
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             9.
             
             
             To
             which
             purpose
             it
             must
             be
             observed
             ,
             1.
             that
             some
             things
             are
             so
             ours
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             freely
             use
             them
             ,
             but
             cannot
             freely
             part
             with
             them
             ,
             as
             all
             those
             things
             ,
             wherein
             our
             propriety
             is
             not
             confined
             to
             our
             persons
             ,
             but
             intailed
             on
             our
             posterity
             ,
             and
             such
             the
             
               regal
               power
            
             is
             supposed
             to
             be
             ;
             2.
             
             That
             as
             some
             things
             which
             are
             part
             of
             our
             
               personal
               proprieties
            
             ,
             are
             so
             
               freely
               ours
            
             to
             give
             ,
             that
             when
             they
             are
             given
             ,
             they
             are
             departed
             out
             of
             our selves
             ,
             and
             cannot
             justly
             be
             by
             us
             resumed
             again
             (
             in
             which
             case
             that
             Maxim
             of
             the
             
               civil
               law
            
             stands
             good
             ,
             
               data
               eo
               ipso
               qu●
               dantur
               ,
               fiunt
               accipientis
               ,
               what
               is
               given
               ,
               by
               the
               very
               act
               of
               being
               given
               ,
               becomes
               the
               goods
               of
               the
               receiver
            
             )
             so
             other
             things
             are
             given
             to
             others
             ,
             so
             as
             we
             doe
             
               not
               part
            
             with
             them
             our selves
             ,
             they
             are
             as
             truly
             ,
             
             and
             properly
             
               ours
               ,
               after
            
             ,
             as
             before
             the
             Concession
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             10.
             
             
             Thus
             the
             
               Sun
               communicates
            
             his
             beams
             ,
             and
             with
             them
             his
             warmth
             and
             influences
             ,
             and
             yet
             retains
             all
             which
             it
             thus
             communicates
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             withdraweth
             them
             again
             ,
             And
             God
             the
             spring
             of
             all
             life
             ,
             and
             grace
             ,
             doth
             so
             communicate
             each
             of
             these
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             ,
             and
             doth
             freely
             withdraw
             them
             again
             ,
             and
             when
             he
             
               taketh
               away
               our
               breath
               we
               die
            
             —
             And
             thus
             certainly
             the
             King
             ,
             being
             the
             fountain
             of
             all
             power
             and
             authority
             ,
             as
             he
             is
             free
             to
             communicate
             this
             power
             to
             one
             ,
             so
             is
             he
             equally
             free
             to
             recall
             ,
             and
             communicate
             it
             to
             another
             ,
             And
             therefore
             may
             as
             
               freely
               bestow
            
             the
             power
             of
             Primate
             ,
             and
             
               chief
               Metropolitan
            
             of
             England
             ,
             or
             (
             which
             is
             all
             one
             )
             of
             a
             Patriarch
             ,
             on
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Canterbury
            
             ,
             having
             formerly
             thought
             fit
             to
             grant
             it
             to
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             as
             he
             or
             any
             of
             his
             Ancestors
             can
             be
             deemed
             to
             have
             granted
             it
             to
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ;
             And
             then
             as
             this
             being
             by
             this
             means
             evidenced
             to
             be
             no
             more
             then
             an
             act
             of
             
               regal
               power
            
             ,
             (
             which
             the
             King
             might
             lawfully
             exercise
             )
             takes
             off
             all
             obligation
             of
             obedience
             
             in
             the
             Bishops
             to
             the
             Pope
             ,
             at
             the
             first
             minute
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             by
             the
             King
             divested
             of
             that
             power
             ,
             or
             declared
             not
             to
             have
             had
             it
             
               de
               jure
            
             ,
             but
             only
             to
             have
             assumed
             it
             formerly
             (
             which
             freedome
             from
             that
             obedience
             immediately
             clears
             the
             whole
             businesse
             of
             schisme
             ,
             
             as
             that
             is
             a
             departure
             from
             the
             obedience
             of
             the
             
               lawful
               superiour
            
             )
             so
             will
             there
             not
             want
             many
             weighty
             reasons
             ,
             deducible
             from
             the
             
               antient
               Canons
            
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             maximes
             of
             
               civil
               government
            
             ,
             why
             the
             King
             who
             
               may
               freely
            
             place
             the
             Primacy
             ,
             where
             he
             please
             ,
             should
             choose
             to
             place
             it
             in
             a
             Bishop
             and
             subject
             of
             his
             own
             nation
             ,
             rather
             then
             in
             a
             
               forein
               Bishop
            
             farre
             removed
             ,
             and
             him
             not
             only
             independent
             from
             that
             King
             ,
             but
             himself
             enjoying
             a
             Principality
             ,
             or
             territorie
             ,
             which
             it
             is
             too
             apparent
             how
             willing
             he
             is
             to
             
               enlarge
               unlimitedly
            
             ,
             and
             to
             improve
             the
             concessions
             ,
             which
             are
             either
             acknowledged
             ,
             or
             pretended
             to
             be
             made
             him
             ,
             to
             that
             purpose
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             11.
             
             And
             here
             it
             is
             not
             amisse
             to
             observe
             ,
             in
             the
             reign
             of
             
               Queen
               Mary
            
             ,
             
             who
             was
             no
             way
             favourable
             to
             the
             Reformation
             in
             points
             of
             doctrine
             and
             Liturgie
             ,
             and
             made
             all
             speed
             to
             repeal
             
             what
             had
             been
             done
             in
             
               King
               Edward's
            
             time
             in
             that
             matter
             ,
             yet
             1.
             that
             she
             left
             not
             the
             title
             of
             
               Supreme
               head
            
             ,
             till
             the
             
               third
               Parliament
            
             of
             her
             reigne
             ;
             and
             2.
             that
             in
             the
             
               second
               Parliament
               authority
            
             is
             granted
             her
             
               to
               make
               ,
               and
               prescribe
               to
               all
               such
               Cathedral
               and
               Collegiate
               Churches
               ,
               as
               were
               erected
               by
               Henry
               the
               VIII
               .
               such
               statutes
               and
               orders
               as
               should
               seem
               good
               to
               her
               ,
            
             and
             that
             statute
             never
             repealed
             but
             expired
             :
             3.
             that
             in
             her
             
               third
               Parliament
            
             it
             was
             with
             much
             difficulty
             obtained
             ,
             that
             the
             supremacie
             of
             the
             Pope
             should
             be
             acknowledged
             ,
             the
             matter
             being
             urged
             by
             her
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             concerned
             the
             establishing
             the
             Matrimonie
             of
             her
             Mother
             ,
             and
             her
             legitimation
             ,
             which
             depended
             upon
             the
             
               absolute
               power
               of
               the
               Pope
            
             :
             4.
             that
             in
             the
             4
             th
             year
             of
             her
             reigne
             ,
             when
             the
             Pope
             sent
             
               Cardinal
               Petow
            
             to
             be
             his
             Legate
             in
             England
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             Bishop
             of
             Sarisbury
             ,
             she
             would
             not
             permit
             him
             to
             come
             into
             the
             Land
             ,
             neither
             could
             he
             have
             that
             Bishoprick
             ,
             which
             as
             it
             was
             some
             check
             to
             the
             
               Pope's
               absolute
               supremacy
            
             ,
             and
             an
             assertion
             and
             vindication
             of
             the
             
               Regal
               power
            
             ,
             so
             being
             added
             to
             the
             former
             
             it
             will
             be
             lesse
             strange
             ,
             that
             this
             
               Supreme
               power
            
             of
             the
             Popes
             should
             be
             by
             the
             Bishops
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             Henry
             VIII
             .
             disclaimed
             ,
             and
             ejected
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             12.
             
             Upon
             this
             bottome
             the
             foundation
             of
             Reformation
             being
             laid
             in
             England
             ,
             the
             superstructure
             was
             accordingly
             erected
             by
             the
             King
             and
             Bishops
             and
             Clergie
             in
             Convocation
             ,
             but
             this
             not
             all
             at
             once
             ,
             but
             by
             distinct
             steps
             and
             degrees
             .
             Somewhat
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             this
             Henry
             the
             VIII
             .
             as
             in
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             ,
             the
             use
             of
             the
             
               Lords
               Prayer
            
             &c.
             in
             the
             
               English
               tongue
            
             ,
             and
             the
             translation
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             all
             resolved
             on
             in
             Synod
             ,
             the
             King
             which
             duly
             assembled
             it
             ,
             presiding
             in
             it
             by
             his
             
               Vicar
               General
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             13.
             
             This
             was
             much
             farther
             advanced
             in
             the
             time
             of
             his
             son
             Edward
             the
             VI.
             who
             being
             a
             childe
             ,
             
             and
             the
             Laws
             and
             Constitution
             of
             this
             Realm
             committing
             the
             exercise
             of
             the
             
               Supreme
               power
            
             in
             that
             case
             ,
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             a
             Protector
             ,
             what
             was
             thus
             regularly
             done
             by
             that
             Protector
             ,
             cannot
             be
             doubted
             to
             be
             of
             the
             same
             force
             ,
             and
             validity
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             King
             had
             been
             of
             age
             ,
             and
             done
             it
             himself
             ;
             Or
             
             if
             it
             should
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             an
             unanswerable
             objection
             against
             all
             
               hereditary
               ,
               successive
               Monarchy
            
             ,
             a
             maim
             in
             that
             form
             of
             Government
             ,
             which
             could
             no
             way
             be
             repaired
             ,
             there
             being
             no
             amulet
             in
             the
             Crown
             ,
             which
             secures
             the
             life
             of
             each
             King
             ,
             till
             his
             successor
             be
             of
             age
             ,
             nor
             promise
             from
             heaven
             that
             the
             children
             of
             such
             Princes
             shall
             ,
             by
             succeeding
             to
             the
             Crown
             ,
             advance
             by
             miracle
             to
             the
             years
             ,
             and
             abilities
             of
             their
             Parents
             ,
             So
             irrational
             is
             the
             scoffe
             ,
             and
             exception
             of
             some
             ,
             that
             what
             was
             done
             in
             
               King
               Edward's
            
             daies
             being
             the
             Acts
             of
             a
             childe
             is
             as
             such
             to
             be
             vilified
             ▪
             and
             despised
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             14.
             
             In
             the
             Reign
             of
             this
             Prince
             ,
             many
             Changes
             were
             made
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             Recessions
             from
             the
             Doctrines
             ,
             and
             practises
             of
             Rome
             ;
             Beside
             that
             of
             Images
             ,
             the
             lawfulnesse
             of
             the
             marriage
             of
             the
             Clergie
             was
             asserted
             ,
             a
             body
             of
             an
             
               English
               Liturgie
            
             formed
             ,
             and
             setled
             for
             publick
             use
             ,
             the
             Eucharist
             appointed
             to
             be
             administred
             to
             the
             people
             in
             
               both
               kindes
            
             ,
             &c.
             and
             though
             
               Bishop
               Gardner
            
             of
             Winchester
             ,
             and
             
               Bishop
               Bonner
            
             of
             London
             made
             opposition
             against
             these
             changes
             ,
             and
             for
             some
             misbehaviours
             herein
             ,
             were
             
             imprison'd
             ,
             (
             and
             two
             more
             moderate
             ,
             learned
             men
             ,
             
               Bishop
               Tunstal
            
             of
             Durham
             ,
             and
             
               Bishop
               Day
            
             of
             Chichester
             ,
             upon
             another
             score
             )
             yet
             
               Archbishop
               Cranmer
            
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Bishops
             making
             up
             the
             farre
             greater
             number
             ,
             joyned
             with
             the
             
               Supreme
               power
            
             in
             the
             Reformation
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             no
             great
             marvell
             ,
             that
             there
             should
             be
             some
             (
             so
             few
             )
             dissenters
             ,
             so
             the
             punishment
             inflicted
             on
             them
             will
             not
             be
             deemed
             excessive
             by
             any
             ,
             that
             shall
             compare
             it
             with
             the
             farre
             
               severer
               executions
            
             ,
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             fagot
             ,
             which
             were
             soon
             after
             in
             
               Queen
               Mary's
            
             daies
             inflicted
             on
             
               Archbishop
               Cranmer
               ,
               Bishop
               Ridley
            
             ,
             and
             
               Bishop
               Latimer
            
             ,
             as
             the
             reward
             of
             their
             disputing
             in
             the
             Synod
             against
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             (
             and
             the
             like
             cruelties
             on
             multitudes
             more
             )
             and
             the
             Exiles
             ,
             and
             deprivations
             ,
             which
             befell
             so
             many
             others
             in
             her
             Reigne
             ;
             However
             this
             can
             be
             no
             prejudice
             to
             the
             regularity
             of
             the
             Reformation
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             
               King
               Edward
            
             ,
             wrought
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             by
             the
             
               Supreme
               power
            
             ,
             with
             the
             consent
             of
             the
             major
             part
             of
             Bishops
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             15.
             
             
             That
             which
             afterward
             followed
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             
               Qu.
               Elizabeth's
               
               reigne
            
             ,
             may
             be
             thought
             more
             distant
             ,
             and
             lesse
             reconcileable
             to
             our
             pretensions
             ,
             (
             not
             that
             of
             her
             sex
             ,
             her
             being
             a
             woman
             ,
             for
             so
             was
             
               Qu.
               Mary
            
             before
             ,
             which
             acted
             so
             vigorously
             for
             the
             contrary
             way
             ,
             and
             the
             constitution
             of
             our
             Monarchy
             invests
             equally
             either
             sex
             in
             the
             plenitude
             of
             
               Regal
               power
            
             ,
             in
             sacred
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             
               civil
               affairs
            
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             but
             to
             raise
             envie
             against
             the
             Reformation
             that
             
               Queen
               Elizabeth's
               sex
            
             ,
             as
             before
             
               King
               Edward's
               non-age
            
             hath
             by
             some
             been
             thought
             fit
             to
             be
             mention'd
             ,
             and
             cannot
             by
             any
             sober
             judgment
             be
             admitted
             to
             have
             any
             force
             in
             it
             )
             but
             because
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             from
             our
             histories
             more
             pertinently
             objected
             ,
             most
             of
             the
             Bishops
             were
             by
             her
             divested
             of
             their
             dignities
             ,
             and
             
               new
               created
            
             in
             their
             stead
             ,
             To
             this
             therefore
             in
             the
             last
             place
             ,
             I
             must
             apply
             my self
             to
             give
             satisfaction
             .
             And
             1.
             
          
           
             §
             .
             16.
             
             In
             this
             matter
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             concerns
             the
             Ordination
             of
             those
             
               new
               Bishops
            
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             performed
             regularly
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             
               Antient
               Canons
            
             ,
             each
             by
             the
             
               Imposition
               of
            
             the
             hands
             of
             
               three
               Bishops
            
             ,
             hath
             been
             evidently
             set
             down
             out
             of
             the
             Records
             ,
             
             and
             vindicated
             by
             M
             r
             Mason
             in
             his
             
               Booke
               de
               Minist
               :
               Anglic
            
             :
             and
             may
             there
             be
             view'd
             at
             large
             ,
             if
             the
             Reader
             want
             satisfaction
             in
             that
             point
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             17.
             
             
             As
             for
             the
             second
             remaining
             part
             of
             the
             objection
             which
             alone
             is
             pertinent
             to
             this
             place
             ,
             it
             will
             receive
             answer
             by
             these
             degrees
             ,
             First
             that
             the
             death
             of
             
               Cardinal
               Pool
               Archbishop
               of
               Canterbury
            
             ,
             falling
             neer
             upon
             the
             death
             of
             her
             
               Predecessor
               Queen
               Mary
            
             ,
             it
             was
             very
             regular
             for
             
               Queen
               Elizabeth
            
             to
             assigne
             a
             successor
             to
             that
             See
             ,
             then
             
               vacant
               ,
               Archbishop
               Parker
            
             ;
             2
             dly
             ,
             that
             those
             Bishops
             ,
             which
             in
             
               Queen
               Mary's
            
             daies
             had
             been
             exiled
             ,
             and
             deprived
             ,
             and
             had
             survived
             that
             calamity
             ,
             were
             with
             all
             justice
             restored
             to
             their
             dignities
             ;
             3
             dly
             ,
             that
             the
             Bishops
             by
             her
             deprived
             ,
             and
             divested
             of
             their
             dignities
             ,
             were
             so
             dealt
             with
             ,
             for
             refusing
             to
             take
             the
             oath
             of
             Supremacy
             ,
             formed
             and
             enjoyned
             in
             the
             daies
             of
             Henry
             the
             VIII
             .
             and
             in
             the
             
               first
               Parliament
            
             of
             this
             
               Queen
               revived
            
             ,
             and
             the
             statutes
             concerning
             it
             restored
             to
             full
             force
             ,
             before
             it
             was
             thus
             imposed
             on
             them
             .
             So
             that
             for
             the
             justice
             of
             the
             cause
             of
             their
             deprivation
             ,
             it
             depends
             Immediatly
             upon
             the
             
             Right
             and
             power
             of
             the
             
               Supreme
               Magistrate
            
             to
             make
             laws
             ,
             to
             impose
             oathes
             for
             the
             securing
             his
             Government
             ,
             and
             to
             inflict
             the
             punishments
             ,
             prescribed
             by
             those
             laws
             ,
             on
             the
             disobedient
             ,
             but
             Originally
             upon
             the
             truth
             of
             that
             decision
             of
             the
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             Clergie
             ,
             and
             Vniversities
             ,
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             Henry
             the
             VIII
             .
             that
             
               no
               authority
               belonged
               in
               this
               Kingdome
               of
               England
               to
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               ,
               more
               then
               to
               any
               other
               forein
               Bishop
               .
            
             The
             former
             of
             these
             I
             shall
             be
             confident
             to
             look
             on
             as
             an
             undoubted
             truth
             ,
             in
             the
             maintenance
             of
             which
             
               all
               Government
            
             is
             concerned
             ,
             and
             hath
             nothing
             ,
             peculiar
             to
             
               our
               pretensions
            
             ,
             which
             should
             suggest
             a
             vindication
             of
             it
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             And
             the
             second
             hath
             ,
             I
             suppose
             ,
             been
             sufficiently
             cleared
             in
             the
             former
             chapters
             of
             this
             discourse
             ,
             which
             have
             examined
             all
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             claims
             to
             this
             Supremacy
             ,
             And
             both
             these
             grounds
             being
             acknowledged
             (
             or
             ,
             till
             they
             be
             invalidated
             ,
             or
             
               disproved
               ,
               supposed
            
             )
             to
             have
             truth
             ,
             and
             force
             in
             them
             ,
             the
             conclusion
             will
             be
             sufficiently
             induced
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             no
             injustice
             in
             that
             Act
             of
             the
             Queens
             ,
             which
             divested
             
             those
             Bishops
             ,
             which
             thus
             refused
             to
             secure
             her
             Government
             ,
             or
             to
             approve
             their
             fidelity
             to
             their
             
               lawful
               ▪
               Soveraign
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             18.
             
             Fourthly
             ,
             that
             those
             Bishops
             being
             thus
             deprived
             ,
             it
             was
             most
             Regular
             ,
             and
             Necessary
             ,
             and
             that
             against
             which
             no
             objection
             is
             imaginable
             ,
             (
             that
             of
             their
             due
             Ordination
             being
             formerly
             cleared
             )
             that
             
               other
               Bishops
            
             should
             be
             nominated
             ,
             and
             advanced
             to
             those
             
               vacant
               Sees
            
             ,
             and
             that
             what
             should
             be
             for
             the
             future
             acted
             by
             those
             
               new
               Bishops
            
             in
             Convocation
             was
             
               regular
               ,
               Synodical
            
             ,
             and
             valid
             beyond
             all
             exception
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             formality
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             19.
             
             Fiftly
             ,
             that
             as
             by
             the
             Vniform
             and
             
               joynt
               consent
            
             of
             these
             Bishops
             thus
             constituted
             a
             Declaration
             of
             
               certain
               Principal
               Articles
               of
               Religion
            
             was
             
               agreed
               on
            
             ,
             and
             set
             out
             by
             Order
             of
             
               both
               Archbishops
               ,
               Metropolitans
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Bishops
               ,
            
             for
             the
             Vnity
             of
             
               doctrine
               ,
               to
               be
               taught
               ,
               and
               holden
               of
               all
               Parsons
               ,
               Vicars
               ,
               and
               Curates
               &c.
            
             and
             this
             not
             before
             the
             
               third
               year
            
             of
             that
             
               Queens
               reigne
            
             ,
             So
             before
             this
             time
             there
             had
             not
             been
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             appears
             ,
             any
             debate
             in
             any
             
             
               former
               Convocation
            
             of
             that
             
               Queens
               reigne
            
             concerning
             Religion
             (
             only
             an
             offer
             of
             a
             disputation
             betwixt
             
               eight
               Clergie-men
            
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             which
             came
             to
             nothing
             )
             but
             all
             done
             by
             the
             
               Parliaments
               restoring
            
             what
             had
             been
             debated
             ,
             and
             concluded
             by
             
               former
               Synods
            
             ,
             in
             the
             reigns
             of
             
               King
               Henry
               the
               eight
            
             ,
             and
             
               Edward
               the
               sixt
            
             ,
             without
             any
             new
             deliberation
             in
             any
             
               present
               Synod
            
             .
             By
             this
             means
             were
             revived
             the
             Statutes
             for
             the
             
               Regal
               Supremacy
            
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             the
             book
             of
             Common-prayer
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               Edward
               the
               sixt
            
             ,
             (
             with
             few
             alterations
             )
             which
             included
             the
             abolition
             of
             the
             
               Romish
               Missalls
            
             .
             And
             so
             all
             this
             again
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             it
             concerned
             
               Queen
               Elizabeth's
            
             part
             in
             the
             Reformation
             ,
             is
             regularly
             superstructed
             on
             the
             forementioned
             foundation
             of
             
               Regal
               Supremacy
            
             (
             with
             the
             concurrence
             ,
             and
             advise
             of
             Synods
             )
             which
             hath
             been
             in
             the
             former
             part
             of
             this
             discourse
             (
             I
             hope
             ,
             sufficiently
             )
             vindicated
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             20.
             
             And
             that
             being
             granted
             ,
             it
             cannot
             be
             here
             necessary
             ,
             or
             pertinent
             to
             descend
             to
             the
             consideration
             of
             each
             several
             matter
             of
             the
             Change
             thus
             wrought
             in
             this
             Church
             ,
             either
             
             as
             branches
             of
             the
             Reformation
             ,
             or
             under
             the
             name
             ,
             or
             title
             of
             it
             .
             For
             our
             present
             enquirie
             being
             no
             farther
             extended
             ,
             then
             this
             ,
             whether
             the
             
               true
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             as
             it
             stands
             by
             
               Laws
               established
            
             ,
             have
             in
             Reforming
             been
             guilty
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             as
             that
             signifies
             in
             the
             first
             place
             a
             recession
             ,
             and
             departure
             from
             the
             obedience
             of
             our
             
               lawful
               Superiours
            
             ,
             and
             this
             being
             cleared
             in
             the
             Negative
             ,
             by
             this
             one
             evidence
             ,
             that
             all
             was
             done
             by
             those
             ,
             to
             whom
             ,
             and
             to
             whom
             only
             ,
             the
             
               rightful
               power
               legally
            
             pertained
             ,
             viz
             :
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             Bishops
             of
             this
             Nation
             ,
             supposing
             (
             as
             now
             regularly
             we
             may
             ,
             having
             competently
             proved
             it
             ,
             and
             answered
             all
             the
             colours
             ,
             that
             have
             been
             offered
             against
             it
             )
             that
             the
             Pope
             had
             
               no
               right
            
             to
             our
             obedience
             ,
             and
             consequently
             that
             our
             departure
             from
             him
             is
             not
             a
             departure
             from
             our
             obedience
             to
             our
             superiours
             ,
             it
             is
             presently
             visible
             ,
             that
             all
             other
             matters
             will
             belong
             to
             some
             other
             heads
             of
             Discourse
             ,
             and
             consequently
             must
             be
             debated
             upon
             other
             principles
             ,
             All
             variation
             from
             the
             
               Church
               of
               Rome
            
             in
             point
             of
             Doctrine
             if
             it
             should
             (
             as
             I
             believe
             it
             will
             never
             )
             
             be
             proved
             to
             be
             unjust
             ,
             falling
             under
             the
             head
             of
             Heresie
             ,
             not
             of
             schisme
             ;
             and
             for
             acts
             of
             sacrilege
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             impieties
             (
             as
             certainly
             
               Henry
               the
               eighth
            
             ,
             and
             some
             others
             ,
             cannot
             be
             freed
             from
             such
             )
             they
             are
             by
             us
             as
             freely
             charged
             upon
             the
             actors
             ,
             as
             by
             any
             Romanist
             they
             can
             be
             ,
             But
             yet
             sacrilege
             is
             no
             more
             schisme
             ,
             then
             it
             is
             adulterie
             ,
             and
             the
             Church
             ,
             on
             which
             one
             sin
             hath
             been
             committed
             ,
             cannot
             be
             from
             thence
             proved
             to
             be
             guilty
             of
             every
             other
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
             Of
             the
             Second
             sort
             of
             Schisme
             ,
             as
             that
             is
             an
             Offence
             against
             mutual
             Charity
             ,
             This
             divided
             into
             three
             species
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             here
             examined
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             BUT
             beside
             that
             
               first
               species
            
             of
             schisme
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             the
             subordination
             ,
             which
             Christ
             hath
             by
             himself
             and
             his
             Apostles
             setled
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             (
             from
             the
             guilt
             of
             which
             I
             have
             hitherto
             indevoured
             to
             vindicate
             our
             Church
             )
             another
             was
             taken
             notice
             of
             ,
             as
             it
             signifies
             an
             offence
             against
             the
             mutual
             unity
             ,
             and
             peace
             ,
             and
             charity
             ,
             which
             Christ
             left
             among
             his
             Disciples
             ;
             And
             to
             that
             I
             must
             now
             proceed
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             the
             Accusations
             of
             the
             Romanist
             give
             us
             occasion
             to
             vindicate
             our
             innocence
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             And
             for
             method's
             sake
             ,
             this
             branch
             of
             Schisme
             may
             be
             subdivided
             into
             
               three
               species
            
             .
             The
             first
             is
             a
             breach
             in
             the
             doctrines
             ,
             or
             Traditions
             ,
             a
             departure
             from
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             
               Faith
               ,
               which
               was
               once
               delivered
               to
               the
               saints
            
             ;
             under
             that
             head
             also
             comprehending
             the
             institutions
             of
             Christ
             ,
             of
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Church
            
             
             of
             the
             first
             and
             purest
             ages
             ,
             whether
             in
             Government
             ,
             or
             other
             the
             like
             observances
             and
             practises
             :
             The
             second
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             
               external
               peace
            
             and
             
               Communion
               Ecclesiastical
            
             :
             The
             third
             and
             last
             is
             the
             
               want
               of
               that
               charity
               ,
               which
               is
               due
               from
               every
               Christian
               to
               every
               Christian
               .
            
             Beside
             these
             I
             cannot
             foresee
             any
             other
             species
             of
             schisme
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             vindicating
             our
             Reformation
             from
             all
             grounds
             of
             charge
             of
             any
             of
             
               these
               three
            
             ,
             will
             be
             the
             absolving
             the
             whole
             task
             undertaken
             in
             these
             sheets
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             
             For
             the
             first
             it
             may
             be
             considered
             either
             in
             the
             Bullion
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             coyn
             ,
             in
             the
             grosse
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             retail
             ,
             either
             as
             it
             is
             a
             departure
             from
             those
             rules
             appointed
             by
             Christ
             for
             the
             founding
             and
             upholding
             his
             truth
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             this
             Vnity
             of
             Doctrine
             &c.
             or
             else
             as
             it
             is
             the
             asserting
             any
             particular
             branch
             of
             Doctrine
             ,
             contrary
             to
             Christs
             ,
             and
             the
             (
             
               Apostolical
               ,
               pure
               )
               Churches
            
             establishment
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             And
             here
             it
             is
             first
             suggested
             by
             the
             Romanist
             ,
             that
             by
             
               casting
               out
            
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             we
             have
             
               cast
               off
            
             the
             head
             of
             
               all
               Christian
               Vnity
            
             ,
             and
             so
             must
             needs
             be
             
             guilty
             of
             Schisme
             in
             this
             first
             respect
             .
             To
             which
             the
             answer
             is
             obvious
             ,
             1.
             
             that
             that
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             was
             never
             appointed
             by
             Christ
             to
             be
             the
             head
             of
             all
             
               Christian
               unity
            
             ,
             or
             that
             Church
             to
             be
             the
             conservatory
             (
             for
             ever
             )
             of
             
               all
               Christian
               truth
            
             ,
             any
             more
             then
             any
             
               other
               Bishop
            
             ,
             or
             Church
             of
             the
             
               Apostles
               ordaining
            
             ,
             or
             planting
             ;
             and
             whatever
             can
             be
             pretended
             for
             the
             contrary
             will
             be
             easily
             answered
             from
             the
             grounds
             already
             laid
             ,
             and
             cleared
             in
             the
             former
             part
             of
             this
             discourse
             concerning
             the
             
               Vniversal
               Pastorship
            
             of
             S.
             
               Peter's
               successors
            
             ,
             which
             must
             not
             be
             here
             so
             unnecessarily
             repeated
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             2
             dly
             ,
             That
             the
             way
             provided
             by
             Christ
             ,
             and
             his
             Apostles
             for
             the
             preserving
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             &c.
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             is
             fully
             acknowledged
             by
             us
             ,
             and
             no
             way
             supplanted
             by
             our
             Reformation
             .
             That
             way
             is
             made
             up
             of
             
               two
               acts
            
             of
             
               Apostolical
               providence
            
             ,
             First
             their
             resolving
             upon
             some
             
               few
               heads
            
             of
             special
             force
             ,
             and
             efficacie
             to
             the
             planting
             of
             
               Christian
               life
            
             through
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             preaching
             ,
             and
             depositing
             them
             in
             
               every
               Church
            
             of
             their
             plantation
             .
             2.
             
             Their
             establishing
             an
             
             excellent
             subordination
             of
             all
             
               inferior
               officers
            
             of
             the
             Church
             to
             the
             Bishop
             in
             every
             city
             ,
             of
             the
             Bishops
             in
             every
             Province
             to
             their
             Metropolitanes
             ,
             of
             the
             Metropolitanes
             in
             every
             region
             or
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             to
             Patriarchs
             ,
             or
             Primates
             ,
             allowing
             also
             among
             these
             such
             a
             Primacie
             of
             Order
             ,
             or
             dignity
             ,
             as
             might
             be
             proportionable
             to
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             agreeable
             to
             what
             is
             by
             the
             
               antient
               Canons
            
             allowed
             to
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ;
             And
             this
             standing
             subordination
             sufficient
             for
             all
             ordinary
             uses
             ,
             and
             when
             there
             should
             be
             need
             of
             extraordinary
             remedies
             ,
             there
             was
             then
             a
             supply
             to
             be
             had
             by
             congregating
             
               Councels
               ,
               Provincial
               ,
               Patriarchal
               ,
               General
               ,
            
             as
             hath
             formerly
             been
             shewed
             .
             And
             all
             this
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             certain
             ,
             asserted
             ,
             and
             acknowledged
             by
             every
             
               true
               son
            
             of
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             as
             zealously
             ,
             as
             is
             pretended
             by
             any
             Romanist
             .
             And
             from
             hence
             ,
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             that
             speech
             of
             the
             learned
             and
             
               excellent
               Hugo
               Grotius
            
             (
             which
             I
             discern
             to
             be
             made
             use
             of
             by
             the
             Romanists
             ,
             and
             look'd
             on
             with
             jealousie
             by
             others
             )
             will
             ,
             I
             suppose
             ,
             receive
             its
             due
             importance
             ,
             and
             interpretation
             ,
             in
             his
             
               Rivet
               :
               Apologet
               :
               
               Discuss
               :
            
             p.
             255.
             
             
               Restitutionem
               Christianorum
               in
               unum
               idémque
               corpus
            
             &c.
             
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             As
             for
             the
             subjection
             (
             and
             dependence
             )
             of
             this
             Church
             to
             the
             
               Monarchick
               power
            
             of
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             ,
             this
             will
             never
             be
             likely
             to
             tend
             to
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             unlesse
             first
             all
             other
             Churches
             of
             Christians
             paid
             that
             subjection
             too
             ,
             and
             were
             obliged
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             duty
             morally
             ascertain'd
             alwaies
             to
             continue
             it
             (
             which
             it
             is
             evident
             the
             
               Eastern
               Churches
            
             had
             not
             done
             long
             before
             the
             time
             of
             our
             pretended
             departure
             )
             and
             2.
             unlesse
             the
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             were
             in
             probability
             able
             to
             administer
             that
             
               vast
               Province
            
             ,
             so
             as
             would
             be
             most
             to
             the
             advantage
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             For
             which
             whether
             he
             be
             fitly
             qualified
             or
             no
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             not
             demonstrable
             in
             the
             causes
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             to
             be
             looked
             on
             ,
             as
             a
             
               Politick
               Probleme
            
             ,
             the
             truth
             of
             which
             belongs
             to
             
               prudent
               persons
            
             ,
             and
             and
             such
             as
             are
             by
             
               God
               intrusted
            
             with
             the
             Flock
             to
             judge
             of
             ,
             i.
             e.
             to
             the
             Princes
             ,
             the
             
               nursing
               Fathers
               of
               every
               Church
            
             ,
             who
             are
             prudentially
             ,
             and
             fatherly
             to
             determine
             for
             themselves
             and
             those
             that
             are
             under
             them
             ,
             what
             is
             most
             ordinable
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             and
             
             cannot
             be
             obliged
             to
             conclude
             ,
             farther
             then
             the
             motives
             or
             premises
             will
             bear
             ,
             to
             decree
             what
             they
             doe
             not
             reasonably
             ,
             and
             cordially
             believe
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             Lastly
             ,
             for
             the
             
               particular
               doctrines
            
             wherein
             we
             are
             affirmed
             by
             the
             Romanists
             to
             depart
             from
             the
             Vnity
             of
             the
             Faith
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             departing
             from
             the
             unity
             ,
             to
             be
             schismatical
             ,
             as
             heretical
             by
             departing
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
             this
             must
             be
             contested
             by
             a
             strict
             survey
             of
             the
             
               particular
               doctrines
            
             ,
             wherein
             as
             we
             make
             no
             doubt
             to
             approve
             our selves
             to
             any
             that
             will
             judge
             of
             the
             
               Apostolical
               doctrine
            
             and
             traditions
             by
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             and
             consent
             of
             the
             first
             300
             years
             ,
             or
             the
             
               four
               General
               Councels
            
             ,
             
             (
             the
             most
             
               competent
               witnesses
            
             of
             
               Apostolical
               traditions
            
             )
             so
             we
             shall
             secure
             our selves
             of
             our
             innocence
             in
             this
             behalf
             ,
             by
             that
             principle
             acknowledged
             in
             our
             Church
             ,
             and
             owned
             ,
             as
             the
             rule
             by
             which
             we
             are
             concluded
             in
             any
             debate
             ,
             or
             controversie
             :
             That
             whatever
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             doctrine
             ,
             or
             practises
             of
             those
             first
             and
             
               purest
               ages
            
             ,
             shall
             by
             us
             (
             assoon
             as
             it
             thus
             appears
             )
             be
             renounced
             ,
             and
             disclaimed
             also
             .
             Which
             resolution
             of
             rulinesse
             ,
             and
             obedience
             ,
             will
             ,
             I
             suppose
             ,
             
             conserve
             us
             in
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             Faith
             ,
             and
             render
             us
             approveable
             to
             God
             ,
             though
             our
             ignorance
             (
             thus
             unaffected
             )
             should
             betray
             us
             to
             some
             misunderstandings
             of
             those
             first
             times
             ,
             and
             be
             an
             instrument
             much
             more
             probable
             to
             
               lead
               us
               into
               all
               truth
            
             ,
             then
             the
             supposed
             infallibility
             of
             the
             
               Church
               of
               Rome
            
             can
             be
             imagined
             to
             be
             ,
             which
             as
             it
             leaves
             the
             
               proudest
               presumer
            
             really
             as
             liable
             to
             error
             ,
             as
             him
             that
             acknowledgeth
             himself
             most
             fallible
             ,
             so
             it
             ascertains
             him
             to
             
               persevere
               incorrigible
            
             whether
             in
             the
             least
             ,
             or
             
               greatest
               error
            
             ,
             which
             by
             fault
             ,
             or
             frailty
             he
             shall
             be
             guilty
             of
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             8.
             
             This
             consideration
             of
             the
             
               humble
               ,
               docible
            
             temper
             of
             our
             Church
             (
             together
             with
             our
             professed
             appeal
             to
             those
             first
             and
             purest
             times
             ,
             to
             stand
             or
             fall
             ,
             as
             by
             those
             evidences
             we
             shall
             be
             adjudged
             )
             as
             it
             necessarily
             renders
             it
             our
             infelicity
             ,
             not
             our
             crime
             ,
             if
             in
             judging
             of
             
               Christ's
               truth
            
             we
             should
             be
             deemed
             to
             erre
             ,
             so
             may
             it
             reasonably
             supersede
             that
             larger
             trouble
             of
             the
             Reader
             ,
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             which
             the
             view
             and
             examination
             of
             the
             severals
             would
             cost
             him
             ,
             it
             being
             thus
             farre
             evident
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             our
             avowed
             
             wish
             and
             our
             care
             (
             should
             it
             be
             denied
             to
             be
             our
             lot
             )
             a
             special
             mark
             of
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England's
               Reformation
            
             ,
             to
             
               preserve
               the
               Vnity
               of
               the
               Apostolical
               Faith
               and
               Primitive
               practises
               ,
               as
               intire
               ,
               as
               we
               would
               have
               done
               Christ's
               body
               or
               garment
               ,
            
             and
             the
             probability
             being
             not
             weak
             on
             our
             side
             ,
             that
             the
             fact
             of
             the
             
               crucifying
               souldiers
            
             which
             hath
             so
             much
             of
             our
             abhorrence
             and
             detestation
             ,
             shall
             never
             be
             our
             choice
             ,
             our
             known
             ,
             or
             
               wilfull
               guilt
            
             ,
             or
             if
             it
             be
             ,
             that
             we
             so
             farre
             recede
             from
             our
             Profession
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
             The
             Second
             species
             of
             this
             Schisme
             examined
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             external
             peace
             ,
             or
             Communion
             Ecclesiastical
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             
             NOW
             for
             the
             
               second
               branch
            
             of
             this
             
               second
               sort
               of
               Schism
            
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             
               external
               peace
            
             or
             
               communion
               Ecclesiastical
            
             .
             This
             cannot
             with
             any
             colour
             be
             charged
             on
             us
             ,
             
             of
             whom
             these
             6
             things
             are
             manifest
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             the
             tenure
             of
             our
             Reformation
             ,
             1.
             
             that
             we
             have
             alwaies
             retained
             the
             form
             of
             Government
             ▪
             in
             ,
             and
             under
             which
             the
             Apostles
             founded
             
               Ecclesiastical
               assemblies
            
             ,
             or
             Communion
             ,
             viz
             :
             that
             of
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             his
             
               inferiour
               officers
            
             in
             every
             Church
             ,
             and
             so
             in
             that
             respect
             are
             ,
             in
             Ignatius
             his
             phrase
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               within
               the
               altar
            
             ,
             have
             no
             part
             of
             that
             breach
             of
             
               Ecclesiastical
               communion
            
             upon
             us
             ,
             which
             consists
             in
             casting
             out
             that
             order
             .
             2.
             
             
             That
             as
             we
             maintain
             that
             Order
             ,
             so
             we
             regularly
             submit
             to
             the
             exercise
             of
             it
             ,
             acknowledge
             the
             due
             authority
             of
             these
             Governors
             ,
             profess
             
               Canonical
               obedience
            
             to
             them
             ,
             submit
             
             to
             their
             Censures
             ,
             and
             Decrees
             ,
             and
             give
             our selves
             up
             to
             be
             ruled
             by
             them
             in
             all
             things
             that
             belong
             to
             their
             
               cognizance
               secundum
               Deum
               ,
               according
               to
               God.
            
             3.
             
             
             That
             the
             circumstances
             which
             are
             necessary
             to
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             the
             assembling
             our selves
             together
             for
             the
             
               publick
               worship
            
             ,
             whether
             1.
             that
             of
             place
             ,
             (
             our
             
               Churches
               consecrated
            
             to
             those
             offices
             )
             or
             2.
             that
             of
             time
             ,
             (
             the
             
               Lords
               day
            
             ,
             and
             other
             
               primitive
               festivals
            
             ,
             and
             Fasts
             ,
             and
             ,
             in
             their
             degree
             ,
             every
             day
             of
             the
             week
             )
             or
             3.
             that
             of
             forms
             of
             Prayer
             ,
             and
             
               Praises
               ,
               celebration
            
             of
             Sacraments
             ,
             and
             
               sacramentals
               ,
               Preaching
               ,
               Catechizing
            
             ,
             &c.
             or
             4.
             that
             of
             Ceremonies
             ,
             such
             as
             the
             practise
             of
             the
             
               Primitive
               Church
            
             hath
             sent
             down
             recommended
             to
             us
             ;
             or
             lastly
             ,
             that
             of
             Discipline
             to
             binde
             all
             these
             performances
             upon
             every
             member
             of
             the
             Church
             in
             his
             office
             ,
             or
             place
             ,
             are
             all
             entered
             into
             our
             Confessions
             ,
             setled
             by
             Article
             ,
             as
             part
             of
             our
             establishment
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             want
             of
             either
             ,
             or
             all
             of
             those
             are
             not
             imputable
             to
             our
             Reformation
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             Fourthly
             ,
             That
             in
             every
             of
             these
             three
             ,
             whatsoever
             the
             Romanist
             
             requires
             us
             to
             adde
             farther
             to
             that
             which
             we
             voluntarily
             ,
             and
             professedly
             receive
             ,
             (
             1.
             the
             
               supreme
               ,
               transcendent
               ,
               monarchick
               power
            
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             2.
             the
             acknowledgment
             of
             ,
             and
             obedience
             to
             his
             supremacy
             ,
             3.
             the
             use
             of
             more
             
               ceremonies
               ,
               festivals
            
             ,
             &c.
             )
             is
             usurpation
             ,
             or
             imposition
             of
             the
             
               present
               Romanists
            
             ,
             absolutely
             without
             Authority
             ,
             or
             Precedent
             from
             the
             
               antient
               ,
               Primitive
               Church
            
             ,
             from
             whom
             we
             are
             so
             unwilling
             to
             divide
             in
             any
             thing
             ,
             that
             we
             choose
             a
             conformity
             with
             them
             ,
             rather
             then
             with
             any
             later
             modell
             ,
             and
             if
             by
             receding
             from
             the
             
               Ordo
               Romanus
            
             in
             any
             particular
             ,
             we
             doe
             not
             approve
             our selves
             to
             come
             neerer
             to
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             purest
             times
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             
               avow'd
               Profession
               of
               our
               Church
            
             ,
             the
             wish
             ,
             and
             purpose
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             I
             may
             justly
             style
             part
             of
             our
             establishment
             ,
             to
             reduce
             ,
             and
             restore
             that
             ,
             (
             whatsover
             it
             is
             )
             which
             is
             most
             pure
             ,
             and
             Primitive
             in
             stead
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             
             Fiftly
             ,
             That
             as
             we
             exclude
             no
             Christian
             from
             our
             communion
             ,
             that
             will
             either
             filially
             ,
             or
             fraternally
             embrace
             it
             with
             us
             ,
             being
             ready
             to
             admit
             any
             to
             our
             assemblies
             ,
             that
             acknowledge
             the
             Foundation
             laid
             by
             
             Christ
             ,
             and
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             so
             we
             as
             earnestly
             desire
             to
             be
             admitted
             to
             the
             like
             freedome
             of
             
               external
               Communion
            
             with
             all
             the
             members
             of
             all
             other
             
               Christian
               Churches
            
             ,
             as
             oft
             as
             occasion
             makes
             us
             capable
             of
             that
             blessing
             of
             the
             
               one
               heart
            
             ,
             and
             
               one
               lip
            
             ,
             and
             would
             most
             willingly
             ,
             by
             the
             use
             of
             the
             antient
             method
             of
             
               literae
               Communicatoriae
            
             ,
             maintain
             this
             Communion
             with
             those
             ,
             with
             whom
             we
             cannot
             
               corporally
               assemble
            
             ,
             and
             particularly
             with
             those
             which
             live
             in
             obedience
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             
             Sixtly
             ,
             that
             the
             onely
             hindrances
             that
             interpose
             and
             obstruct
             this
             desired
             freedome
             of
             
               external
               Communion
            
             ,
             are
             wholly
             imputable
             to
             the
             Romanists
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             First
             ,
             their
             excommunicating
             ,
             and
             separating
             from
             their
             assemblies
             all
             that
             maintain
             communion
             with
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             which
             we
             know
             was
             done
             by
             Bull
             from
             the
             Pope
             about
             the
             tenth
             year
             of
             
               Q.
               Elizabeth
               (
               before
            
             which
             time
             those
             English
             ,
             which
             had
             not
             joyned
             in
             our
             Reformation
             ,
             might
             ,
             and
             did
             come
             to
             our
             assemblies
             ,
             and
             were
             never
             after
             rejected
             by
             us
             ,
             but
             upon
             their
             avowed
             
             contumacie
             against
             the
             orders
             of
             our
             Church
             ,
             which
             consequently
             brought
             the
             censures
             on
             them
             )
             and
             to
             that
             it
             is
             visibly
             consequent
             ,
             that
             we
             that
             were
             
               cast
               out
            
             ,
             cannot
             be
             said
             to
             separate
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             former
             part
             of
             this
             discourse
             hath
             been
             demonstrated
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             Secondly
             ,
             their
             imposing
             such
             conditions
             on
             their
             
               Communion
               (
               belief
            
             of
             doctrines
             ,
             and
             approbation
             of
             practises
             ,
             which
             we
             neither
             believe
             ,
             nor
             approve
             of
             ,
             and
             are
             ready
             to
             contest
             and
             maintain
             our
             Negatives
             ,
             by
             grounds
             that
             all
             good
             Christians
             ought
             to
             be
             concluded
             by
             )
             that
             we
             cannot
             without
             sinning
             ,
             or
             seeming
             to
             sin
             against
             conscience
             ,
             without
             
               wilfull
               falling
            
             on
             one
             side
             ,
             or
             dissembling
             and
             
               unsound
               confession
            
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             the
             scandal
             of
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             accept
             of
             their
             communion
             upon
             such
             conditions
             ,
             as
             hath
             formerly
             been
             demonstrated
             also
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             And
             in
             this
             matter
             it
             were
             very
             well
             worthy
             our
             considering
             ,
             how
             farre
             the
             Articles
             of
             our
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             proceed
             in
             accord
             with
             the
             
               present
               Roman
               doctrines
            
             and
             practises
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             particulars
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             we
             
               cannot
               perswade
            
             our selves
             
             to
             consent
             to
             them
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             offer
             it
             to
             the
             Vmpirage
             of
             any
             
               rational
               arbitrator
            
             ,
             whether
             we
             that
             unfeignedly
             professe
             to
             believe
             so
             much
             and
             
               no
               more
            
             ,
             nor
             to
             be
             convinced
             by
             all
             the
             reasons
             ,
             and
             authorities
             ,
             proofs
             from
             Scripture
             ,
             or
             the
             
               first
               Christian
               writers
            
             ,
             (
             those
             of
             the
             
               first
               three
               hundred
            
             years
             )
             or
             the
             
               four
               General
               Councels
            
             )
             produced
             by
             them
             (
             being
             in
             full
             inclination
             and
             desire
             of
             minde
             ,
             ready
             to
             submit
             upon
             conviction
             )
             are
             in
             any
             reason
             ,
             or
             equity
             ,
             or
             according
             to
             any
             example
             ,
             or
             precept
             of
             Christ
             ,
             or
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             the
             
               antient
               ,
               Primitive
               Church
            
             ,
             to
             be
             required
             to
             offer
             violence
             to
             our
             mindes
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             an
             
               unsound
               profession
            
             ,
             or
             else
             (
             for
             that
             
               one
               guilt
            
             of
             not
             doing
             so
             )
             to
             be
             rejected
             as
             hereticks
             ,
             and
             denied
             the
             benefit
             of
             
               Christian
               Communion
            
             ,
             which
             we
             heartily
             desire
             to
             extend
             and
             propagate
             to
             them
             which
             deny
             it
             to
             us
             .
             All
             this
             thus
             put
             together
             ,
             and
             applied
             to
             this
             present
             matter
             will
             certainly
             vindicate
             us
             from
             all
             appearance
             of
             guilt
             of
             this
             
               second
               branch
            
             of
             the
             
               second
               sort
            
             of
             Schisme
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             The
             third
             species
             of
             this
             Schism
             ,
             as
             an
             offence
             against
             that
             charity
             due
             from
             every
             Christian
             to
             every
             Christian
             ,
             examined
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             
             LAstly
             ,
             as
             Schism
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             that
             charity
             which
             is
             due
             from
             
               every
               Christian
            
             to
             
               every
               Christian
            
             ,
             so
             it
             will
             be
             best
             distributed
             (
             according
             to
             what
             we
             see
             noted
             by
             by
             the
             
               Apostle
               ,
               Rom.
            
             14.
             in
             the
             Jewish
             ,
             and
             
               Gentile
               Christians
            
             )
             
             into
             the
             judging
             ,
             and
             the
             despising
             of
             others
             ,
             either
             of
             which
             was
             ,
             if
             not
             
               formally
               Schism
            
             ,
             yet
             soon
             improveable
             into
             it
             ,
             when
             it
             would
             not
             be
             repressed
             by
             the
             
               Apostles
               admonitions
            
             ,
             
             The
             
               Jewish
               Christians
            
             we
             know
             judged
             ,
             and
             damned
             all
             that
             would
             not
             observe
             the
             
               Mosaical
               law
            
             ,
             and
             would
             not
             associate
             ,
             or
             communicate
             with
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             
               height
               Diotrephes
            
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             the
             
               Gentile
               believers
            
             ,
             who
             began
             with
             the
             other
             branch
             ,
             that
             of
             vilifying
             the
             
               weak
               Jew
            
             ,
             at
             last
             arrived
             to
             ,
             
               not
               receiving
               ,
               forbidding
               to
               receive
               ,
               and
               casting
               out
               the
               brethren
               ,
            
             3
             Joh.
             10.
             
             And
             whether
             the
             Romanists
             or
             we
             ,
             
             are
             thus
             guilty
             ,
             will
             soon
             be
             discernible
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             For
             the
             former
             ,
             that
             of
             judging
             ,
             and
             so
             separating
             from
             their
             brethren
             (
             if
             yet
             we
             may
             be
             allowed
             that
             title
             )
             it
             is
             evident
             by
             their
             own
             acknowledgment
             ,
             how
             guilty
             they
             are
             ,
             and
             how
             guiltlesse
             we
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             It
             hath
             been
             a
             special
             motive
             ,
             and
             argument
             to
             gain
             proselytes
             to
             their
             party
             for
             some
             years
             ,
             that
             by
             
               our
               Confession
            
             there
             is
             salvation
             to
             be
             had
             among
             them
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             judgment
             no
             possible
             hope
             of
             it
             for
             us
             .
             This
             weapon
             of
             their's
             used
             so
             studiously
             against
             us
             ,
             to
             anticipate
             and
             prejudge
             ,
             in
             general
             ,
             whatsoever
             can
             be
             particularly
             said
             to
             assert
             our
             doctrines
             ,
             and
             practises
             ,
             will
             certainly
             be
             as
             usefull
             in
             our
             hands
             ,
             as
             
               Goliah's
               sword
            
             in
             David's
             to
             give
             this
             wound
             (
             I
             wish
             it
             may
             not
             prove
             as
             fatal
             )
             to
             our
             
               vaunting
               enemies
            
             :
             For
             certainly
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             any
             truth
             in
             that
             motive
             ,
             then
             are
             they
             professedly
             the
             men
             ,
             that
             
               judge
               their
               brethren
            
             ,
             and
             as
             confessedly
             we
             the
             men
             ,
             that
             doe
             
               not
               judge
            
             them
             .
             And
             if
             S.
             Cyprian's
             rule
             be
             true
             (
             who
             had
             as
             well
             considered
             the
             nature
             of
             Schism
             ,
             and
             as
             diligently
             armed
             the
             
             Christians
             of
             his
             age
             against
             it
             ,
             and
             given
             us
             as
             sure
             rules
             to
             judge
             by
             ,
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             as
             any
             )
             that
             they
             that
             maintain
             any
             difference
             in
             opinion
             against
             other
             Christians
             ,
             must
             ,
             if
             they
             will
             avoid
             the
             evil
             of
             schism
             ,
             manage
             it
             with
             this
             
               temper
               (
               neminem
               damnantes
               ,
               neminem
               à
               communione
               nostrâ
               arcentes
               )
               never
               condemn
               any
               ,
               or
               forbid
               them
               our
               communion
               ,
            
             then
             is
             the
             schism
             (
             because
             the
             uncharitableness
             )
             on
             their
             parts
             ,
             not
             on
             ours
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             the
             saying
             ,
             we
             are
             Hereticks
             ,
             and
             so
             certainly
             excluded
             
               salvation
               ,
               Schismaticks
            
             ,
             and
             so
             out
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             way
             to
             salvation
             ,
             that
             can
             give
             this
             
               sanguinarie
               judgment
            
             any
             meeker
             a
             title
             ;
             For
             that
             we
             are
             such
             ,
             being
             as
             much
             denied
             ,
             as
             any
             thing
             ,
             and
             that
             negative
             offered
             to
             be
             proved
             ,
             and
             vindicated
             by
             all
             those
             evidences
             ,
             by
             which
             any
             matter
             of
             doctrine
             ,
             (
             from
             whence
             this
             question
             depends
             )
             can
             duly
             be
             cleared
             ,
             this
             
               unproved
               affirmation
            
             ,
             that
             we
             
               are
               such
            
             ,
             is
             certainly
             a
             
               petitio
               principii
               ,
               a
               begging
               of
               the
               question
               ,
            
             a
             supposing
             that
             in
             the
             debate
             ,
             which
             they
             know
             we
             are
             as
             farre
             from
             confessing
             ,
             as
             they
             from
             having
             proved
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             the
             most
             certain
             
             proof
             ,
             that
             such
             judging
             is
             uncharitable
             ;
             I
             wish
             there
             were
             not
             many
             other
             as
             
               pregnant
               indications
            
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             And
             for
             that
             of
             despising
             or
             
               setting
               at
               nought
               the
               brother
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             
               Ap
               
               ostles
            
             argument
             also
             that
             they
             
               walk
               not
               charitably
            
             ,
             and
             the
             effect
             whereof
             is
             evident
             ,
             the
             
               casting
               them
               out
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
            
             if
             the
             cause
             may
             be
             concluded
             by
             the
             effect
             ,
             the
             guilt
             lies
             on
             the
             Romanists
             side
             ,
             not
             on
             ours
             (
             as
             hath
             formerly
             appeared
             )
             And
             truly
             we
             are
             so
             sensible
             of
             the
             many
             prepossessions
             ,
             and
             
               strong
               prejudices
            
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             advantage
             of
             education
             ,
             the
             
               prescribed
               credulity
            
             to
             all
             that
             the
             Church
             shall
             propose
             ,
             the
             doctrine
             of
             infallibility
             ,
             the
             
               shutting
               up
            
             the
             scriptures
             in
             an
             
               unknown
               language
            
             ,
             the
             impossibility
             that
             the
             multitude
             should
             search
             ▪
             or
             examine
             tradition
             with
             their
             own
             eyes
             ,
             the
             
               prosperous
               flourishing
            
             estate
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               Church
            
             (
             and
             the
             persecutions
             ,
             and
             calamities
             ▪
             and
             expressions
             of
             
               God's
               displeasure
            
             on
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             )
             the
             literal
             sound
             of
             [
             
               Hoc
               est
               corpus
               meum
            
             ]
             for
             their
             principal
             (
             espoused
             )
             doctrine
             of
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             and
             som
             other
             the
             like
             means
             ,
             are
             infused
             into
             the
             multitude
             
             of
             men
             and
             women
             ,
             that
             are
             brought
             up
             without
             any
             knowledge
             of
             ours
             ,
             in
             a
             firm
             belief
             of
             all
             their
             pretensions
             ,
             that
             we
             are
             as
             farre
             from
             setting
             them
             
               at
               nought
            
             ,
             or
             despising
             them
             ,
             as
             from
             that
             (
             which
             by
             their
             doing
             it
             first
             is
             made
             impossible
             for
             us
             to
             be
             guilty
             of
             )
             
               the
               casting
               them
               out
               of
               the
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             I
             foresee
             not
             any
             objection
             ,
             which
             may
             give
             me
             temptation
             ,
             or
             excuse
             farther
             to
             enlarge
             on
             this
             matter
             ,
             And
             professe
             not
             to
             know
             any
             other
             branch
             of
             Schism
             ,
             or
             colour
             of
             fastening
             that
             guilt
             upon
             our
             Church
             ,
             made
             use
             of
             by
             any
             ,
             which
             hath
             not
             been
             either
             prevented
             in
             the
             grounds
             of
             this
             discourse
             ,
             or
             distinctly
             taken
             notice
             of
             ,
             and
             
               competently
               vindicated
            
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             the
             design'd
             brevity
             would
             permit
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
             Concerning
             the
             present
             Persecution
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             and
             the
             advantages
             sought
             from
             thence
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             1.
             
             OUr
             Establishment
             being
             thus
             freed
             from
             Schism
             ,
             I
             shall
             not
             now
             entertain
             my self
             with
             any
             fear
             ,
             that
             the
             Persecution
             ,
             which
             we
             are
             under
             ,
             will
             involve
             us
             in
             it
             .
             
             Yet
             can
             I
             not
             but
             take
             notice
             of
             the
             style
             ,
             that
             some
             Romanists
             have
             in
             these
             last
             years
             ,
             on
             
               this
               occasion
            
             ,
             chosen
             to
             make
             use
             of
             ,
             calling
             us
             [
             
               the
               late
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ]
             The
             interpretation
             whereof
             is
             to
             my
             understanding
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             calamities
             ,
             under
             which
             now
             we
             suffer
             ,
             have
             made
             us
             cease
             to
             be
             a
             Church
             :
             And
             therefore
             having
             learned
             ,
             and
             abundantly
             experimented
             ,
             what
             scandal
             the
             Crosse
             hath
             alwaies
             carried
             along
             with
             it
             ,
             how
             willing
             enemies
             are
             to
             take
             advantage
             ,
             and
             ground
             arguments
             on
             afflictions
             ,
             and
             how
             ordinary
             it
             is
             for
             friends
             ,
             to
             take
             impressions
             from
             such
             
               sensible
               ,
               carnal
            
             motives
             ,
             and
             being
             secured
             by
             the
             storie
             of
             the
             
               Antient
               Gnosticks
            
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             neither
             
               scandalous
               excesse
            
             of
             fear
             ,
             
             nor
             want
             of
             charity
             ,
             to
             think
             it
             possible
             ,
             that
             this
             ,
             as
             other
             
               antient
               heresies
            
             ,
             may
             now
             as
             in
             a
             
               Platonick
               year
            
             (
             if
             not
             carefully
             warded
             )
             return
             on
             us
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             revolution
             ,
             I
             shall
             therefore
             conclude
             this
             paper
             with
             an
             attempt
             to
             remove
             this
             prejudice
             ;
             The
             utmost
             whereof
             being
             formed
             into
             an
             objection
             ,
             is
             this
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             absolutely
             necessary
             to
             communicate
             with
             some
             one
             
               visible
               Church
            
             ,
             that
             now
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             is
             not
             such
             ,
             and
             consequently
             that
             it
             must
             be
             
               cast
               off
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Roman
               Church
            
             so
             illustriously
             visible
             ,
             be
             taken
             up
             in
             stead
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             2.
             
             
             To
             this
             reserve
             I
             shall
             make
             my
             returns
             by
             these
             
               degrees
               ,
               First
            
             that
             by
             the
             making
             this
             objection
             ,
             or
             drawing
             any
             argument
             against
             any
             member
             of
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             from
             the
             present
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             
               improsperous
               circumstances
            
             of
             affairs
             ,
             It
             must
             be
             supposed
             ,
             that
             
               twenty
               years
            
             since
             ,
             this
             person
             ,
             the
             
               supposed
               subject
            
             of
             discourse
             ,
             living
             regularly
             in
             this
             Church
             ,
             under
             his
             superiours
             ,
             was
             not
             then
             chargeable
             w
             th
             this
             crime
             of
             not
             communicating
             with
             a
             
               visible
               Church
            
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             3.
             
             This
             consequent
             I
             shall
             not
             be
             
             so
             much
             my
             own
             flatterer
             as
             to
             think
             it
             will
             be
             allowed
             me
             ▪
             by
             the
             Romanist
             ,
             who
             will
             ,
             I
             know
             ,
             at
             another
             time
             accuse
             the
             whole
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             (
             ever
             since
             the
             Reformation
             )
             of
             schism
             from
             the
             
               Catholick
               Church
            
             ,
             and
             make
             the
             communicating
             with
             it
             20
             years
             since
             ,
             as
             dangerous
             as
             now
             the
             not
             communicating
             with
             any
             :
             But
             the
             reason
             of
             my
             laying
             this
             foundation
             is
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             vanity
             of
             the
             
               present
               objection
            
             ,
             For
             if
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             20
             years
             since
             ,
             were
             not
             a
             Church
             ,
             but
             a
             society
             of
             Schismaticks
             ,
             not
             a
             
               particular
               Church
            
             (
             which
             ,
             if
             so
             ,
             must
             be
             a
             part
             ,
             or
             member
             of
             the
             Vniversal
             ,
             and
             such
             it
             is
             not
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             truly
             separated
             from
             that
             body
             ,
             in
             the
             unity
             of
             which
             it
             is
             obliged
             to
             remain
             )
             but
             a
             separated
             ,
             and
             
               torn
               off
            
             ,
             and
             so
             a
             
               livelesse
               ,
               ejected
               branch
            
             ,
             then
             whatsoever
             hath
             now
             befallen
             us
             ,
             and
             the
             consequence
             of
             that
             ,
             the
             supposed
             impossibility
             of
             cōmunicating
             with
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             ,
             will
             but
             leave
             us
             where
             we
             were
             ,
             the
             impossibility
             of
             communicating
             with
             a
             
               schismatical
               society
            
             ,
             being
             not
             chargeable
             on
             us
             ,
             as
             a
             crime
             ,
             by
             them
             ,
             who
             make
             the
             communicating
             with
             all
             such
             societies
             so
             
             damnable
             ;
             And
             therefore
             I
             say
             ,
             to
             the
             making
             this
             any
             objection
             ,
             't
             is
             necessary
             ,
             that
             that
             be
             supposed
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             for
             that
             cause
             laid
             as
             my
             foundation
             ,
             that
             20
             years
             since
             a
             member
             of
             the
             
               English
               Church
            
             was
             not
             under
             this
             guilt
             of
             
               not
               communicating
            
             with
             some
             one
             
               visible
               Church
            
             ;
             And
             if
             then
             he
             were
             not
             ,
             (
             or
             ,
             for
             discourse
             sake
             ,
             be
             by
             the
             objecter
             supposed
             not
             to
             have
             been
             )
             then
             it
             infallibly
             ,
             and
             irrefragably
             follows
             (
             which
             is
             the
             
               second
               proposition
            
             )
             that
             he
             that
             20
             years
             since
             was
             not
             under
             this
             guilt
             of
             
               not
               communicating
            
             —
             is
             either
             
               not
               guilty
            
             of
             it
             now
             ,
             or
             else
             hath
             
               voluntarily
               committed
            
             or
             omitted
             somewhat
             ,
             which
             commission
             or
             omission
             hath
             been
             the
             contracting
             of
             this
             guilt
             .
             For
             that
             somewhat
             ,
             which
             hath
             not
             been
             his
             choise
             ,
             shall
             become
             his
             crime
             ,
             that
             what
             hath
             been
             his
             saddest
             part
             of
             infelicity
             ,
             the
             evil
             against
             which
             he
             hath
             most
             industriously
             contended
             ,
             should
             be
             accounted
             his
             offence
             ▪
             when
             it
             is
             his
             punishment
             ,
             I
             shall
             not
             fear
             will
             be
             affirmed
             by
             any
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             4.
             
             Thirdly
             then
             ,
             the
             businesse
             is
             brought
             to
             this
             issue
             ,
             that
             that
             person
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             subject
             of
             our
             discourse
             
             (
             he
             that
             20
             
               years
               since
            
             ,
             was
             a
             member
             of
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             )
             be
             now
             proved
             by
             some
             commission
             or
             omission
             of
             his
             ,
             voluntarily
             to
             have
             contracted
             this
             guilt
             ,
             or
             else
             be
             absolved
             ,
             and
             freed
             from
             it
             ;
             If
             he
             have
             contracted
             it
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             by
             some
             irregularity
             of
             actions
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             standing
             rule
             and
             Canons
             of
             this
             Church
             ;
             or
             by
             disobedience
             to
             some
             commands
             of
             his
             
               Ecclesiastical
               superiors
            
             ;
             And
             as
             in
             neither
             of
             these
             I
             shall
             excuse
             any
             that
             hath
             been
             guilty
             ,
             so
             if
             ,
             being
             not
             fallen
             under
             the
             
               actual
               Censures
            
             of
             the
             Church
             for
             it
             ,
             he
             now
             timely
             and
             sincerely
             return
             with
             contrition
             ,
             and
             reformation
             ,
             I
             shall
             hope
             it
             will
             not
             be
             imputed
             to
             him
             ;
             But
             however
             this
             cannot
             be
             insisted
             on
             by
             the
             objecter
             ,
             because
             I
             speak
             ,
             and
             so
             must
             he
             ,
             of
             him
             that
             hath
             lived
             regularly
             (
             not
             of
             him
             that
             hath
             not
             )
             And
             of
             him
             't
             is
             apparent
             ,
             that
             all
             that
             he
             hath
             done
             ,
             is
             ,
             to
             adhere
             to
             his
             
               former
               principles
            
             ,
             when
             others
             have
             not
             ,
             to
             have
             testified
             his
             constancy
             with
             (
             not
             only
             venturing
             but
             )
             
               actually
               losing
            
             either
             possessions
             ,
             or
             liberty
             (
             and
             the
             benefit
             of
             
               Ecclesiastical
               assemblies
            
             )
             rather
             then
             he
             
             would
             joyn
             ,
             or
             appear
             to
             joyn
             with
             Schismaticks
             ,
             when
             others
             have
             made
             all
             worldly
             advantages
             by
             the
             rupture
             ;
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             been
             patient
             ,
             and
             
               not
               fainted
            
             ;
             and
             never
             departed
             from
             his
             rule
             ,
             though
             it
             have
             cost
             him
             dear
             to
             stick
             fast
             to
             it
             ;
             And
             I
             hope
             no
             body
             will
             be
             so
             uncharitable
             ,
             as
             
               to
               grieve
            
             ,
             and
             gall
             him
             ,
             
               whom
               God
               hath
               thus
               suffered
            
             to
             be
             chastised
             ,
             upon
             no
             other
             provocation
             ,
             but
             this
             ,
             his
             having
             been
             thus
             afflicted
             and
             persecuted
             .
             This
             is
             too
             clear
             a
             truth
             to
             need
             confirming
             ,
             and
             yet
             this
             is
             the
             utmost
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             be
             driven
             to
             ,
             supposing
             the
             most
             that
             the
             objection
             can
             be
             imagined
             to
             
               suppose
               ,
               viz
            
             :
             that
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             is
             now
             invisible
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             5.
             
             But
             then
             in
             the
             fourth
             place
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             added
             ,
             that
             as
             yet
             ,
             
               Blessed
               be
               God
            
             ,
             the
             
               Church
               of
               England
            
             is
             not
             invisible
             ;
             It
             is
             still
             preserved
             in
             Bishops
             and
             
               Presbyters
               rightly
               ordained
            
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             
               rightly
               baptized
            
             ,
             none
             of
             which
             have
             fallen
             off
             from
             their
             profession
             ;
             And
             the
             only
             thing
             imaginable
             to
             be
             objected
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             being
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             schism
             hath
             so
             farre
             been
             extended
             by
             the
             force
             ,
             that
             many
             ,
             if
             not
             
               most
               Churches
               parochial
            
             
             are
             filled
             by
             those
             ,
             who
             have
             set
             up
             a
             new
             ,
             or
             a
             no-form
             of
             worship
             ,
             and
             so
             that
             many
             men
             cannot
             any
             otherwise
             ▪
             then
             in
             private
             families
             ,
             
               serve
               God
            
             ,
             after
             the
             Church-way
             ,
             that
             sure
             will
             be
             of
             little
             weight
             ,
             when
             the
             Romanists
             are
             remembred
             to
             be
             the
             objecters
             ,
             who
             cannot
             but
             know
             ,
             that
             this
             is
             the
             only
             way
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             had
             of
             
               serving
               God
            
             in
             this
             Kingdome
             ,
             these
             many
             years
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             night-meetings
             of
             the
             
               Primitive
               Christians
            
             in
             dens
             and
             caves
             are
             as
             pertinent
             to
             the
             justifying
             of
             our
             condition
             ,
             as
             they
             can
             be
             of
             any
             ,
             and
             when
             't
             is
             certain
             ,
             that
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               forsaking
               of
               the
               assemblies
               ,
               Heb.
            
             10.25
             .
             is
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               our
               wilfull
               fault
            
             v.
             26.
             but
             only
             our
             
               unhappy
               lot
            
             ▪
             who
             are
             forced
             either
             not
             to
             frequent
             the
             assemblies
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             incourage
             (
             &
             incurre
             the
             scandal
             of
             seeming
             to
             approve
             )
             the
             practises
             of
             those
             that
             have
             departed
             from
             the
             Church
             .
             That
             we
             doe
             not
             decline
             order
             ,
             or
             
               publick
               communion
            
             ▪
             and
             consequently
             are
             not
             to
             be
             charged
             for
             not
             enjoying
             those
             benefits
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             we
             vehemently
             thirst
             after
             ,
             is
             evident
             by
             the
             extensive
             nature
             ▪
             of
             our
             persecution
             ,
             the
             
             same
             tempest
             having
             with
             us
             thrown
             out
             all
             order
             ,
             and
             
               form
               ,
               Bishops
            
             ,
             and
             Liturgie
             together
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             curstnesse
             of
             theirs
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             any
             obstinatenesse
             ,
             or
             unreconcileablenesse
             of
             ours
             (
             which
             alone
             were
             the
             guilt
             of
             non-communion
             )
             is
             all
             that
             unhappinesse
             of
             the
             
               constant
               sons
            
             of
             the
             
               present
               English
               Church
            
             to
             be
             imputed
             ,
             in
             which
             alone
             this
             whole
             objection
             is
             founded
             .
          
           
             §
             .
             6.
             
             
             I
             cannot
             discern
             any
             farther
             appearance
             of
             difficulty
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             and
             therefore
             shall
             no
             farther
             lengthen
             this
             Appendage
             ,
             then
             by
             offering
             it
             to
             the
             consideration
             of
             the
             
               indifferent
               Reader
            
             ,
             whether
             this
             objection
             can
             ever
             in
             future
             times
             be
             improveable
             into
             a
             charge
             against
             us
             ,
             or
             our
             posterity
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             either
             Bishops
             stand
             ,
             and
             continue
             to
             ordain
             among
             us
             ,
             or
             it
             is
             not
             
               our
               faults
            
             that
             they
             doe
             not
             stand
             .
             To
             which
             purpose
             it
             may
             be
             remembred
             ▪
             what
             befell
             the
             Jewes
             whether
             under
             the
             Zelots
             fury
             ,
             or
             the
             Romans
             yoke
             ;
             The
             
               former
               threw
            
             out
             the
             
               lawfull
               successive
               High
               Priests
            
             ,
             and
             
               Priests
               of
               the
               sons
               of
               Aaron
               ,
            
             and
             put
             into
             those
             sacred
             offices
             the
             most
             
               ignorant
               rusticks
            
             ,
             
             some
             so
             void
             of
             all
             degree
             of
             knowledge
             ,
             saith
             Josephus
             ,
             that
             they
             knew
             not
             what
             the
             very
             word
             [
             Priest
             ]
             signified
             .
             The
             
               Roman
               Conquerours
            
             by
             their
             Procurators
             put
             in
             annually
             whom
             they
             pleased
             to
             choose
             (
             without
             consideration
             of
             the
             
               Aaronical
               line
            
             )
             into
             the
             
               chief
               Priest's
               office
            
             ;
             I
             shall
             here
             demand
             of
             any
             ,
             Whether
             (
             supposing
             and
             granting
             it
             as
             undeniable
             ,
             that
             the
             Zelots
             were
             formally
             Schismaticks
             ,
             or
             with
             some
             improvement
             ,
             in
             Josephus
             his
             style
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             seditious
             )
             there
             can
             be
             any
             ground
             of
             reason
             ,
             or
             equity
             ,
             to
             involve
             ,
             or
             conclude
             under
             the
             same
             guilt
             those
             that
             lived
             under
             those
             imposed
             ,
             usurping
             
               High
               Priests
            
             ,
             supposing
             those
             inferiors
             to
             have
             been
             as
             farre
             from
             consenting
             to
             the
             continuance
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             such
             usurpation
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             circumstances
             were
             such
             ,
             that
             they
             lay
             not
             under
             the
             appearance
             of
             doing
             ,
             what
             they
             did
             not
             ,
             and
             so
             had
             not
             the
             scandal
             ,
             any
             more
             ,
             then
             the
             reality
             of
             that
             guilt
             .
             The
             Reader
             ,
             I
             suppose
             ,
             will
             be
             able
             to
             answer
             this
             Quaere
             to
             himself
             ,
             and
             supersede
             all
             necessity
             of
             making
             up
             the
             Parallel
             .
          
           
           
             §
             .
             7.
             
             
             And
             then
             I
             have
             at
             this
             time
             no
             farther
             exercise
             for
             him
             ,
             but
             that
             he
             will
             joyn
             in
             
               ardent
               prayers
            
             with
             me
             ,
             that
             God
             will
             restore
             that
             which
             is
             
               lost
               ,
               reduce
            
             that
             heavenly
             grace
             ,
             and
             
               incomparable
               blessing
            
             of
             
               Christian
               peace
            
             and
             
               holy
               communion
            
             among
             all
             ,
             that
             have
             received
             the
             honour
             of
             being
             called
             by
             his
             name
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             all
             
               minde
               the
               same
               thing
            
             ,
             fix
             the
             
               same
               common
            
             designes
             ,
             love
             ,
             and
             aid
             ,
             and
             promote
             one
             anothers
             good
             ,
             unanimously
             glorifie
             him
             here
             with
             
               one
               tongue
            
             ,
             and
             heart
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             all
             be
             glorified
             with
             him
             ,
             and
             sing
             joynt
             Hosannah's
             ,
             and
             Hallelujah's
             to
             him
             to
             all
             eternity
             .
          
           
             Amen
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
           ERRATA
           .
        
         
           
             PAge
             42.
             line
             3.
             dele
             )
          
           
             p.
             73.
             li.
             9.
             lege
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             so
             —
          
           
             p.
             81.
             marg
             :
             li.
             12.
             lege
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             p.
             85.
             l.
             24.
             lege
             Where
             as
          
           
             p.
             91.
             li.
             4.
             lege
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             p.
             107.
             li.
             2.
             for
             third
             lege
             second
          
           
             p.
             141.
             li.
             25.
             for
             quae
             re
             :
             quo
          
           
             p.
             157.
             li.
             3.
             lege
             that
             the
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Contents
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 I.
              
               AN
               Introduction
               ,
               the
               danger
               ,
               and
               sin
               of
               Schism
               .
            
             
               page
               1
            
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 II.
              
               What
               Schism
               us
               ,
               together
               with
               some
               general
               considerations
               thereon
               .
            
             12
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 III.
              
               The
               several
               sorts
               of
               Schism
               .
            
             31
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 IV.
              
               The
               pretended
               evidences
               of
               the
               Romanist
               against
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               examined
               ,
               and
               first
               that
               from
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome's
               Supremacy
               by
               Christ's
               donation
               to
               S.
               Peter
               .
            
             66
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 V.
              
               The
               evidences
               from
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Romes
               succeeding
               S.
               Peter
               examined
               .
            
             92
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 VI.
              
               Their
               second
               plea
               from
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               having
               planted
               Christianity
               among
               us
               .
            
             107
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 VII
              
               .
               Their
               third
               Evidence
               from
               our
               casting
               off
               Obedience
               to
               the
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
               at
               the
               Reformation
               .
            
             132
          
           
             
               
               
                 CHAP.
                 VIII
              
               .
               Of
               the
               second
               sort
               of
               Schism
               ,
               as
               that
               is
               an
               offence
               against
               mutual
               Charity
               ,
               This
               divided
               into
               three
               species
               ,
               and
               the
               first
               here
               examined
               .
            
             155
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 IX
              
               .
               The
               second
               species
               of
               this
               Schism
               examined
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               an
               offence
               against
               external
               peace
               ,
               or
               Communion
               Ecclesiastical
               .
            
             163
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 X.
              
               The
               third
               species
               of
               this
               Schism
               ,
               as
               an
               offence
               against
               that
               charity
               due
               from
               every
               Christian
               to
               every
               Christian
               ,
               examined
               .
            
             169
          
           
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XI
              
               .
               Concerning
               the
               present
               Persecution
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               ,
               and
               the
               advantages
               sought
               from
               thence
               .
            
             174
          
        
         
           THE
           END
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           CATALOGUE
           of
           some
           Books
           Printed
           for
           
             Richard
             Royston
          
           at
           the
           Angel
           in
           Ivie-lane
           ,
           London
           .
        
         
           
             A
             Paraphrase
             and
             Annotations
             upon
             all
             the
             Books
             of
             the
             New
             Testament
             by
             
               Henry
               Hammond
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             fol.
             
          
           
             
               The
               Practical
               Catechisme
            
             ,
             with
             all
             other
             English
             Treatises
             of
             
               Henry
               Hammond
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             two
             volumes
             in
             4o.
          
           
             
               Dissertationes
               quatuor
               ,
               quibus
               Episcopatus
               Jura
               ex
               S.
               Scripturis
               &
               Primaeva
               Antiquitate
               adstruuntur
               ,
               contra
               sententiam
               D.
            
             Blondelli
             
               &
               aliorum
               .
               Authore
            
             Henrico
             Hammond
             .
             in
             4o.
          
           
             A
             Letter
             of
             Resolution
             of
             six
             Quaere's
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             
               
                 The
                 names
                 of
                 several
                 Treatises
                 and
                 Sermons
                 written
                 by
                 
                   Jer.
                   Taylor
                
                 D.
                 D.
                 viz.
                 
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 A
                 Course
                 of
                 Sermons
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 Sundaies
                 of
                 the
                 Year
                 ;
                 Together
                 with
                 a
                 Discourse
                 of
                 the
                 Divine
                 Institution
                 ,
                 Necessity
                 ,
                 Sacrednesse
                 ,
                 and
                 Separation
                 of
                 the
                 Office
                 Ministerial
                 ,
                 in
                 fol.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Episcopacy
                 asserted
                 ,
                 in
                 4o.
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 Life
                 and
                 Death
                 of
                 the
                 Ever-blessed
                 Jesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 2
                 d
                 Edit
                 .
                 in
                 fol.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 Liberty
                 of
                 Prophesying
                 ,
                 in
                 4o.
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 An
                 Apology
                 for
                 authorized
                 and
                 Set-forms
                 of
                 Liturgie
                 ;
                 in
                 4o.
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 A
                 Discourse
                 of
                 Baptisme
                 ,
                 its
                 institution
                 and
                 efficacy
                 upon
                 all
                 Beleivers
                 ,
                 in
                 4o.
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 The
                 Rule
                 and
                 Exercises
                 of
                 holy
                 living
                 ,
                 in
                 12o.
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 The
                 Rule
                 and
                 exercises
                 of
                 holy
                 dying
                 ,
                 in
                 12o.
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 A
                 short
                 Catechisme
                 for
                 institution
                 of
                 young
                 persons
                 in
                 the
                 Christian
                 Religion
                 ,
                 in
                 12o.
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 The
                 Reall
                 Presence
                 and
                 Spirituall
                 of
                 CHRIST
                 in
                 the
                 Blessed
                 Sacrament
                 proved
                 against
                 the
                 Doctrine
                 of
                 Transubstantiation
                 ,
                 in
                 8o.
              
            
          
           
           
             
               Certamen
               Religiosum
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Conference
             between
             the
             late
             King
             of
             England
             ,
             and
             the
             late
             Lord
             Marquis
             of
             Worcester
             concerning
             Religion
             ,
             at
             Ragland
             Castle
             ;
             Together
             with
             a
             Vindication
             of
             the
             Protestant
             Cause
             ,
             by
             
               Chr.
               Cartwright
            
             in
             4o.
          
           
             The
             Psalter
             of
             David
             ,
             with
             Titles
             and
             Collects
             according
             to
             the
             matter
             of
             each
             Psalm
             ,
             by
             the
             Right
             honourable
             
               Chr.
               Hatton
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Boanerges
             and
             Barnabas
             ,
             or
             Judgement
             and
             Mercy
             for
             wounded
             and
             afflicted
             souls
             ,
             in
             several
             Soliloquies
             ,
             by
             
               Francis
               Quarles
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             The
             life
             of
             Faith
             in
             Dead
             Times
             ,
             by
             
               Chr.
               Hudson
            
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Motives
             for
             Prayer
             upon
             the
             seven
             dayes
             of
             the
             Week
             ,
             by
             Sir
             
               Richard
               Baker
            
             Knight
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             The
             Guide
             unto
             True
             Blessedness
             ,
             or
             a
             Body
             of
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             directing
             man
             to
             the
             saving
             knowledge
             of
             God
             ,
             by
             
               Sam.
               Crook
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Six
             excellent
             Sermons
             upon
             several
             occasions
             ,
             preached
             by
             
               Edward
               Willan
            
             Vicar
             of
             Hoxne
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             The
             Dipper
             dipt
             ,
             or
             the
             Anabaptists
             duck'd
             and
             plung'd
             over
             head
             and
             ears
             ,
             by
             
               Daniel
               Featly
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             4o.
          
           
             
               Hermes
               Theologus
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Divine
             Mercury
             :
             new
             descants
             upon
             old
             Records
             ,
             by
             
               Theoph.
               Wodnote
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Philosophical
             Elements
             ,
             concerning
             Government
             and
             Civil
             society
             :
             by
             
               Thomas
               Hobbs
            
             of
             Malmesbury
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             An
             Essay
             upon
             Statius
             ,
             or
             the
             five
             first
             books
             of
             
               Publ.
               Papinius
               Statius
            
             his
             Thebais
             ,
             by
             
               Tho.
               Stephens
            
             School-master
             in
             S.
             Edmonds-bury
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             
               Nomenclatura
               Brevis
               Anglo-Latino
               Graeca
               in
               usum
               Scholae
               Westmonasteriensis
               ,
               per
            
             F.
             Gregory
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             
               Grammatices
               Graecae
               Enchiridion
               in
               usum
               Scholae
               Collegialis
               Wigorniae
               ,
               in
            
             8o.
          
           
             A
             Discourse
             of
             Holy
             Love
             ,
             by
             Sir
             
               Geo.
               Strode
            
             Knight
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             The
             Saints
             Honey-Comb
             full
             of
             Divine
             Truths
             ,
             by
             
               Rich.
               Gove
            
             Preacher
             of
             Henton
             S.
             Gorge
             in
             Somersetshire
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             Devotion
             digested
             ,
             into
             several
             Discourses
             and
             Meditations
             upon
             the
             Lords
             most
             holy
             Prayer
             :
             Together
             with
             additional
             Exercitations
             upon
             Baptism
             ,
             The
             Lords
             Supper
             ,
             Heresies
             ,
             Blasphemy
             ,
             The
             Creatures
             ,
             Sin
             ,
             The
             souls
             pantings
             
             after
             God
             ,
             The
             Mercies
             of
             God
             ,
             The
             souls
             complaint
             of
             its
             absence
             from
             God
             ;
             by
             
               Peter
               Samwaies
            
             ,
             Fellow
             lately
             resident
             in
             Trinity
             College
             ,
             Cambridge
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Of
             the
             Division
             between
             the
             English
             and
             Romish
             Church
             upon
             Reformation
             ,
             by
             
               Hen.
               Fern
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Directions
             for
             the
             profitable
             reading
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             by
             
               John
               White
            
             M.
             A.
             in
             8o.
          
           
             The
             Exemplary
             Lives
             and
             Memorable
             Acts
             of
             9.
             the
             most
             worthy
             women
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             3
             Jews
             ,
             3
             Gentiles
             ,
             3
             Christians
             ,
             by
             
               Tho.
               Heywood
            
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             The
             Saints
             Legacies
             ,
             or
             a
             Collection
             of
             promises
             out
             of
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             
               Judicium
               Universitatis
               Oxoniensis
               de
               Solemni
               Lega
               &
               Foedere
               ,
               Juramento
               Negativo
               &c.
               in
            
             8o.
          
           
             Certain
             Sermons
             and
             Letters
             of
             Defence
             and
             Resolution
             to
             some
             of
             the
             late
             Controversaries
             of
             our
             times
             by
             
               Jasper
               Mayne
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             4o.
          
           
             
               Janua
               Linguarum
               Reserata
               ,
               sive
               omnium
               Scientiarum
               &
               Linguarum
               seminarium
               ,
               Auctore
               Cl.
               Viro
               J.
               A.
               Com●nio
               ,
               in
            
             8o.
          
           
             A
             Treatise
             concerning
             Divine
             providence
             ,
             very
             seasonable
             for
             all
             Ages
             ,
             by
             
               Tho.
               Morton
            
             Bishop
             of
             Duresme
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             Animadversions
             upon
             Mr.
             Hobbs
             his
             Leviathan
             ,
             with
             some
             Observations
             upon
             Sir
             
               Walter
               Rawleighs
            
             History
             of
             the
             World
             ,
             by
             
               Alex.
               Rosse
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Fifty
             Sermons
             preached
             by
             that
             learned
             and
             reverend
             Divine
             
               John
               Donne
            
             ,
             in
             fol.
             
          
           
             Wits-Common-wealth
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             The
             Banquet
             of
             Jests
             new
             and
             old
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             
             Balzac's
             Letters
             the
             fourth
             part
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             Quarles
             Virgin
             Widow
             a
             Play
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             Solomons
             Recantation
             ,
             in
             4o.
             by
             
               Francis
               Quarles
            
             .
          
           
             
               Amesii
               antisynodalia
               ,
               in
            
             12o.
          
           
             Christ's
             Commination
             against
             Scandalizers
             ,
             by
             
               John
               Tombes
            
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Dr.
             
             Stuart's
             Answer
             to
             
             Fountain's
             Letter
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             A
             Tract
             of
             Fortifications
             ,
             with
             22
             brasse
             cuts
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             Dr.
             Griffiths
             Sermon
             preached
             at
             S.
             Pauls
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             Blessed
             birth-day
             ,
             printed
             at
             Oxford
             ,
             in
             8o.
          
           
             A
             Discourse
             of
             the
             state
             Ecclesiastical
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             
             An
             Account
             of
             the
             Church
             Catholick
             where
             it
             was
             before
             the
             Reformation
             ,
             by
             
               Edward
               Boughen
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             4o.
          
           
             An
             Advertisement
             to
             the
             Jury-men
             of
             England
             touching
             Witches
             ,
             written
             by
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Observations
             up
             ▪
             Mr.
             Hobbs
             Leviathan
             ,
             in
             4o
             .
          
           
             Episcopacy
             and
             Presbytery
             considered
             ,
             by
             
               Hen.
               Fern
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             4o.
          
           
             A
             Sermon
             preached
             at
             the
             
               Isle
               of
               Wight
            
             before
             His
             Majesty
             ,
             by
             
               Hen.
               Fern
            
             D.
             D.
             in
             4o
             .
          
           
             The
             Commoners
             Liberty
             or
             the
             English-mans
             Birth-right
             ,
             in
             4o
             .
          
           
             An
             Expedient
             for
             composing
             Differences
             in
             Religion
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             A
             Treatise
             of
             Self-denial
             ,
             in
             4o.
          
           
             The
             holy
             Life
             and
             Death
             of
             the
             late
             Vi-countesse
             Falkland
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Certain
             Considerations
             of
             present
             Concernment
             :
             Touching
             this
             Reformed
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             by
             
               Hen.
               Fern
            
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             Englands
             Faithful
             Reprover
             and
             Monitour
             ,
             in
             12o.
          
           
             
               
                 Newly
                 published
                 ,
              
               
                 The
                 grand
                 Conspiracy
                 of
                 the
                 Members
                 against
                 the
                 Minde
                 ,
                 of
                 Jews
                 against
                 their
                 King.
                 As
                 it
                 hath
                 been
                 delivered
                 in
                 four
                 Sermons
                 ,
                 by
                 
                   John
                   Allington
                
                 ,
                 B.
                 D.
                 in
                 12o.
              
               
                 The
                 Quakers
                 Questions
                 objected
                 against
                 the
                 Ministers
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 sacred
                 acts
                 and
                 offices
                 of
                 Religion
                 ,
                 with
                 brief
                 Answets
                 thereunto
                 :
                 Together
                 with
                 a
                 Discourse
                 of
                 the
                 holy
                 Spirit
                 his
                 workings
                 and
                 impressions
                 on
                 the
                 souls
                 of
                 men
                 ,
                 by
                 
                   R.
                   Sherlock
                
                 B.
                 D.
                 in
                 8o.
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 Now
                 in
                 the
                 Presse
                 ,
              
               
                 Of
                 Fundamentals
                 in
                 a
                 notion
                 referring
                 to
                 Practise
                 ,
                 by
                 
                   H.
                   Hammond
                
                 ,
                 D.
                 D.
                 in
                 12o.
              
            
          
        
         
         
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A45426-e120
           
             Two
             concernments
             of
             al
             Christians
             .
          
           
             Practise
             of
             Christianity
             .
          
           
             Propagating
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             What
             is
             to
             be
             done
             toward
             the
             latter
             .
          
           
             The
             chief
             branches
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             considered
             in
             society
             .
          
           
             Charity
             .
          
           
             Obedience
             .
          
           
             Paternal
             exercise
             of
             Ecclesiastical
             power
             .
          
           
             The
             contrariety
             of
             Schisme
             to
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Christ
             .
          
           
             The
             Fathers
             Censures
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             (a)
             1
             Cor.
             3.4
             .
             Jude
             19.
             
             See
             
               Fulgentius
               ad
               Mon
               :
               l
            
             2.
             
          
           
             (b)
             Quisquis
             in
             Ecclesiâ
             gratiam
             consecutus
             ,
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             exierit
             ,
             reus
             sibi
             futurus
             est
             ,
             i.
             e.
             ipse
             sibi
             quod
             pereat
             imputaturus
             ;
             Quod
             Apostolus
             explanat
             ,
             docens
             haereticum
             vitandum
             esse
             ,
             ut
             à
             semetipso
             damnatū
             
               Cypr
               :
               Ep
               :
               76.
            
             
             Poenas
             quas
             meruerant
             pependerunt
             ,
             ut
             à
             nobis
             non
             ejecti
             ultro
             se
             ejecerent
             ,
             de
             ecclesiâ
             sponte
             se
             pellerent
             ,
             
               Ep
               :
               40.
            
             
             Quomodo
             te
             à
             tot
             gregibus
             scidisti
             ?
             Exscidisti
             enim
             teipsum
             .
             
               Firmilian
               :
               ad
               Cypr
               :
               Ep
               :
               75.
               
            
          
           
             (a)
             Sciat
             se
             postea
             ad
             Ecclesiam
             redire
             ,
             &
             cum
             Episcopis
             &
             plebe
             Christi
             communicare
             non
             posse
             .
             
               Ep
               :
               40.
            
             
             Aversandus
             est
             talis
             atque
             fugiendus
             quisquis
             fuerit
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             separatus
             .
             
               Ibid.
               De
               Unit
               :
               Eccles
            
             :
          
           
             (b)
             Hanc
             Ecclesiae
             unitatem
             qui
             non
             tenet
             ,
             tenere
             se
             fidem
             credit
             ?
             
               Cypr
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccles
               :
            
             Dum
             conventicula
             sibi
             diversa
             constituunt
             ,
             veritatis
             caput
             atque
             originem
             reliquerunt
             .
             Ibid.
             Fidem
             destruit
             ,
             pro
             Fide
             perfidus
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             (c)
             Schisma
             non
             faciendum
             ,
             etiamsi
             in
             unâ
             fide
             &
             eâdem
             traditione
             permaneat
             qui
             recedit
             .
             
               Cypr
               :
               Testim
               :
               l.
               3.
               c.
               86.
               
            
          
           
             (d)
             Quam
             ver●
             dilectionem
             custodit
             &
             cogitat
             ,
             qui
             discordiae
             furore
             vesanus
             Ecclesiam
             scindit
             ,
             pacem
             turbat
             ,
             charitatem
             dissipat
             .
             
               Cypr
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccles
               :
            
             Arma
             ille
             contra
             Ecclesiam
             portat
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             (e)
             Quisquis
             ab
             Ecclesia
             segregatus
             adulterae
             jungitur
             ,
             à
             promissis
             Ecclesiae
             separatur
             .
             
               Cypr
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccl
               :
            
             Habere
             jam
             non
             potest
             Deum
             patrem
             ,
             qui
             Ecclesiam
             non
             habet
             matrem
             .
             Ibid.
             Quomodo
             potest
             ei
             cum
             aliquo
             convenire
             ,
             cui
             cum
             corpore
             ipsius
             Ecclesiae
             ,
             &
             cum
             vestra
             Fraternitate
             non
             convenit
             ?
             Quomodo
             possunt
             duo
             aut
             tres
             in
             nomine
             Christi
             colligi
             ,
             quos
             constat
             à
             Christo
             &
             ab
             ejus
             Evangelio
             separari
             ?
             Ibid
             :
             Extra
             Ecclesiam
             consistens
             ,
             &
             contra
             pacem
             &
             dilectionem
             Christi
             faciens
             ,
             inter
             adversarios
             —
             computetur
             .
             
               Ep
               :
               76.
            
             
          
           
             (f)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Ignat
               :
               Ep
               :
               ad
               Eph
               :
            
             Audet
             precem
             alteram
             illicitis
             vocibus
             facere
             ,
             Dominicae
             hostiae
             veritatem
             per
             falsa
             sacrificia
             profanare
             ?
             
               Cypr
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccl
               :
            
             Vnum
             manifestum
             est
             apud
             omnes
             Spiritus
             Sancti
             gratiam
             non
             esse
             ,
             nec
             corum
             sacrificiis
             posse
             Deo
             placere
             ,
             neque
             spiritualis
             gratiae
             sanctificationem
             sacrificiis
             corum
             tribui
             ,
             qui
             offerunt
             ab
             Ecclesiastici
             corporis
             unitate
             disjuncti
             ,
             solius
             enim
             Ecclesia
             Deus
             delectatur
             sacrificiis
             ,
             quòd
             sacrificium
             Deo
             facit
             unit
             as
             spiritualis
             ,
             ubi
             pacis
             tenacitas
             fraternam
             servat
             in
             charitate
             concordiam
             .
             
               Fulgent
               :
               ad
               Monim
               :
               l.
               2.
               
            
          
           
             (g)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chrys
             :
             in
             Ep
             :
             ad
             Eph
             :
             Edit
             :
             Savil
             :
             p.
             823.
             
          
           
             (h)
             Quis
             unquam
             haereses
             instituit
             ,
             nisi
             qui
             se
             priùs
             ab
             Ecclesiae
             Catholicae
             universitate
             ,
             &
             antiquitatis
             consensione
             discreverit
             ?
             
               Vincent
               :
               c.
               34.
            
             
          
           
             (i)
             Nullum
             schisma
             non
             sibi
             aliquam
             fingit
             haeresim
             ,
             ut
             rectè
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             recessisse
             videatur
             .
             
               Hieron
               :
               ad
               Tit
               :
               c.
               3.
               
            
          
           
             (k)
             Non
             esse
             quicquam
             gravius
             sacrilegio
             schismatis
             .
             
               Aug
               :
               contra
               Parmen
               :
               l.
               2.2
               .
            
             Ingens
             flagitium
             schismatis
             Tradition
             ▪
             junxerunt
             .
             
               Optat
               :
               p.
               23.
               
               Edit
               :
               Casaub
               :
            
          
           
             (l)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Dionys
             :
             ap
             :
             Euseb
             :
             l.
             6.
             c.
             36.
             
             
               Pejus
               hec
               crimen
               est
               quàm
               quod
               admisisse
               lapsi
               videntur
               .
            
             Cypr
             :
             de
             Unit
             :
             Eccl
             :
          
           
             (m)
             Vide
             Optatum
             l.
             8.
             c.
             25.
             
          
           
             (n)
             Quàm
             sine
             spe
             sint
             ,
             &
             perditionem
             sibi
             maximam
             de
             indignatione
             Dei
             acquirant
             ,
             qui
             schisma
             feciunt
             ,
             declarat
             in
             libro
             R●g
             :
             scriptura
             ,
             ubi
             à
             tribu
             Juda
             &
             Benjamin
             decem
             tribus
             scissae
             sunt
             ,
             &
             indignatus
             est
             ,
             inquit
             ,
             Dominus
             in
             omne
             semen
             Israel
             .
             
               Cypr
               :
               Ep
               :
               76.
            
             
          
           
             (o)
             Addendo
             autem
             civitatem
             Samaritanorum
             debere
             omitti
             ,
             ubi
             erant
             schismatici
             ,
             ostendit
             schismaticos
             Gentilibus
             adaequari
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             (p)
             Exemplo
             Core
             ,
             Dathan
             ,
             &c.
             ostenditur
             &
             probatur
             obnoxios
             omnes
             &
             culpae
             &
             poenae
             futuros
             ,
             qui
             se
             schismaticis
             irreligiosâ
             temeritate
             miscuerunt
             ,
             Ibid.
             Deus
             quod
             in
             sacrilegos
             &
             parricidam
             non
             secerat
             ,
             [
             Cain
             &
             Ninive
             ]
             in
             schismaticos
             fecit
             ,
             Core
             ,
             &c.
             
             
               Optat
               :
               l.
               1.
               p.
               25.
               
            
          
           
             (q)
             Novatianus
             nec
             debet
             nec
             potest
             excipi
             ,
             quo
             minus
             ipse
             extra
             Ecclesiam
             consistens
             ,
             inter
             Antichristos
             computetur
             ,
             Ibid.
             Apparet
             Antichristos
             omnes
             esse
             quos
             constet
             à
             charitate
             atque
             ab
             unitate
             Ecclesiae
             recessisse
             ,
             Ibid.
             Videndum
             quis
             foras
             exicrit
             ,
             quis
             altare
             contra
             altare
             erexerit
             ,
             quis
             jaceat
             sub
             sententiâ
             Johannis
             Apostoli
             ,
             qui
             dixit
             multos
             Antichristos
             feras
             exituros
             ,
             
               Optat
               :
               p.
               1.
               l.
               18.
               
            
             Ab
             Ecclesiâ
             separatus
             haereticus
             est
             ,
             &
             Antichristus
             ,
             
               Prosper
               de
               Prom
               :
               &
               Praedict
               :
               implend
               :
               c.
               5.
               
            
          
           
             (r)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Ignat
             :
             Ep
             :
             ad
             Smyrnens
             :
          
           
             (ſ)
             Tales
             e●si
             occisi
             in
             confessione
             nominis
             fuerint
             ,
             macula
             ista
             nec
             sanguine
             abluitur
             ,
             inexpiabilis
             &
             gravis
             culpa
             discordiae
             nec
             passione
             purgatur
             ,
             
               Cyprian
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccl
               :
            
          
           
             No
             excuse
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             (t)
             Caeteri
             tantùm
             vel
             simplicitate
             capti
             ,
             ve●
             errore
             inducti
             ,
             vel
             aliqua
             sallentis
             astutiae
             calliditate
             decepti
             ,
             à
             fallaciae
             laqueis
             vos
             solvite
             ,
             
               Cypr
               :
               de
               Unit
               :
               Eccl
               :
            
          
           
             (u)
             Judicabit
             spiritalis
             &
             eo●s
             qui
             schisma
             operantur
             ,
             qui
             propter
             modicas
             &
             quaslibet
             causas
             ,
             magnum
             &
             gloriosum
             corpus
             Christi
             conscindunt
             ,
             &
             dividunt
             ,
             verè
             liquantes
             culicem
             ,
             &
             camelum
             diglutientes
             ,
             
               Irenae
               :
               l.
               4.
               c.
               62.
               
            
          
           
             (x)
             Nulla
             ab
             eis
             tanta
             potest
             fieri
             correptio
             ,
             quanta
             est
             schismatis
             pernicies
             ▪
             
               Irenaeus
               l.
               4.
               c.
               62.
            
             
          
           
             (y)
             Si
             possunt
             aliqui
             (
             quod
             fieri
             non
             potest
             )
             habere
             causam
             justam
             quo
             communionem
             separent
             à
             communione
             Orbis
             terrarum
             .
             
               Aug
               :
               Ep
               :
               48.
            
             
          
           
             The
             Parts
             of
             the
             ensuing
             Tract
             .
          
           
             (a)
             Non
             attendisti
             inter
             schismaticos
             &
             haereticos
             quàm
             sit
             magna
             distantia
             .
             
               Optat
               :
               l.
               1.
               p.
               13.
               
            
          
           
             (b)
             Inter
             haeresim
             &
             schisma
             hoc
             interesse
             arbitramur
             ,
             quòd
             haeresis
             perversum
             dogma
             habeat
             ,
             schisma
             propter
             Episcopalem
             dissensionem
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             pariter
             separet
             .
             
               Hieron
               :
               ad
               Tit
               :
               c.
               3.
               
            
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             word
             Schism
             .
          
           
             Reciprocal
             passion
             noted
             by
             the
             word
             .
          
           
             Schisme
             a
             voluntary
             recession
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Jude
             19.
             
          
           
             (a)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             1
             Joh.
             2.19
             .
          
           
             (b)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Heb.
             10.38
             .
          
           
             Excommunication
             no
             Schisme
             .
          
           
             (c)
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Concil
             :
             Laod
             :
             Can
             :
             40.
             
          
           
             (d)
             Propriae
             conscientiae
             videtur
             esse
             damnatio
             ,
             cùm
             quispiam
             suo
             arbitrio
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             recesserit
             .
             Hieron
             :
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Cod
               :
               Can
               :
               Afric
               :
               Can
               :
               22.
               
            
          
           
             Interpretative
             Excommunication
             .
          
           
             Continuance
             out
             of
             actual
             Communion
             ,
             without
             Schisme
             .
          
           
             Unjust
             excommunication
             hurts
             no
             man.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Papae
               à
               Christo
               dictum
               ,
               Quicquid
               ligaveris
               super
               terram
               ,
               erit
               ligatum
               ,
               non
               quicquid
               dixeris
               esse
               ligatum
               .
            
             Jacob
             :
             Angularis
             in
             Ep
             :
             ad
             Wesselum
             ap
             :
             Goldast
             :
             l.
             1.
             p.
             575.
             
             Which
             holds
             in
             the
             Interpretative
             Excommunication
             .
          
           
             M
             r
             Knots
             Concession
             in
             this
             matter
             .
             c.
             7.
             p.
             471
             ,
             472.
             
          
           
             Severe
             conditions
             of
             some
             Churches
             Communion
             .
          
           
             Make
             Communion
             with
             them
             impossible
             .
          
           
             Such
             are
             prescribing
             subscription
             of
             errors
             .
          
           
             or
             Profession
             against
             Conscience
             .
          
           
             Application
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ;
             in
             relation
             to
             the
             present
             Church
             of
             England
             .
          
           
             Unity
             Ecclesiastical
             wherein
             it
             consists
             .
          
           
             Unity
             of
             Members
             subordinate
             .
          
           
             Of
             fellow
             brethren
             .
          
           
             The
             former
             .
          
           
             The
             later
             .
          
           
             Communion
             .
          
           
             The
             branches
             of
             Schisme
             as
             it
             is
             an
             offence
             against
             Subordination
             .
          
           
             Schism
             against
             the
             Deacons
             or
             Presbyters
             .
          
           
             Against
             the
             Bishop
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             †
             Contra
             Episcopatum
             meum
             
               &c.
               Ep.
               40.
            
             
             Hi
             tribuebant
             ,
             ne
             concordarent
             cum
             Episcopo
             suo
             -
             Ibid.
             contra
             sacerdotium
             Dei
             partionem
             ruptae
             fraternitatis
             armare
             voluisse
             .
          
           
             This
             of
             a
             lighter
             &
             a
             grosser
             sort
             .
          
           
             Against
             the
             Metropolitan
             .
          
           
             
               The
               original
               of
               Metropolitans
               .
            
             
               In
               Titus
               .
            
          
           
             Eccl.
             Hist
             .
             l.
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             In
             Timothy
             .
          
           
             Hom.
             15.
             in
             1.
             
             Tim.
             5.15
             .
          
           
             Photii
             lib.
             num
             .
             254.
             
          
           
             Eccl.
             hist
             .
             l.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             In
             James
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Epist
             .
             247.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             Theod.
             in
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3.1
             .
          
           
             In
             Arg.
             Ep.
             ad
             Eph.
             
          
           
             L.
             Obser
             .
             D.
             de
             Offic.
             procons
             .
          
           
             
               Eccl.
               hist
            
             .
             l.
             4.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Or.
             ad
             Afiat
             .
          
           
             Geogr.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             2.
             
             Act.
             5.
             
          
           
             
               Nat.
               Hist
            
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             29.
             
          
           
             Ibid.
             c.
             30.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Steph.
             Byzant
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             In
             Ignatius
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
             (
             what
             his
             Province
             .
             )
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Euseb
             .
             Eccl.
             Hist
             .
             
               l.
               7.
               c.
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Syn.
             Sardic
             .
             Epist
             .
             ad
             Alex.
             ap
             .
             Athan.
             Apol.
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Athan.
             Epist
             .
             ad
             solit
             .
             vit
             .
             agent
             .
             Ex
             Provinciâ
             Italiae
             ,
             civ
             .
             Med
             ex
             Prov.
             Romanâ
             ,
             Civitate
             Portuensi
             .
             Syn.
             Arelat
             .
             1.
             in
             nominibus
             Synodo
             praefixis
             .
          
           
             
               Hist
               .
               Eccl.
            
             l.
             1·
             c.
             6.
             
          
           
             In
             
               Alexandria
               .
               Eccl.
               Hist
            
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Ibid.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             In
             S.
             Cyprian
             .
          
           
             The
             subjection
             of
             Bishops
             to
             Archbishops
             .
          
           
             Of
             Archbishops
             to
             Primates
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             (
             Original
             of
             Primates
             .
             )
          
           
             
               Eccl.
               Hist
            
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Ibid.
             c.
             d.
             
          
           
             In
             Notit
             .
             Galliae
             
               p.
               8●2
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Primates
             power
             equal
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Patriarch
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Concil
             .
             Chalced.
             Can
             penult
             .
          
           
             †
             Or.
             32.
             ad
             Alexandrin
             .
             see
             Aristid
             .
             Or.
             de
             Rom.
             Laud.
             
          
           
             And
             no
             power
             but
             of
             the
             Prince
             above
             them
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Socrat.
             
               l.
               5.
            
             
             Prooem
             .
             Ex
             Superioribus
             habetur
             Imperatores
             Sanctos
             congregationes
             Synodales
             Universalium
             Conciliorum
             totius
             Ecclesiae
             semper
             ●●cisse
             .
             Ita
             ego
             perlustrans
             gesta
             omnium
             Universalium
             usque
             ad
             octavum
             inclusivè
             Basiliitempore
             celebratum
             verum
             esse
             r●peri
             .
             Cusan
             .
             de
             concord
             .
             Cathol
             
               l.
               3.
               c.
               16.
               and
               c.
               13.
               
               See
               S.
            
             Hierom
             in
             Apol.
             ad
             Ruffin
             .
             
               l.
               2.
               where
               speaking
               of
               a
            
             pretended
             Synod
             ,
             
               he
               adds
            
             ,
             Quis
             Imperator
             hanc
             Synodum
             jusserit
             congregari
             ?
          
           
             The
             Primitive
             Power
             of
             Primates
             &c.
             
          
           
             Act.
             15
             Can.
             9.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ulp.
             Obser
             .
             D.
             de
             Offic.
             Procons
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             charge
             against
             us
             ,
             Our
             casting
             out
             the
             Popes
             Supremacy
             .
          
           
             The
             Supremacy
             of
             S.
             Peter
             examined
             .
          
           
             Evidences
             against
             it
             .
             First
             from
             his
             being
             Apostle
             of
             the
             Circumcision
             peculiarly
             .
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Theoph.
               in
            
             1
             Cor
             15.7
             .
             
               ex
               Sentententiâ
               Chrysostomi
            
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Photius
               Epist
            
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             So
             Nicephorus
             l.
             2
             c.
             38.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Euseb
               .
               Eccl.
               Hist
            
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Euseb
             .
             ex
             Clement
             :
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               l.
               5
               ▪
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Hegesippus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             ap
             .
             Euseb
             .
             
               l.
               2.
               c.
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Euseb
             .
             
               l.
               2.
               c.
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             vide
             Athan.
             in
             Synops
             .
             Epiph.
             Haer.
             78.
             
             Nyssen
             .
             de
             Resur
             .
             Or.
             2.
             
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Gal.
             1.
             &
             in
             Catal.
             Euseb
             .
             in
             Chron.
             
               p.
               43.
            
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             .
          
           
             The
             Gentiles
             were
             not
             S.
             Peters
             Province
             .
          
           
             a
             Hom.
             4.
             in
             Luc.
             
          
           
             b
             l.
             2.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             c
             de
             Syn.
             Arim.
             &
             Seleuc.
             
          
           
             d
             Ex
             com
             .
             Ignat.
             
          
           
             e
             l.
             3.
             c.
             3.
             
             Euseb
             .
             l.
             4.
             c.
             6.
             
          
           
             f
             l.
             1.
             
               adv
               .
               Carpocrat
            
             .
          
           
             a
             l.
             2.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             b
             Euseb
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             c
             Euseb
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             d
             De
             Prom.
             &
             Praedict
             :
             implend
             :
             
               c.
               5.
            
             
          
           
             Nor
             all
             the
             Circumcision
             .
          
           
             Not
             the
             Jewes
             of
             Asia
             ,
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               ap
               .
               Euseb
            
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             c
             Joannes
             apud
             Ephesum
             Ecclesiā
             sacravit
             .
             De
             Prom.
             &
             Praed
             .
             impl
             .
             
               c.
               5.
            
             
          
           
             d
             Phot.
             Bib.
             num
             .
             254.
             
          
           
             As
             neither
             the
             Gentiles
             there
             .
          
           
             Hom.
             5.
             in
             1
             Tim.
             5.19
             .
          
           
             Nor
             in
             Crete
             ,
          
           
             Nor
             in
             Britannie
             .
          
           
             *
             de
             Petr
             :
             &
             Paul
             :
             ad
             diem
             29.
             
             Junii
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Prospers
             testimony
             to
             this
             matter
             .
          
           
             A
             second
             evidence
             against
             S.
             Peters
             supremacy
             from
             the
             donation
             of
             the
             keyes
             .
          
           
             Power
             of
             the
             keyes
             given
             to
             all
             and
             each
             .
          
           
             in
             Mat.
             18.
             
          
           
             Epist
             .
             27.
             
          
           
             
               De
               Dign
               .
               Sacerd
            
             .
             c.
             5.
             
             &
             6.
             
          
           
             Ep.
             ad
             Dracont
             .
          
           
             The
             Romanists
             argument
             from
             
               Tu
               es
               Petrus
            
             evacuated
             .
          
           
             No
             privilege
             by
             succession
             from
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             S.
             Peter
             is
             proved
             to
             have
             himself
             .
          
           
             *
             
               De
               Praescript
            
             .
             c.
             32.
             
          
           
             *
             The
             privileges
             attending
             S.
             Peters
             successor
             belonging
             rather
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Antioch
             then
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             The
             Primacy
             belonged
             to
             Rome
             upon
             another
             score
             .
          
           
             Can.
             penult
             .
          
           
             The
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councel
             of
             Chalcedon
             rejected
             by
             the
             Romanists
             .
          
           
             The
             dignity
             of
             Patriarchs
             reconcileable
             with
             the
             independency
             of
             Primates
             .
          
           
             The
             Canon
             of
             Ephesus
             against
             encroaching
             on
             any
             others
             Province
             .
          
           
             Instances
             of
             Independent
             power
             in
             Archbishops
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             a
             Caetera
             Provinciae
             sub
             ejus
             sint
             authoritate
             ,
             
               i.
               e.
            
             tam
             ipsa
             mediterranea
             Dacia
             ,
             quàm
             Dacia
             Ripensis
             ,
             nec
             non
             Mysia
             ,
             Secunda
             Dardania
             ,
             &
             Praevalitana
             Provincia
             &
             secunda
             Macedonia
             ,
             &
             pars
             secunda
             etiam
             Pannoniae
             ,
             quae
             in
             Bacen●i
             est
             civitate
             .
             Justin
             :
             de
             Privileg
             :
             Archiep
             :
             Just
             :
             Prim
             :
             ed
             :
             à
             Gothofred
             :
          
           
             b
             Volumus
             ut
             Primae
             Justinianae
             patriae
             nostrae
             pro
             tempore
             sacrosanctus
             Antistes
             ,
             non
             solùm
             Metroplitanus
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             Archiepiscopus
             fiat
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             c
             Multis
             &
             variis
             modis
             nostram
             patriam
             augere
             cupientes
             ,
             in
             qua
             Deus
             praestitit
             nobis
             ad
             hunc
             modum
             (
             So
             Gothofred
             
               reads
               ,
               but
               certainly
               it
               should
               be
            
             ad
             ,
             or
             in
             hunc
             mundum
             )
             quem
             ipse
             condidit
             ,
             venire
             .
             Ibid.
             Necessarium
             duximus
             ipsam
             gloriosissimam
             Praefecturam
             ,
             quae
             in
             Pannoniâ
             erat
             ,
             in
             nostrâ
             foelicissimâ
             patriâcollocare
             .
             Ib.
             
          
           
             *
             Quando
             autem
             te
             ab
             ●âc
             ▪
             luce
             decedere
             contigerit
             ,
             pro
             tempore
             Archiepiscopum
             ejus
             à
             venerabili
             suo
             Concilio
             Metropolitanorum
             ordinari
             sancimus
             ,
             quem
             ad
             modum
             decet
             Archiepiscopum
             omnibus
             honoratum
             Ecclesiis
             provehi
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             The
             unreasonablenesse
             of
             confining
             the
             Catholick
             Church
             to
             the
             number
             of
             those
             that
             live
             in
             the
             Roman
             subjection
             .
          
           
             The
             plea
             from
             Planting
             the
             Faith
             unreconcileable
             with
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             A
             Dilemma
             to
             the
             Romanist
             .
          
           
             The
             Faith
             planted
             here
             before
             Augustine
             the
             Monk.
             
          
           
             *
             Suscepistis
             nuper
             in
             Regno
             Britanniae
             legem
             &
             fidem
             Christi
             .
          
           
             And
             not
             quite
             destroyed
             by
             Dioclesian
             .
          
           
             *
             See
             S.
             
               Hen
               :
               Spelman
               ,
               Concil
               :
               Anglic
               :
            
             pag.
             26.
             out
             of
             the
             Annales
             of
             Gisburne
             .
          
           
             †
             à
             Samsone
             usque
             tempus
             Henrici
             primi
             ,
             sederunt
             Meneviae
             undecim
             Episcopi
             ,
             &
             usque
             ad
             hoc
             tempus
             Episcopi
             Meneviae
             à
             suis
             su●fraganeis
             Wallensibus
             ibidem
             fuerunt
             consecrati
             ,
             nullâ
             penitus
             professione
             v●l
             subjectione
             factâ
             alteri
             Ecclesiae
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             The
             Britains
             rejection
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             †
             
               Concil
               :
               Anglic
            
             :
             p.
             188.
             
          
           
             The
             invalidity
             of
             the
             argument
             from
             conversion
             ,
             when
             the
             Britains
             were
             certainly
             not
             converted
             by
             Augustine
             .
          
           
             No
             title
             from
             conversion
             for
             subjection
             .
          
           
             The
             power
             of
             Kings
             to
             erect
             Patriarchates
             .
          
           
             †
             Examples
             in
             
               Justiniana
               Prima
            
             ,
             c.
             5.
             
             §.
             8.
             
          
           
             Carthage
             .
          
           
             †
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             131.
             
          
           
             Ravenna
             .
          
           
             *
             de
             privileg
             :
             Patriar
             :
          
           
             †
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             l.
             4.
             c.
             34.
             
             Grado
             .
          
           
             Frequent
             in
             the
             East
             .
          
           
             So
             also
             to
             translate
             .
          
           
             Examples
             in
             
               England
               .
               Concil
               :
               Angl
            
             :
             p.
             26.
             
          
           
             So
             to
             exempt
             from
             Episcopal
             jurisdiction
             .
          
           
             Kings
             Founders
             of
             Bishopricks
             and
             Patrons
             ,
          
           
             The
             Reason
             of
             all
             ,
             supreme
             power
             of
             Kings
             ,
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             King
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             common
             directer
             and
             ruler
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             both
             in
             title
             and
             reality
             .
             
               Demetrii
               Chomateni
               Resp
               :
               ad
               Const
               :
               Cab
               :
               Jur.
               Graec
               :
               Rom
               :
            
             l.
             5.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Ye
             are
             Bishops
             of
             the
             Church
             for
             those
             things
             which
             are
             celebrated
             within
             it
             ,
             but
             for
             external
             things
             ,
             I
             am
             constituted
             overseer
             or
             Bishop
             by
             God
             ,
             saith
             Constantine
             the
             Great
             in
             an
             assembly
             of
             Bishops
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             I
             am
             King
             and
             Priest
             ,
             saith
             
               Leo
               Isaurus
            
             to
             Gregory
             the
             second
             ,
             
               Nec
               tamen
               eo
               nomine
               à
               Pontifice
               reprehenditur
               ,
            
             and
             was
             not
             for
             this
             reprehended
             by
             the
             Pope
             ,
             see
             
               J.
               C.
               de
               lib.
               Eccl
               :
               ap
               :
               Goldast
               :
               Monarch
            
             :
             t.
             1.
             p.
             686.
             
             So
             Socrates
             the
             historian
             ,
             of
             the
             Emperours
             in
             general
             ,
             after
             their
             receiving
             the
             faith
             of
             Christ
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             affairs
             of
             the
             Church
             depended
             on
             them
             ,
             
               in
               Prooem
            
             .
             l.
             5.
             
             And
             by
             Optatus
             l.
             2.
             it
             is
             noted
             ,
             and
             censured
             as
             a
             Schismatical
             piece
             of
             language
             in
             the
             Donatist●
             ,
             
               Quid
               enim
               Imperatori
               cum
               Ecclesiâ
            
             ?
             And
             all
             this
             according
             to
             the
             principles
             of
             civil
             policy
             acknowledged
             by
             
               Aristotle
               Pol.
            
             3.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             King
             hath
             power
             of
             those
             things
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             Gods
             ;
             and
             by
             Diotogenes
             in
             S●obaeus
             ,
             that
             a
             perfect
             King
             ought
             to
             be
             both
             a
             good
             Captain
             ,
             and
             a
             Judge
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             yea
             and
             a
             Priest
             also
             ;
             And
             accordingly
             among
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             regal
             Lawes
             ,
             this
             is
             one
             ,
             
               Sacrorum
               omniū
               potestas
               sub
               Regibus
               esto
               ,
            
             Let
             the
             power
             of
             all
             sacred
             things
             be
             under
             the
             Kings
             ,
             and
             so
             in
             the
             practice
             ,
             
               Caius
               Caesar
               in
               Suetonius
            
             c.
             13.
             was
             both
             Augur
             and
             
               Summus
               Pontifex
               ▪
               Galba
               tres
               Pontificatus
               gerebat
               ,
            
             Ibid
             :
             Gal.
             c.
             8.
             
             Claudius
             is
             by
             Josephus
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             greatest
             High-priest
             ,
             and
             Tacitus
             makes
             it
             his
             observation
             ,
             
               Deûm
               nunc
               munere
               summum
               Pontificem
               summum
               hominum
               esse
               .
               Annal
               :
            
             l.
             3.
             
             The
             same
             appears
             among
             the
             Jewish
             Kings
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             David
             ordering
             the
             courses
             of
             the
             Priests
             ,
             Solomon
             consecrating
             the
             temple
             ,
             Hezekiah
             2
             Chron
             :
             29.
             2
             
             Kin
             :
             18.
             and
             Josiah
             2
             Kin
             :
             22.
             ordering
             many
             things
             belonging
             to
             it
             .
             And
             so
             S.
             Paul
             appealed
             from
             the
             judgement
             of
             the
             chief
             Priests
             to
             the
             tribunal
             of
             Caesar
             ,
             see
             
               G
               :
               de
               Heimberg
               :
               de
               usurp
               :
               Pap
               :
            
             so
             in
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             whole
             third
             book
             is
             made
             up
             of
             Justinians
             ,
             i.
             e.
             the
             Emperours
             constitutions
             ,
             
               de
               Episcopis
               ,
               Clericis
               &
               Sacris
               ,
            
             concerning
             Bishops
             ,
             Clergy
             men
             ,
             and
             sacred
             offices
             .
             And
             the
             Canons
             of
             Councels
             have
             mostly
             been
             set
             out
             (
             and
             received
             their
             authority
             )
             by
             the
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             in
             the
             Theodosian
             Code
             we
             shall
             find
             many
             of
             those
             which
             are
             now
             called
             
               Papal
               decrees
            
             .
          
           
             and
             Ecclesiastical
             division
             of
             Provinces
             following
             the
             Civil
             .
          
           
             This
             Power
             of
             Kings
             if
             taken
             away
             by
             forein
             laws
             &c.
             resumable
             .
          
           
             So
             if
             alienated
             by
             prescription
             .
          
           
             †
             
               Clav
               :
               Reg
            
             :
             l.
             9.
             c.
             12.
             
          
           
             The
             history
             of
             what
             was
             done
             against
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             in
             the
             Reformation
             .
          
           
             The
             Praemunire
             .
          
           
             The
             Right
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             considered
             .
          
           
             The
             concession
             of
             Kings
             .
          
           
             †
             in
             Goldast
             :
             de
             Mon
             :
          
           
             A
             Dilemma
             against
             the
             plea
             drawn
             from
             that
             .
          
           
             Two
             sorts
             of
             gifts
             .
          
           
             Some
             revocable
             .
          
           
             The
             reasonablenesse
             of
             revoking
             it
             .
          
           
             Title
             &
             power
             of
             Supreme
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             retained
             by
             Queen
             Mary
             .
          
           
             The
             advance
             of
             the
             Reformation
             in
             K
             ng
             Edward's
             daies
             .
          
           
             In
             Queen
             Elizabeth's
             .
          
           
             The
             Creation
             of
             new
             Bishops
             in
             Queen
             Elizabeth's
             time
             ,
             vindicated
             .
          
           
             Three
             branches
             of
             the
             second
             sort
             of
             Schisme
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             A
             departure
             from
             the
             Unity
             of
             Doctrines
             ,
             or
             Traditions
             Apostolical
             .
          
           
             Our
             Church
             vindicated
             from
             this
             ,
             in
             two
             branches
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             first
             ,
             Christs
             Rules
             for
             upholding
             the
             truth
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Second
             ,
             Particular
             doctrines
             .
          
           
             The
             Church
             of
             Englands
             temper
             in
             respect
             of
             particular
             doctrines
             .
          
           
             This
             Church
             free
             from
             breach
             of
             Communion
             Ecclesiastical
             .
          
           
             As
             appears
             by
             six
             Considerations
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             .
          
           
             A
             consideration
             concerning
             our
             Church
             .
          
           
             Contrary
             to
             charity
             due
             from
             all
             to
             all
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Judging
             ▪
             2.
             
             Despising
             .
          
           
             Separating
             the
             effect
             of
             both
             .
          
           
             Of
             Judging
             &
             separating
             the
             Romanists
             guilty
             
               ex
               Confesso
            
          
           
             Of
             despising
             .
             We
             are
             guiltlesse
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Romanists
             argument
             frō
             our
             present
             condition
             of
             Persecution
             .
          
           
             Answered
             .
          
           
             What
             this
             may
             come
             to
             in
             the
             future
             .
          
           
             The
             Conclusion
             .